For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2012 Infiniti M Owner’s Manual Foreword

Your INFINITI represents a new way of warranties covering this vehicle, the re- READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY thinking about vehicle design. It integrates quirements to keep the warranties in effect Before driving your vehicle, read your advanced engineering and superior crafts- as well as the INFINITI Roadside Assis- Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure manship with a simple, refined aesthetic tance program. familiarity with controls and maintenance sensitivity associated with traditional Ja- Additionally, a separate Customer Care requirements, assisting you in the safe panese culture. and Lemon Law Information Booklet will operation of your vehicle. The result is a different notion of luxury explain how to resolve any concerns you and beauty. The car itself is important, but may have with your vehicle, as well as so is the sense of harmony that the vehicle clarify your rights under your state’s WARNING evokes in its driver, and the sense of lemon law. — IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMIN- satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI In addition to factory installed options, DERS FOR SAFETY! from the way it looks and drives to the high your vehicle may also be equipped with level of retailer service. additional accessories installed by INFINITI Follow these important driving rules to help To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to or by your authorized INFINITI retailer prior ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you the fullest, we encourage you to read this to delivery. It is important that you and your passengers! ’ Owner s Manual immediately. It explains familiarize yourself with all disclosures, . NEVER drive under the influence of all of the features, controls and perfor- warnings, cautions and instructions con- alcohol or drugs. mance characteristics of your INFINITI; it cerning proper use of such accessories . also provides important instructions and prior to operating the vehicle and/or ALWAYS observe posted speed limits safety information. accessory. Please see your retailer for and never drive too fast for conditions. . A separate Warranty Information Booklet details concerning the particular acces- ALWAYS give your full attention to is included in your Owner’s literature sories with which your vehicle is driving and avoid using vehicle features portfolio. The INFINITI Service and Main- equipped. or taking other actions that could dis- tenance Guide explains details about tract you. maintaining and servicing your vehicle. . ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro- Always carry it with you when you take priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer. The children should be seated in the rear Warranty Information Booklet contents seat. provide complete information about all . ALWAYS provide information about the IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT proper use of vehicle safety features to THIS MANUAL all occupants of the vehicle. You will see various symbols in this . ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for manual. They are used in the following important safety information. ways:

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, This is used to indicate the presence of a safety or durability, and may even violate hazard that could cause death or serious governmental regulations. In addition, personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely. damage or performance problems result- SIC0697 ing from modification will not be covered under the INFINITI warranties. If you see the symbol above, it means “Do CAUTION not do this” or “Do not let this happen”. WHEN READING THE MANUAL This is used to indicate the presence of a This manual includes information for all hazard that could cause minor or moderate options available on this model. Therefore, If you see a symbol similar to those above personal injury or damage to your vehicle. you may find some information that does in an illustration, it means the arrow points To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures not apply to your vehicle. to the front of the vehicle. must be followed carefully. All information, specifications and illustra- tions in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. INFINITI reserves the Arrows in an illustration that are similar to right to change specifications or design at those above indicate movement or action. any time without notice.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to ® those above call attention to an item in the Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., illustration. U.S.A. and licensed to Visteon CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 Corporation and Clarion Co., Ltd. WARNING Gracenote® is a registered tra- demark of Gracenote, Inc. The Gracenote logo and logo type, WARNING and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Grace- Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, note. and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of XM Radio® requires subscrip- California to cause cancer and birth defects tion, sold separately. Not avail- or other reproductive harm. In addition, able in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam. For more information, visit www. certain fluids contained in vehicles and xmradio.com. certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI- SORY © 2011 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. Some vehicle parts, such as lithium ’ batteries, may contain perchlorate materi- All rights reserved. No part of this Owner s al. The following advisory is provided: Manual may be reproduced or stored in a “Perchlorate Material - special handling retrieval system, or transmitted in any may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ form, or by any means, electronic, mechan- hazardouswaste/perchlorate.” ical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM INFINITI CARES ... Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your INFINITI retailer are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to INFINITI with the informa- INFINITI retailer cannot assist you with or for the following information: tion on the left at: you would like to provide INFINITI directly . Your name, address, and telephone For U.S. customers with comments or questions, please con- number INFINITI Division tact our (INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs De- . Vehicle identification number (on dash Nissan North America, Inc. partment using our toll-free number: panel) Consumer Affairs Department For U.S. customers . Date of purchase P.O. Box 685003 1-800-662-6200 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 . Current odometer reading For Canadian customers For Canadian customers . ’ 1-800-361-4792 Your INFINITI retailer s name INFINITI Division . Your comments or questions Nissan Canada Inc. OR 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and thank you for buying a quality INFINITI vehicle. Table of Illustrated table of contents 0 Contents Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4 Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

Index 10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint Instrument panel...... 0-8 System (SRS)...... 0-2 Meters and gauges ...... 0-9 Exterior front ...... 0-4 Engine compartment ...... 0-10 Exterior rear...... 0-4 VK56VD engine...... 0-10 Passenger compartment ...... 0-5 VQ37VHR engine ...... 0-11 Cockpit ...... 0-6 Warning and indicator lights ...... 0-12 SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

8. Front seats (P.1-3) 9. Seat belts with pretensioners (P.1-51) 10. Rear seats — Child restraints (P.1-21) 11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P.1-22)

SSI0715

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags 5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact (P.1-39) supplemental air bags (P.1-39) 2. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup- 6. Child restraint anchor points (for top plemental air bags (P.1-39) tether strap child restraint) (P.1-35) 3. Seat belts (P.1-12) 7. Occupant classification sensor (pat- 4. Head restraints (P.1-4) tern sensor) (P.1-44)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT

— Wheel and tires (P.8-34, P.9-9) — Flat tire (P.6-2) — Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (P.2-14, P.5-4) 9. Outside mirrors (P.3-26) 10. Doors — Keys (P.3-2) — Door locks (P.3-4) — Intelligent Key system (P.3-7) — Remote keyless entry system (P.3-14) — Welcome light (P.2-58)

SSI0686

1. Hood (P.3-18) — Maintenance (P.8-24) 2. Headlight and turn signal 4. Moonroof (P.2-55) — Operation (P.2-34) 5. Power windows (P.2-53) — Bulb replacement (P.8-31) 6. Recovery hook (P.6-15) 3. Windshield wiper and washer 7. Fog light (P.2-39) — Operation (P.2-31) 8. Tires

Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR REAR

— Operation (P.3-21) — Fuel recommendation (P.9-4) 8. Child safety rear door locks (P.3-6)

SSI0687

1. Trunk 3. Rear combination light (bulb replace- — Intelligent Key system (P.3-7) ment) (P.8-31) — Remote keyless entry system 4. Satellite antenna (P.4-48) (P.3-14) 5. Rear window defroster (P.2-34) — Trunk lid (P.3-18) 6. Rear view camera (P.4-26) 2. High-mounted stop light (P.8-31) 7. Fuel-filler door

0-4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

— Operation (P.3-25) — HomeLink® (P.2-61) 10. Trunk pass-through/Rear armrest (P.1-10) 11. Rear cup holders (P.2-48) 12. Console box — Power outlet (P.2-46) — USB input operation (P.4-68) — iPod® player operation (P.4-78) 13. Front cup holders (P.2-48)

SSI0688

1. Rear sunshade (if so equipped) 6. Moonroof switch (P.2-55) (P.2-57) 7. Map light (P.2-59) 2. Coat hooks (P.2-52) — Active noise control system 3. Rear personal light (P.2-59) (P.5-103) 4. Sun visors (P.3-24) 8. Sunglasses holder (P.2-49) 5. Power windows (P.2-53) 9. Inside rearview mirror

Illustrated table of contents 0-5 COCKPIT

8. Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P.2-57) 9. Steering heater switch (if so equipped) (P.2-40) 10. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-19) 11. Warning systems switch (if so equipped) (P.5-22, P.5-31, P.5-82) 12. IBA OFF switch (if so equipped) (P.5-86) 13. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel lever (P.3-23) 14. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) — Menu control switch (models with navigation system)/Audio tuning switch (models without navigation system) (P.4-87) — BACK switch (models with naviga- tion system) (P.4-87) — TALK switch (P.4-114) SSI0689 — Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem (models with navigation system) 1. Instrument brightness control switch 5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip od- (P.4-89) (P.2-39) ometer (P.2-7) — ® 2. AFS switch (if so equipped) (P.2-37) 6. Windshield wiper and washer switch Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem (models without navigation sys- 3. Headlight, fog light and turn signal (P.2-31) tem) (P.4-100) switch (P.2-34) 7. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF — Volume control switch (P.4-87) 4. Trip computer switch (P.2-26) switch (P.5-98) — Audio source switch (P.4-48)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents 15. Steering wheel — Horn (P.2-41) — Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-39) — Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) (P.2-40) 16. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side) — Cruise control switches (P.5-45) — Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P.5-47) — Dynamic driver assistance switch (if so equipped) (P.5-31, P.5-69)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7 INSTRUMENT PANEL

— Vehicle information and setting buttons (P.4-10) — Audio system (P.4-48) 9. Automatic climate control system (P.4-33)/Forest Air® system (P.4-33) 10. Center ventilator (P.4-33) 11. Audio system (P.4-48) 12. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-39) 13. Hood release handle (P.3-18) 14. Fuse box cover (P.8-26) 15. Parking brake — Parking (P.5-18) 16. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-9) 17. Climate controlled seat switch (P.2-43) /Seat heater switch (P.2-41) 18. Drive mode select switch (P.5-19) 19. Cigarette lighter and ashtray (P.2-47) 20. Glove box lid release handle (P.2-50)

SSI0690 21. Trunk release power cancel switch (P.3-20) 1. Side ventilator (P.4-33) 6. Center display (P.4-4)/Navigation sys- *: Refer to the separate Navigation 2. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-16) tem* (if so equipped) System Owner’s Manual. 3. Meters and gauges (P.2-6) 7. Clock (P.2-46) 4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-40) 8. Center multi-function control panel 5. Rear window and outside mirror — Navigation system* (if so defroster switch (P.2-34) equipped)

0-8 Illustrated table of contents METERS AND GAUGES

SIC4317

1. Tachometer (P.2-7) (P.2-20) 2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-10) 6. Fuel gauge (P.2-9) 3. Speedometer (P.2-6) 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-8) 5. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/ Odometer/twin trip odometer Illustrated table of contents 0-9 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

VK56VD ENGINE 1. Battery (P.8-19) 2. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-26) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-13) 4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-17) 5. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-18) 6. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-16) 7. Air cleaner (P.8-22) 8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-11) 9. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-11) 10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-13) 11. Drive belts (P.8-21) 12. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-26)

SDI2538

0-10 Illustrated table of contents VQ37VHR ENGINE 1. Battery (P.8-19) 2. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-26) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-13) 4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-17) 5. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-18) 6. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-16) 7. Air cleaner (P.8-22) 8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-11) 9. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-11) 10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-13) 11. Drive belts (P.8-21) 12. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-26)

SDI2537

Illustrated table of contents 0-11 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Warning Indicator Name Page Name Page Name Page light light light All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning Preview Function warning light Malfunction Indicator Light 2-11 2-15 2-18 light* (orange)* (MIL) Seat belt warning light and Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) 2-15 Security indicator light 2-19 2-11 chime warning light Supplemental air bag warning Low beam indicator light 2-16 2-19 light (green) Automatic Transmission check 2-11 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Turn signal/hazard indicator warning light 2-16 2-19 warning light lights Adaptive Front lighting System Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Brake warning light 2-11 2-16 2-19 (AFS) off indicator light* off indicator light *: if so equipped Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/ Indicator Name Page Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) 2-12 light system warning light (orange)* Automatic Transmission (AT) Charge warning light 2-12 position indicator light* 2-17 Distance Control Assist (DCA) Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) ON 2-12 system warning light (orange)* indicator light 2-17 (green)* Engine oil pressure warning 2-13 ECO drive indicator light light 2-17 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) 2-13 Front fog light indicator light warning light* 2-17 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) Front passenger air bag status 2-13 system warning light (orange)* light 2-17 Lane departure warning light High beam indicator light 2-13 2-17 (orange)* Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off Low tire pressure warning light 2-14 indicator light* 2-17 Master warning light 2-15 Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON indicator light (green)* 2-18

0-12 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats...... 1-2 Rear-facing child restraint installation Front seats...... 1-3 using LATCH...... 1-24 Head restraints...... 1-4 Rear-facing child restraint installation using Adjustable headrests...... 1-8 the seat belts ...... 1-26 Armrest ...... 1-10 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH...... 1-29 Seat belts...... 1-12 Forward-facing child restraint installation Precautions on seat belt usage ...... 1-12 using the seat belts...... 1-31 Pregnant women ...... 1-14 Installing top tether strap ...... 1-35 Injured persons...... 1-14 Booster seats ...... 1-35 Pre-crash seat belts with comfort function Supplemental restraint system...... 1-39 (front seats) (if so equipped)...... 1-14 Precautions on supplemental Three-point type seat belt ...... 1-15 restraint system...... 1-39 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-18 INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System Seat belt maintenance...... 1-18 (front seats)...... 1-44 Child safety ...... 1-19 Front seat-mounted side-impact Infants...... 1-20 supplemental air bag and roof-mounted Small children...... 1-20 curtain side-impact supplemental air Larger children ...... 1-20 bag systems ...... 1-49 Child restraints...... 1-21 Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats).... 1-51 Precautions on child restraints ...... 1-21 Supplemental air bag warning labels...... 1-52 Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Supplemental air bag warning light ...... 1-52 System (LATCH) ...... 1-22 Repair and replacement procedure...... 1-53 SEATS

being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damages.

SSS0133

adjust the seat belt properly. See “Pre- WARNING cautions on seat belt usage” later in this section. . Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the . Do not leave children unattended inside seatback is reclined. This can be danger- the vehicle. They could unknowingly ous. The shoulder belt will not be activate switches or controls. Unat- against your body. In an accident, you tended children could become involved could be thrown into it and receive neck in serious accidents. or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive . The seatback should not be reclined serious internal injuries. further than necessary for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the pas- . For the most effective protection when senger sits well back and straight up in the vehicle is in motion, the seat should the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the be upright. Always sit well back in the risk of sliding under the lap belt and seat with both feet on the floor and 1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system FRONT SEATS Front power seat adjustment Operating tips: . The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 sec- onds, then reactivate the switch. . Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. See “Automatic drive positioner” in the “3. SSS0834 Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- tion for the seat position memory function. Forward and backward: the seatback can be reclined to allow Moving the switch *1 forward or backward occupants to rest when the vehicle is will slide the seat forward or backward to parked. the desired position. Reclining: Move the recline switch *2 backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch *2 forward. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section.) Also,

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 straints properly, as specified in this sec- tion. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint. Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been removed. If the head restraint was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. SSS0835 SSS0795

Seat lifter: Lumbar support (if so equipped): Push the front or rear end of the switch up The lumbar support feature provides lower or down to adjust the angle of the front back support to the driver. portion or height of the seat. Push the front *1 or back *2 end of the switch to adjust the seatback lumbar area. HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other vehi- cle safety systems. They may provide addi- tional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the head re-

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0989 SSS0992 SSS0997

The illustration shows the seating posi- Components Adjustment tions equipped with head restraints. The head restraints are adjustable. 1. Head restraint Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of your ears. Indicates the seating position is 2. Adjustment notches equipped with a head restraint. 3. Lock knob 4. Stalk

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 SSS0993 SSS0994 SSS0995

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and Removal push the head restraint down. Use the following procedure to remove the adjustable head restraints. 1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position. 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 3. Remove the head restraint from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system seating position.

SSS0996 SSS0508

Install Front-seat Active Head Restraints 1. Align the head restraint stalks with the The Active Head Restraint moves forward holes in the seat. Make sure that the utilizing the force that the seatback re- head restraint is facing the correct ceives from the occupant in a rear-end direction. The stalk with the adjustment collision. The movement of the head notches *1 must be installed in the restraint helps support the occupant’s hole with the lock knob *2 . head by reducing its backward movement 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push and helping absorb some of the forces that the head restraint down. may lead to whiplash-type injuries. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint Active Head Restraints are effective for before an occupant uses the seating collisions at low to medium speeds in position. which it is said that whiplash-type injury occurs most. Active Head Restraints operate only in

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 certain rear-end collisions. After the colli- sion, the head restraints return to their original positions. Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described earlier in this section. ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTS

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury SSS1015 SSS0992 in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrest properly, as specified in this The illustration shows the seating posi- Components section. Check the adjustment after some- tions equipped with adjustable headrests. 1. Adjustable headrest one else uses the seat. Do not attach Indicates the seating position is anything to the adjustable headrest stalks equipped with an adjustable headrest. 2. Adjustment notches or remove the adjustable headrest. Do not 3. Lock knob use the seat if the adjustable headrest has 4. Stalks been removed. If the adjustable headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the adjustable headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0997 SSS0993 SSS0994

Adjustment To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down. Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 SSS0995 SSS0996 SSS1061

Removal Install ARMREST Use the following procedure to remove the 1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes Rear armrest adjustable headrests. in the seat. Make sure that the head- rest is facing the correct direction. The Pull the armrest forward until it is hor- 1. Pull the headrest up to the highest izontal. position. stalk with the adjustment notches *1 must be installed in the hole with the 2. Push and hold the lock knob. lock knob *2 . 3. Remove the headrest from the seat. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push 4. Store the headrest properly in a secure the headrest down. place so it is not loose in the vehicle. 3. Properly adjust the headrest before an 5. Install and properly adjust the headrest occupant uses the seating position. before an occupant uses the seating position.

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system removed from the trunk pass-through lid key cylinder before opening or closing the lid. Otherwise the lid and the rear armrest may be damaged.

SSS0479

Trunk pass-through The rear center seatback can be folded to allow trunk access from inside of the vehicle. To access the trunk, pull down the rear center armrest and pull out the trunk pass- through lid *1 . To lock the lid, use the mechanical key and turn it to the LOCK position *2 . To unlock, turn the mechanical key to the UNLOCK position *3 . For the mechanical key usage, see “Keys” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section. Make sure that the mechanical key is

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position in- cludes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be SSS0136A worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0134A

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . Do not wear the seat belt inside out or should be done by an INFINITI retailer. WARNING twisted. Doing so may reduce its effec- . All seat belt assemblies, including re- tiveness. tractors and attaching hardware, should . Every person who drives or rides in this . Do not allow more than one person to be inspected after any collision by an vehicle should use a seat belt at all use the same seat belt. INFINITI retailer. INFINITI recommends times. Children should be properly re- that all seat belt assemblies in use strained in the rear seat and, if appro- . Never carry more people in the vehicle during a collision be replaced unless priate, in a child restraint. than there are seat belts. the collision was minor and the belts . If the seat belt warning light glows . The seat belt should be properly ad- show no damage and continue to oper- continuously while the ignition is turned justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may ate properly. reduce the effectiveness of the entire ON with all doors closed and all seat restraint system and increase the chance belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- Seat belt assemblies not in use during a or severity of injury in an accident. function in the system. Have the system collision should also be inspected and Serious injury or death can occur if the checked by an INFINITI retailer. replaced if either damage or improper seat belt is not worn properly. . No changes should be made to the seat operation is noted. . Always route the shoulder belt over your belt system. For example, do not modify . All child restraints and attaching hard- shoulder and across your chest. Never the seat belt, add material or install ware should be inspected after any run the belt behind your back, under devices that may change the seat belt collision. Always follow the restraint your arm or across your neck. The belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect manufacturer’s inspection instructions should be away from your face and neck, the operation of the seat belt system. and replacement recommendations. The but not falling off your shoulder. Modifying or tampering with the seat child restraints should be replaced if belt system may result in serious perso- they are damaged. . Position the lap belt as low and snug as nal injury. possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could . Once a seat belt pretensioner has increase the risk of internal injuries in an activated, it cannot be reused and must accident. be replaced together with the retractor. See an INFINITI retailer. . Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. . Removal and installation of the preten- sioner seat belt system components

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 PREGNANT WOMEN . Activation of the Intelligent Brake Assist “ INFINITI recommends that pregnant women (IBA) system. (See Intelligent Brake ” “ use seat belts. The seat belt should be Assist (IBA) system in the 5. Starting ” worn snug, and always position the lap and driving section.) belt as low as possible around the hips, The pre-crash seat belt will not be active not the waist, and place the shoulder belt when: over your shoulder and across your chest. . the seat belt is not fastened Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your . the vehicle speed is under 10 MPH (15 abdominal area. Contact your doctor for km/h) during emergency braking specific recommendations. . the vehicle speed is under 16 MPH (30 INJURED PERSONS km/h) during sudden steering maneu- vers. INFINITI recommends that injured persons SSS0016 The pre-crash seat belt will not be active use seat belts, depending on the injury. when the brake pedal is not depressed Check with your doctor for specific recom- except when sudden steering maneuvers mendations. occur and the Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS WITH COM- system activates. FORT FUNCTION (front seats) (if so The motor also retracts the seat belt when equipped) the seat belt is fastened or unfastened. The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat When the seat belt is fastened, the motor belt with a motor to help restrain front seat tightens the seat belt for a snug fit. When occupants. This helps reduce the risk of the seat belt is unfastened, the motor injury in a collision. retracts the seat belt. If the seat belt is not fully retracted, the motor retracts the seat The motor retracts the seat belt under the belt when the door is opened. following emergency conditions: Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit . During emergency braking SSS0014 upright and well back. . During sudden steering maneuvers If the motor cannot retract the seat belt

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system when the seat belt is fastened or unfas- serious internal injuries. tened, it may indicate the pre-crash seat . belt system has a malfunction. Have your For the most effective protection when INFINITI retailer check and repair the the vehicle is in motion, the seat should system. be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and When the seat belt is retracted repeatedly adjust the seat belt properly. in a short period of time, the motor may not be able to retract the seat belt. After 30 seconds, the motor reactivates and retracts the seat belt. If the seat belt still cannot be retracted by the motor, the pre-crash seat belt system has a malfunction. Have your INFINITI retailer check and repair the SSS0292 system. THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT Fastening the seat belts 1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” earlier in WARNING this section.) 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the . Every person who drives or rides in this retractor and insert the tongue into the vehicle should use a seat belt at all buckle until you hear and feel the latch times. engage. . . Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the The retractor is designed to lock seatback is reclined. This can be danger- during a sudden stop or on impact. ous. The shoulder belt will not be A slow pulling motion permits the against your body. In an accident, you belt to move, and allows you some could be thrown into it and receive neck freedom of movement in the seat. or other serious injuries. You could also . If the seat belt cannot be pulled slide under the lap belt and receive from its fully retracted position,

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 firmly pull the belt and release it. The ELR locks the seat belt when the Then smoothly pull the belt out of vehicle slows down rapidly or during the retractor. impacts. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, SSS0290 see “Child restraints” later in this section. The ALR mode should be used only for 3. Position the lap belt portion low and child restraint installation. During normal snug on the hips as shown. seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward mode should not be activated. If it is the retractor to take up extra slack. Be activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat sure the shoulder belt is routed over belt tension. your shoulder and across your chest. The three-point type seat belts have two WARNING modes of operation: . Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) When fastening the seat belts, be certain . Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that seatbacks are completely secured in The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) the latched position. If they are not com- mode allows the seat belt to extend and pletely secured, passengers may be injured retract to allow the driver and passengers in an accident or sudden stop. some freedom of movement in the seat.

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any question about seat belt operation, see an INFINITI retailer.

SSS0326 SSS1084

Unfastening the seat belts Center of rear seat To unfasten the seat belt, push the button Selecting correct set of seat belts: on the buckle. The seat belt automatically The center seat belt buckle is identified by retracts. the CENTER mark *A . The center seat belt Checking seat belt operation tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle. Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: . When the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. . When the vehicle slows down rapidly. To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 WARNING WARNING

. After adjustment, release the adjustment . Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made button and try to move the shoulder belt by the same company which made the anchor up and down to make sure it is original equipment seat belts, should be securely fixed in position. used with the INFINITI seat belts. . The shoulder belt anchor height should . Adults and children who can use the be adjusted to the position best for you. standard seat belt should not use an Failure to do so may reduce the effec- extender. Such unnecessary use could tiveness of the entire restraint system result in serious personal injury in the and increase the chance or severity of event of an accident. SSS0294A injury in an accident. . Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is Shoulder belt height adjustment SEAT BELT EXTENDERS not secured properly, the child could be (front seats) If, because of body size or driving position, seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop. The shoulder belt anchor height should be it is not possible to properly fit the lap- adjusted to the position best for you. (See shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender “Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in that is compatible with the installed seat SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE this section.) belts is available that can be purchased. . To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 To adjust, push the button *A , and then mild soap solution or any solution mm) of length and may be used for either move the shoulder belt anchor to the recommended for cleaning upholstery the driver or front passenger seating desired position, so that the belt passes or carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and position. See an INFINITI retailer for assis- over the center of the shoulder. The belt allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. tance with purchasing an extender if an should be away from your face and neck, Do not allow the seat belts to retract extender is required. but not falling off of your shoulder. Release until they are completely dry. the adjustment button to lock the shoulder . If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt belt anchor into position. guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CHILD SAFETY

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the Children need adults to help protect them. shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry They need to be properly restrained. WARNING cloth. In addition to the general information in . Periodically check to see that the seat this manual, child safety information is Infants and children need special protection. belt and the metal components such as available from many other sources, includ- The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible ing doctors, teachers, government traffic properly. The shoulder belt may come too wires and anchors work properly. If safety offices, and community organiza- close to the face or neck. The lap belt may loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other tions. Every child is different, so be sure to not fit over their small hip bones. In an damage on the webbing is found, the learn the best way to transport your child. accident, an improperly fitting seat belt entire seat belt assembly should be There are three basic types of child could cause serious or fatal injury. Always replaced. restraint systems: use appropriate child restraints. . Rear-facing child restraint All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or . Forward-facing child restraint territories require the use of approved . Booster seat child restraints for infants and small The proper restraint depends on the child’s children. See “Child restraints” later in size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year this section. and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be A child restraint may be secured in the placed in rear-facing child restraints. For- vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower ward-facing child restraints are available Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system or for children who outgrow rear-facing child with the vehicle seat belt. See “Child restraints and are at least 1 year old. restraints” later in this section for more Booster seats are used to help position a information. vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens restraint. and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 This is especially important because your that small children be placed in child label certifying that it complies with vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- restraints that comply with Federal Motor Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You Once the child has grown so the shoulder later in this section. should choose a child restraint that fits belt is no longer on or near the face and your vehicle and always follow the manu- neck, use the shoulder belt without the INFANTS facturer’s instructions for installation and booster seat. Infants up to at least 1 year old should be use. placed in a rear-facing child restraint. INFINITI recommends that infants be placed LARGER CHILDREN WARNING in child restraints that comply with Federal Children who are too large for child Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana- restraints should be seated and restrained Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You by the seat belts which are provided. The and do not allow a child in the cargo area. should choose a child restraint that fits seat belt may not fit properly if the child is The child could be seriously injured or killed your vehicle and always follow the manu- less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5 cm) tall and in a sudden stop or collision. facturer’s instructions for installation and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and 80 lbs use. (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit. SMALL CHILDREN INFINITI recommends that a child be placed Children that are over 1 year old and weigh in a commercially available booster seat if at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a the shoulder belt fits close to the face or rear-facing child restraint as long as neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt possible up to the height or weight limit goes across the abdomen. The booster seat of the child restraint. Forward-facing child should raise the child so that the shoulder restraints are available for children who belt is properly positioned across the top, outgrow rear facing child restraints and are middle portion of the shoulder and the lap at least 1 year old. Refer to the manufac- belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can ’ turer s instructions for minimum and max- only be used in seating positions that have imum weight and height a three-point type seat belt. The booster recommendations. INFINITI recommends seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a 1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CHILD RESTRAINTS

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE- “Forward-facing child restraint in- STRAINTS stallation using the seat belts” later in this section. WARNING — Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear- . Failure to follow the warnings and facing child restraint in the front instructions for proper use and installa- seat. An inflating air bag could tion of child restraints could result in seriously injure or kill a child. A serious injury or death of a child or other rear-facing child restraint must only passengers in a sudden stop or collision: be used in the rear seat. — The child restraint must be used and — Be sure to purchase a child restraint installed properly. Always follow all that will fit the child and vehicle. SSS0099 of the child restraint manufacturer’s Some child restraints may not fit instructions for installation and use. properly in your vehicle. — Infants and children should never be — Child restraint anchor points are held on anyone’slap.Eventhe designed to withstand loads from strongest adult cannot resist the child restraints that are properly forces of a collision. fitted. — Do not put a seat belt around both a — Never use the anchor points for child and another passenger. adult seat belts or harnesses. — INFINITI recommends that all child — A child restraint with a top tether restraints be installed in the rear strap should not be used in the seat. Studies show that children are front passenger seat. safer when properly restrained in — Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- the rear seat than in the front seat. sible after fitting the child restraint. SSS0100 If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, see — Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 restraint while in the vehicle. Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and small children of various . When the child restraint is not in use, sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep it secured with the LATCH system keep the following points in mind: or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or . Choose only a restraint with a label collision, loose objects can injure occu- certifying that it complies with Federal pants or damage the vehicle. Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dard 213. CAUTION . Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the A child restraint in a closed vehicle can vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. become very hot. Check the seating surface . If the child restraint is compatible with SSS0567 and buckles before placing a child in the your vehicle, place your child in the LATCH label location child restraint. child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child Lower Anchors and Tethers for This vehicle is equipped with a universal restraint is compatible with your child. CHildren SYSTEM (LATCH) child restraint anchor system, referred to Choose a child restraint that is de- Your vehicle is equipped with special as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers ’ signed for your child s height and anchor points that are used with the LATCH for CHildren) system. Some child restraints weight. Always follow all recommended (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) include rigid or webbing-mounted attach- procedures. system compatible child restraints. This ments that can be connected to these All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or system may also be referred to as the anchors. territories require that infants and small ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With For details, see “Lower Anchors and children be restrained in an approved child this system, you do not have to use a Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH)” later restraint at all times while the vehicle is vehicle seat belt to secure the child in this section. being operated. Canadian law requires the restraint. If you do not have a LATCH compatible top tether strap on forward-facing child child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can restraints be secured to the designated be used. anchor point on the vehicle.

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc- tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: . Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration. SSS0637 SSS0643 . Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint LATCH lower anchor location Installing child restraint LATCH will not be secured properly. The LATCH anchors are located at the rear lower anchor attachments . Inspect the lower anchors by inserting of the seat cushion near the seatback. A LATCH compatible child restraints include your fingers into the lower anchor area. label is attached to the seatback to help two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments Feel to make sure there are no obstruc- you locate the LATCH anchors. that can be connected to anchors located tions over the anchors such as seat belt at certain seating positions in your vehicle. webbing or seat cushion material. The With this system, you do not have to use a child restraint will not be secured vehicle seat belt to secure the child properly if the lower anchors are ob- restraint. Check your child restraint for a structed. label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN- STALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec- tions before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint man- ufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0644 SSS0791 LATCH rigid attachment When installing a child restraint, carefully Top tether anchor point locations read and follow the instructions in this Anchor points are located on the rear manual and those supplied with the child parcel shelf. restraint. The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing child restraints with the LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts. (See “Installing top tether strap” later in this section.) If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult an INFINITI retailer for details.

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0648 SSS0649 SSS0639 Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing — step 3 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- 3. For child restraints that are equipped tachments to the LATCH lower anchors. with webbing-mounted attachments, Check to make sure the LATCH attach- remove any additional slack from the ment is properly attached to the lower anchor attachments. Press downward anchors. and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to com- press the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.

SSS0650 SSS0100 Rear-facing — step 4 4. After attaching the child restraint, test REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN- it before you place the child in it. Push STALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attach- ment path. The child restraint should WARNING not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward The three-point seat belt with Automatic and check to see if the LATCH attach- Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when ment holds the restraint in place. If the installing a child restraint. Failure to use the restraint is not secure, tighten the ALR mode will result in the child restraint LATCH attachment as necessary, or not being properly secured. The restraint put the restraint in another seat and could tip over or be loose and cause injury test it again. You may need to try a to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, different child restraint or try installing it can change the operation of the front “ by using the vehicle seat belt (if passenger air bag. See Front passenger air

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system bag and status light” later in this section.

SSS0100 SSS0654 Rear-facing — step 1 Rear-facing — step 2 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the “Child safety” earlier in this section and child restraint and insert it into the “Child restraints” earlier in this section buckle until you hear and feel the latch before installing a child restraint. engage. Be sure to follow the child ’ Follow these steps to install a rear-facing restraint manufacturer s instructions child restraint using the vehicle seat belts for belt routing. in the rear seats: 1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the restraint man- ufacturer’s instructions.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 SSS0655 SSS0656 SSS0657 Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4 Rear-facing — step 5 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 5. Remove any additional slack from the fully extended. At this time, the seat the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- belt retractor is in the Automatic Lock- in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child ing Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint restraint to compress the vehicle seat mode). It reverts to the Emergency cushion and seatback while pulling up Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when on the seat belt. the seat belt is fully retracted.

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec- tions before installing a child restraint. SSS0658 SSS0645 Follow these steps to install a forward- Rear-facing — step 6 Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2 facing child restraint using the LATCH 6. After attaching the child restraint, test 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- system: it before you place the child in it. Push tachments to the LATCH lower anchors. it from side to side while holding the 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Check to make sure the LATCH attach- child restraint near the seat belt path. Always follow the child restraint man- ment is properly attached to the lower The child restraint should not move ufacturer’s instructions. anchors. more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to If the child restraint is equipped with a side. Try to tug it forward and check to top tether strap, route the top tether see if the belt holds the restraint in strap and secure the tether strap to the place. If the restraint is not secure, tether anchor point. See “Installing top tighten the seat belt as necessary, or tether strap” later in this section. Do put the restraint in another seat and not install child restraints that require test it again. You may need to try a the use of a top tether strap in seating different child restraint. Not all child positions that do not have a top tether restraints fit in all types of vehicles. anchor.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

SSS0646 SSS0647 Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 3 Forward-facing — step 4 3. The back of the child restraint should 4. For child restraints that are equipped be secured against the vehicle seat- with webbing-mounted attachments, back. remove any additional slack from the If necessary, adjust or remove the anchor attachments. Press downward headrest to obtain the correct child and rearward firmly in the center of the restraint fit. If the headrest is removed, child restraint with your knee to com- store it in a secure place. Be sure to press the vehicle seat cushion and reinstall the headrest when the child seatback while tightening the webbing restraint is removed. See “Adjustable of the anchor attachments. headrests” earlier in this sectio- 5. Tighten the tether strap according to n“Adjustable headrest” in this section the manufacturer’s instructions to re- for headrest adjustment information. move any slack. If the seating position does not have an adjustable headrest and it is interfering

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic SSS0638 Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when SSS0640 installing a child restraint. Failure to use the Forward-facing — step 6 Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — ALR mode will result in the child restraint 6. After attaching the child restraint, test step 1 not being properly secured. The restraint it before you place the child in it. Push Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the could tip over or be loose and cause injury it from side to side while holding the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec- to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, child restraint near the LATCH attach- tions before installing a child restraint. it can change the operation of the front ment path. The child restraint should passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air Follow these steps to install a forward- not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), bag and status light” later in this section. facing child restraint using the vehicle seat from side to side. Try to tug it forward belt in the rear seats or in the front and check to see if the LATCH attach- passenger seat: ment holds the restraint in place. If the 1. If you must install a child restraint in restraint is not secure, tighten the the front seat, it should be placed in a LATCH attachment as necessary, or forward-facing direction only. Move the put the restraint in another seat and seat to the rearmost position. Child test it again. You may need to try a restraints for infants must be used in different child restraint. Not all child the rear-facing direction and, therefore, restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 must not be used in the front seat. positions that do not have a top tether 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. anchor. Always follow the child restraint man- ufacturer’s instructions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat- back. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint or headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when SSS0360B the child restraint is removed. See Forward-facing — step 3 “Head restraints” earlier in this section 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the or “Adjustable headrests” earlier in this child restraint and insert it into the section for head restraint or headrest buckle until you hear and feel the latch adjustment, removal and installation engage. Be sure to follow the child information. restraint manufacturer’s instructions If the seating position does not have an for belt routing. adjustable head restraint or headrest If the child restraint is equipped with a and it is interfering with the proper top tether strap, route the top tether child restraint fit, try another seating strap and secure the tether strap to the position or a different child restraint. tether anchor point (rear seat installa- tion only). See “Installing top tether strap” later in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0651 SSS0652 SSS0653 Forward-facing — step 4 Forward-facing — step 5 Forward-facing — step 6 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the fully extended. At this time, the seat the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- belt retractor is in the Automatic Lock- in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child ing Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint restraint with your knee to compress mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking the vehicle seat cushion and seatback Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt while pulling up on the seat belt. is fully retracted. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to re- move any slack.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

SSS0641 SSS1085 Forward-facing — step 8 Forward-facing — step 10 8. After attaching the child restraint, test 10.If the child restraint is installed in the it before you place the child in it. Push front passenger seat, place the ignition it from side to side while holding the switch in the ON position. The front child restraint near the seat belt path. passenger air bag status light The child restraint should not move should illuminate. If this light is not more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to illuminated, see “Front passenger air side. Try to tug it forward and check to bag and status light” later in this see if the belt holds the restraint in section. Move the child restraint to place. If the restraint is not secure, another seating position. Have the tighten the seat belt as necessary, or system checked by an INFINITI retailer. put the restraint in another seat and After the child restraint is removed and the test it again. You may need to try a seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode different child restraint. Not all child (child restraint mode) is canceled. restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system removed. BOOSTER SEATS “ ” See Adjustable headrests earlier in Precautions on booster seats this section for headrest adjustment, removal and installation information. Position the top tether strap over the WARNING top of the seatback. If a booster seat and seat belt are not used 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether properly, the risk of a child being injured in anchor point on the rear parcel shelf. a sudden stop or collision greatly increases: 4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint . installation procedure steps in this Make sure the shoulder portion of the ’ section before tightening the tether belt is away from the child s face and strap. neck and the lap portion of the belt does SSS0791 not cross the stomach. If you have any questions when installing . a top tether strap, consult your INFINITI Make sure the shoulder belt is not INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP ’ retailer for details. behind the child or under the child s First, secure the child restraint with the arm. LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seat . A booster seat must only be installed in positions only) or the seat belt, as applic- a seating position that has a lap/ able. shoulder belt. 1. Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat. 2. If necessary, raise or remove the head- rest to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback. If the headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest when the child restraint is

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended proce- dures.

LRS0455 LRS0453 Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting . Make sure the child’s head will be any booster seat, keep the following points properly supported by the booster seat in mind: or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at ’ . Choose only a booster seat with a label or above the center of the child s ears. For example, if a low back booster seat certifying that it complies with Federal * Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or 1 is chosen, the vehicle seatback Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- must be at or above the center of the ’ dard 213. child s ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a . Check the booster seat in your vehicle high back booster seat *2 should be to be sure it is compatible with the used. vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. . If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections earlier in this section before installing a child restraint. LRS0464 SSS0640 Follow these steps to install a booster seat All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or in the rear seat or in the front passenger 1. If you must install a booster seat in the territories require that infants and small seat: front seat, move the seat to the rear- children be restrained in an approved child most position. restraint at all times while the vehicle is 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. being operated. Only place it in a forward-facing direc- The instructions in this section apply to tion. Always follow the booster seat booster seat installation in the rear seats manufacturer’s instructions. or the front passenger seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manu- facturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up LRS0454 extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is SSS1085 positioned across the top, middle por- Front passenger position tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to 7. If the booster seat is installed in the 3. The booster seat should be positioned follow the booster seat manufacturer’s front passenger seat, push the ignition on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. instructions for adjusting the seat belt switch to the ON position. The front If necessary, adjust or remove the head routing. passenger air bag status light may restraint or headrest to obtain the 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and or may not illuminate depending on the correct booster seat fit. If the head instructions for properly fastening a size of the child and the type of booster restraint or headrest is removed, store “ seat belt shown in “Seat belts” earlier seat used. See Front passenger air it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall ” in this section. bag and status light later in this the head restraint or headrest when section. the booster seat is removed. See “Head restraints” earlier in this section or “Adjustable headrests” earlier in this section for head restraint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL collisions. The curtain air bags are de- RESTRAINT SYSTEM signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information These supplemental restraint systems are concerning the driver and passenger front designed to supplement the crash protec- impact supplemental air bags (INFINITI tion provided by the driver and passenger Advanced Air Bag System), front seat- seat belts and are not a substitute for mounted side-impact supplemental air them. Seat belts should always be cor- bag system, roof-mounted curtain side- rectly worn and the occupant seated a impact supplemental air bag and seat belt suitable distance away from the steering with pretensioners. wheel, instrument panel and door fin- ishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this Supplemental front-impact air bag system: section for instructions and precautions on The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can seat belt usage.) help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger The supplemental air bags operate only in certain frontal collisions. when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- mental air bag system: This system can After pushing the ignition switch to the ON help cushion the impact force to the chest position, the supplemental air bag warn- and pelvis area of the driver and front ing light illuminates. The supplemental air passenger in certain side impact collisions. bag warning light will turn off after about The side air bag is designed to inflate on 7 seconds if the systems are operational. the side where the vehicle is impacted. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple- mental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 WARNING

. The supplemental front air bags ordina- rily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. . The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status SSS0131B light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. . The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the INFINITI advanced air bag system, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries SSS0132B from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates.

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Always sit back against the seatback and as far-away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. . The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. SSS0007 SSS0008 . The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. . Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk of injury if the front air bag inflates. SSS0006 SSS0009

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 WARNING

. Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. . Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they SSS0099 are not properly restrained. Pre-teens SSS0059A and children should be properly re- strained in the rear seat, if possible. . Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for details.

SSS0100 SSS0188A

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . The seat belts, side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions SSS0140 SSS0159 are shown in the previous illustrations. . When sitting in the rear seat, do not WARNING hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates, Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen- you may be seriously injured. Be espe- tal air bags and roof-mounted curtain side- cially careful with children, who should impact supplemental air bags: always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions . The front seat-mounted side-impact air are shown in the illustrations. bags and roof-mounted curtain air bags . Do not use seat covers on the front ordinarily will not inflate in the event of seatbacks. They may interfere with a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or supplemental side air bag inflation. lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the SSS0162 risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 8. Lap outer pretensioners (if so equipped) 9. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) 10. Satellite sensors 11. Seat belts with pretensioners INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS- TEM (front seats) This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification require- ments under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box. The SSS1086 front air bags are designed to inflate in 1. Crash zone sensor 5. Occupant classification system con- higher severity frontal collisions, although 2. Supplemental front air bag modules trol unit they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a (INFINITI Advanced Air Bags) 6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact higher severity frontal impact. They may 3. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup- supplemental air bags not inflate in certain frontal collisions. plemental air bags 7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always supplemental air bag inflators 4. Occupant classification sensor (pat- an indication of proper front air bag tern sensor) 1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system operation. bag system, contact an INFINITI retailer. If of the front air bag inflating can increase The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System has you are considering modification of your the risk of injury if the occupant is too dual stage air bag inflators. The system vehicle due to a disability, you may also close to, or is against, the air bag module monitors information from the crash zone contact an INFINITI retailer. Contact infor- during inflation. sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat mation is contained in the front of this The front air bags deflate quickly after a ’ belt buckle switches and the occupant Owner s Manual. collision. classification sensor (pattern sensor). In- When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud The supplemental front air bags operate flator operation is based on the severity of noise may be heard, followed by release of only when the ignition switch is in the ON a collision and seat belt usage for the smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does position. driver. For the front passenger, the occu- not indicate a fire. Care should be taken After pushing the ignition switch to the ON pant classification sensor is also moni- not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation position, the supplemental air bag warn- tored. Based on information from the and choking. Those with a history of a ing light illuminates. The supplemental air sensors, only one front air bag may inflate breathing condition should get fresh air bag warning light will turn off after about in a crash, depending on the crash severity promptly. 7 seconds if the system is operational. and whether the front occupants are belted Front air bags, along with the use of seat or unbelted. Additionally, the front pas- belts, help to cushion the impact force on senger air bag may be automatically turned the head and chest of the front occupants. OFF under some conditions, depending on They can help save lives and reduce the information provided by the occupant serious injuries. However, an inflating front classification sensor. If the front passenger air bag may cause facial abrasions or other air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status injuries. Front air bags do not provide light will be illuminated (if the seat is restraint to the lower body. unoccupied, the light will not be illumi- Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat nated, but the air bag will be off). (See belts should be correctly worn and the “Front passenger air bag and status light” driver and passenger seated upright as far later in this section for further details.) One as practical away from the steering wheel front air bag inflating does not indicate or instrument panel. The front air bags improper performance of the system. inflate quickly in order to help protect the If you have any questions about your air front occupants. Because of this, the force

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 restraints can increase the risk or severity Front passenger air bag: of injury in an accident. The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as de- Status light: scribed below as permitted by U.S. regula- The front passenger air bag status light tions. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, is located above the ashtray. After the it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air ignition switch is placed in the "ON" bag and other air bags in your vehicle are position, the front passenger air bag status not part of this system. light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or The purpose of the regulation is to help operates depending on the front passenger reduce the risk of injury or death from an occupied status. The light operates as inflating air bag to certain front passenger SSS1085 follows: seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically Front passenger air bag status light . Unoccupied passenger seat: The is turned OFF. Front passenger air bag and status OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. The occupant classification sensor (pattern light sensor) is in the front passenger seat . Passenger seat occupied by a small cushion and is designed to detect an adult, child or child restraint as out- occupant and objects on the seat. For lined in this section: The illumi- WARNING example, if a child is in the front passenger nates to indicate that the front seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is The front passenger air bag is designed to passenger air bag is OFF and will not designed to turn the passenger air bag automatically turn OFF under some condi- inflate in a crash. OFF in accordance with the regulations. tions. Read this section carefully to learn . Occupied passenger seat and the pas- Also, if a child restraint of the type how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat senger meets the conditions outlined in specified in the regulations is on the seat, belt and child restraints is necessary for this section: The light is OFF to the occupant classification sensor can most effective protection. Failure to follow indicate that the front passenger air detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF. all instructions in this manual concerning bag is operational. the use of seats, seat belts and child Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system as outlined in this manual should not use and installation.) child restraint being used. If the passenger cause the passenger air bag to be auto- If the front passenger seat is not occupied, air bag status light is not illuminated matically turned OFF. For small adults it the passenger air bag is designed not to (indicating that the air bag might inflate may be turned OFF, however, if the inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects in a crash), it could be that the child occupant does not sit in the seat properly placed on the seat could result in air bag restraint or seat belt is not being used (for example, by not sitting upright, by inflation, because of the object being properly. Make sure that the child restraint sitting on an edge of the seat, or by detected by the occupant classification is installed properly, the seat belt is used otherwise being out of position), this could sensor. Other conditions could also result properly and the occupant is positioned cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. in air bag inflation, such as if a child is properly. If the passenger air bag status Always be sure to be seated and wearing standing on the seat, or if two children are light is still not illuminated, reposition the the seat belt properly for the most effective on the seat, contrary to the instructions in occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. protection by the seat belt and supple- this manual. Always be sure that you and If the passenger air bag status light will not mental air bag. all vehicle occupants are seated and illuminate even though you believe that the INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and restrained properly. child restraint, the seat belts and the children be properly restrained in a rear Using the passenger air bag status light, occupant are properly positioned, the seat. INFINITI also recommends that appro- you can monitor when the front passenger system may be sensing an unoccupied priate child restraints and booster seats be air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your properly installed in a rear seat. If this is seat occupied. The light will not illuminate INFINITI retailer can check that the system not possible, the occupant classification when the front passenger seat is unoccu- is OFF by using a special tool. However, sensor is designed to operate as described pied. until you have confirmed with your retailer above to turn the front passenger air bag that your air bag is working properly, If an adult occupant is in the seat but the OFF for specified child restraints. Failing to reposition the occupant or child restraint passenger air bag status light is illumi- properly secure child restraints and to use in a rear seat. nated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may could be that the person is a small adult, The INFINITI advanced air bag system and allow the restraint to tip or move in an or is not sitting on the seat properly. passenger air bag status light will take a accident or sudden stop. This can also few seconds to register a change in the If a child restraint must be used in the front result in the passenger air bag inflating in passenger seat status. However, if the seat “ seat, the passenger air bag status light a crash instead of being OFF. (See Child becomes unoccupied, the air bag status ” may or may not be illuminated, depending restraints earlier in this section for proper light will remain off. on the size of the child and the type of Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 If a malfunction occurs in the front damage the seat or occupant classifica- . Modifying or tampering with the front passenger air bag system, the supplemen- tion sensor. This can also affect the passenger seat may result in serious tal air bag warning light , located in the operation of the air bag system and personal injury. For example, do not meter and gauges area will blink. Have the result in serious personal injury. change the front seats by placing system checked by an INFINITI retailer. . Immediately after inflation, several front material on the seat cushion or by Other supplemental front-impact air bag system components will be hot. installing additional trim material, such air bag precautions Do not touch them; you may severely as seat covers, on the seat that is not burn yourself. specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not . No unauthorized changes should be stow any objects under the front pas- WARNING made to any components or wiring of senger seat or the seat cushion and the air bag system. This is to prevent . Do not place any objects on the steering seatback. Such objects may interfere accidental inflation of the supplemental wheel pad or on the instrument panel. with the proper operation of the occu- air bag or damage to the supplemental Also, do not place any objects between pant classification sensor. air bag system. any occupant and the steering wheel or . No unauthorized changes should be . Do not make unauthorized changes to instrument panel. Such objects may made to any components or wiring of your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen- become dangerous projectiles and cause the seat belt system. This may affect the sion system or front end structure. This injury if the front air bags inflate. front air bag system. Tampering with the could affect proper operation of the front . Do not place objects with sharp edges seat belt system may result in serious air bag system. on the seat. Also, do not place heavy personal injury. . Tampering with the air bag system may objects on the seat that will leave . Work on and around the front air bag result in serious personal injury. Tamper- permanent impressions in the seat. Such system should be done by an INFINITI ing includes changes to the steering objects can damage the seat or occupant retailer. Installation of electrical equip- wheel and the instrument panel assem- classification sensor (pattern sensor). ment should also be done by an INFINITI bly by placing material over the steering This can affect the operation of the air retailer. The Supplemental Restraint wheel pad and above the instrument bag system and result in serious perso- System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should panel or by installing additional trim nal injury. not be modified or disconnected. Un- material around the air bag system. . Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot authorized electrical test equipment and steam cleaners) on the seat. This can probing devices should not be used on

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system the air bag system. and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although . A cracked windshield should be replaced they may inflate if the forces in another immediately by a qualified repair facility. type of collision are similar to those of a A cracked windshield could affect the higher severity side impact. They are function of the supplemental air bag designed to inflate on the side where the system. vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions on the side where * The SRS wiring harness connectors the vehicle is impacted. are yellow and orange for easy identification. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side When selling your vehicle, we request that air bag and curtain side-impact air bag you inform the buyer about the front air operation. bag system and guide the buyer to the SSS0521 appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man- When side air bags and curtain air bags ual. FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM- inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM- Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYS- may cause irritation and choking. Those TEMS with a history of a breathing condition The side air bags are located in the outside should get fresh air promptly. of the seatback of the front seats. The Side air bags, along with the use of seat curtain air bags are located in the side roof belts, help to cushion the impact force on rails. These systems are designed to meet the chest and pelvis of the front occupants. voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact of injury to out-of-position occupants. force to the head of occupants in the front However, all of the information, cautions and rear outboard seating positions. They and warnings in this manual still apply can help save lives and reduce serious and must be followed. The side air bags injuries. However, an inflating side air bags

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 and curtain air bags may cause abrasions by installing additional trim material, or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain WARNING such as seat covers, around the side air air bags do not provide restraint to the bags. lower body. . Do not place any objects near the . Work around and on the side air bag and seatback of the front seats. Also, do The seat belts should be correctly worn curtain air bag systems should be done not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, and the driver and passenger seated by an INFINITI retailer. Installation of etc.) between the front door finisher and upright as far as practical away from the electrical equipment should also be the front seat. Such objects may become side air bag. Rear seat passengers should done by an INFINITI retailer. The Supple- dangerous projectiles and cause injury if be seated as far away as practical from the mental Restraint System (SRS) wiring side air bag inflates. door finishers and side roof rails. The side harnesses* should not be modified or air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly . Right after inflation, several side air disconnected. Unauthorized electrical in order to help protect the occupants. bags and curtain air bag system compo- test equipment and probing devices Because of this, the force of the side air nents will be hot. Do not touch them; should not be used on the side-impact bags and curtain air bags inflating can you may severely burn yourself. air bag system. increase the risk of injury if the occupant is . No unauthorized changes should be too close to, or is against, these air bag made to any components or wiring of * The SRS wiring harness connectors modules during inflation. The side air bags side air bag and curtain air bags. This is are yellow and orange for easy and curtain air bags will deflate quickly to prevent damage to or accidental identification. after the collision is over. inflation of the side air bag and curtain When selling your vehicle, we request that The side air bags and curtain air bags air bag systems. you inform the buyer about the side air bag operate only when the ignition switch is in . Do not make unauthorized changes to and curtain air bag systems and guide the the ON position. your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen- buyer to the appropriate sections in this After pushing the ignition switch to the ON sion system or side panel. This could Owner’s Manual. position, the supplemental air bag warn- affect proper operation of the side air ing light illuminates. The air bag warning bag and curtain air bag systems. light will turn off after about 7 seconds if . Tampering with the air bag system may the systems are operational. result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatback or 1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS . If you need to dispose of the preten- chest. (front seats) sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact an The supplemental air bag warning light INFINITI retailer. Correct pretensioner is used to indicate malfunctions in the disposal procedures are set forth in the pretensioner system. See “Supplemental WARNING appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. air bag warning light” later in this section. Incorrect disposal procedures could If the supplemental air bag warning light . The pretensioners cannot be reused after cause personal injury. illuminates, have the system checked by activation. They must be replaced to- an INFINITI retailer. gether with the retractor and buckle as a The pretensioner system may activate with unit. When selling your vehicle, we request that the supplemental air bag system in certain you inform the buyer about the seat belt . If the vehicle becomes involved in a types of collisions. Working with the seat pretensioners and guide the buyer to the collision but a pretensioner is not belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man- activated, be sure to have the preten- when the vehicle becomes involved in ual. sioner system checked and, if necessary, certain types of collisions, helping to replaced by an INFINITI retailer. restrain front seat occupants. . No unauthorized changes should be The pretensioner is encased with the seat made to any components or wiring of belt retractor. These seat belts are used the the pretensioners. This is to prevent same way as conventional seat belts. damage to or accidental activation of the When a pretensioner seat belt activates, pretensioner system. Tampering with the smoke is released and a loud noise may be pretensioner system may result in ser- heard. The smoke is not harmful, and it ious personal injury. does not indicate a fire. Care should be . Work around and on the pretensioners taken not to inhale it as it may cause should be done by an INFINITI retailer. irritation and choking. Those with a history Installation of electrical equipment of a breathing condition should get fresh should also be done by an INFINITI air promptly. retailer. Unauthorized electrical test After pretensioner activation, load limiters equipment and probing devices should allow the seat belt to release webbing (if not be used on the pretensioner system. necessary) to reduce forces against the Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 sioner, front passenger air bag status light and all related wiring. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the SRS air bag systems are operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems need servi- cing: . The supplemental air bag warning light SSS1016 SPA1097 remains on approximately 7 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING the ON position. LABELS LIGHT . The supplemental air bag warning light Warning labels about the supplemental The supplemental air bag warning light, flashes intermittently. front-impact air bag systems are placed in displaying in the instrument panel, . The supplemental air bag warning light the vehicle as shown in the illustration. monitors the circuits of the supplemental does not come on at all. front-impact air bag, front seat-mounted Under these conditions, the front air bag, SRS air bag side-impact supplemental air bag, roof- side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner The warning labels *1 are located on the mounted curtain side-impact supplemental systems may not operate properly. They surface of the sun visors. air bag, and seat belt pretensioner sys- must be checked and repaired. Take your tems. The monitored circuits include the Air vehicle to the nearest INFINITI retailer. bag Control Unit (ACU), satellite sensors, crash zone sensor, occupant classification system, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain air bag modules, preten-

1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system inside the vehicle. WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is WARNING on, it could mean that the front air bag, side . Once a front air bag, side air bag, or air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag systems will not operate in an accident. To module will not function again and must help avoid injury to yourself or others, have be replaced. Additionally, the activated your vehicle checked by a retailer as soon as pretensioner must also be replaced. The possible. air bag module and pretensioner should be replaced by an INFINITI retailer. The REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCE- air bag module and pretensioner system DURE cannot be repaired. The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air . The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to bag and the pretensioner system should activate on a one-time-only basis. As a be inspected by an INFINITI retailer if reminder, unless it is damaged, the sup- there is any damage to the front end or plemental air bag warning light will remain side portion of the vehicle. illuminated after inflation has occurred. . If you need to dispose of the supple- Repair and replacement of these systems mental air bag or pretensioner or scrap should be done only by an INFINITI retailer. the vehicle, contact an INFINITI retailer. When maintenance work is required on the Correct supplemental air bag and seat vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, belt pretensioner system disposal pro- curtain air bags, pretensioners and related cedures are set forth in the appropriate parts should be pointed out to the person INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect dis- conducting the maintenance. The ignition posal procedures could cause personal switch should always be in the LOCK injury. position when working under the hood or

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53 MEMO

1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2 Instruments and controls

> Cockpit ...... 2-3 Headlight and turn signal switch...... 2-34 Instrument panel ...... 2-5 Xenon headlights...... 2-34 Meters and gauges...... 2-6 Headlight switch...... 2-35 Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-6 Turn signal switch...... 2-39 Tachometer...... 2-7 Fog light switch ...... 2-39 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-8 Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 2-40 Fuel gauge ...... 2-9 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) ...... 2-40 Warning/indicator lights and Horn ...... 2-41 audible reminders ...... 2-10 Heated seats...... 2-41 Checking bulbs...... 2-10 Climate controlled seats (if so equipped) ...... 2-43 Warning lights...... 2-11 Warning systems switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-44 Indicator lights...... 2-16 Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF switch (if Audible reminders...... 2-19 so equipped)...... 2-44 Dot matrix liquid crystal display ...... 2-20 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch...... 2-45 Indicators for operation...... 2-22 Clock...... 2-46 Indicators for maintenance ...... 2-25 Adjusting the time ...... 2-46 Trip computer...... 2-26 Power outlet ...... 2-46 Security systems ...... 2-29 Cigarette lighter and ashtrays ...... 2-47 Vehicle Security System ...... 2-29 Front...... 2-47 INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 2-30 Rear...... 2-48 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...... 2-31 Storage...... 2-48 Rain-sensing auto wiper system ...... 2-33 Cup holders...... 2-48 Rear window and outside mirror Sunglasses holder ...... 2-49 defroster switch...... 2-34 Glove box ...... 2-50 Console box ...... 2-50 Interior light control switch...... 2-60 Card holder ...... 2-51 Vanity mirror lights ...... 2-61 Rear pocket...... 2-51 Trunk light ...... 2-61 Coat hooks...... 2-52 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ...... 2-61 Trunk hooks ...... 2-52 Programming HomeLink®...... 2-62 Windows ...... 2-53 Programming HomeLink® for Power windows ...... 2-53 Canadian customers ...... 2-63 ® Moonroof...... 2-55 Operating the HomeLink Automatic moonroof...... 2-55 Universal Transceiver ...... 2-64 Rear sunshade (if so equipped) ...... 2-57 Programming trouble-diagnosis ...... 2-64 Welcome light...... 2-58 Clearing the programmed information...... 2-64 Battery saver system...... 2-58 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® Interior lights...... 2-59 button...... 2-64 Map lights...... 2-59 If your vehicle is stolen ...... 2-65 Personal lights ...... 2-59 COCKPIT

8. Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P.2-57) 9. Steering heater switch (if so equipped) (P.2-40) 10. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-19) 11. Warning systems switch (if so equipped) (P.5-22, P.5-31, P.5-82) 12. IBA OFF switch (if so equipped) (P.5-86) 13. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel lever (P.3-23) 14. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) — Menu control switch (models with navigation system)/Audio tuning switch (models without navigation system) (P.4-87) — BACK switch (models with naviga- tion system) (P.4-87) — TALK switch (P.4-114) SSI0689 — Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem (models with navigation system) 1. Instrument brightness control switch 5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip od- (P.4-89) (P.2-39) ometer (P.2-7) — ® 2. AFS switch (if so equipped) (P.2-37) 6. Windshield wiper and washer switch Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem (models without navigation sys- 3. Headlight, fog light and turn signal (P.2-31) tem) (P.4-100) switch (P.2-34) 7. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF — Volume control switch (P.4-87) 4. Trip computer switch (P.2-26) switch (P.5-98) — Audio source switch (P.4-48)

Instruments and controls 2-3 15. Steering wheel — Horn (P.2-41) — Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-39) — Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) (P.2-40) 16. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side) — Cruise control switches (P.5-45) — Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P.5-47) — Dynamic driver assistance switch (if so equipped) (P.5-22, P.5-31, P.5-69)

2-4 Instruments and controls INSTRUMENT PANEL

— Vehicle information and setting buttons (P.4-10) — Audio system (P.4-48) 9. Automatic climate control system (P.4-33)/Forest Air® system (P.4-33) 10. Center ventilator (P.4-33) 11. Audio system (P.4-48) 12. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-39) 13. Hood release handle (P.3-18) 14. Fuse box cover (P.8-26) 15. Parking brake — Parking (P.5-18) 16. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-9) 17. Climate controlled seat switch (P.2-43) /Seat heater switch (P.2-41) 18. Drive mode select switch (P.5-19) 19. Cigarette lighter and ashtray (P.2-47) 20. Glove box lid release handle (P.2-50)

SSI0690 21. Trunk release power cancel switch (P.3-20) 1. Side ventilator (P.4-33) 6. Center display (P.4-4)/Navigation sys- *: Refer to the separate Navigation System 2. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-16) tem* (if so equipped) Owner’s Manual. 3. Meters and gauges (P.2-6) 7. Clock (P.2-46) 4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-40) 8. Center multi-function control panel 5. Rear window and outside mirror — Navigation system* (if so defroster switch (P.2-34) equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-5 METERS AND GAUGES

SIC4318 Speedometer SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per SIC4317 hour (km/h).

1. Tachometer (P.2-7) 6. Fuel gauge (P.2-9) 2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-10) *: The needle indicators in the speed- 3. Speedometer (P.2-6) ometer, tachometer, engine coolant tem- 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge perature gauge and fuel gauge may move (P.2-8) slightly after the ignition switch is pushed 5. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/ to the LOCK position. This is not a Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-20) malfunction.

2-6 Instruments and controls TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the TRIP RESET switch *3 for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero. Average fuel economy and distance to empty information is also available. (See “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” later in this section and “How to use STATUS button” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.) SIC4319 SIC4320 Odometer/twin trip odometer TACHOMETER Odometer/twin trip odometer * The tachometer indicates engine speed in The odometer 1 and twin trip odometer revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev *2 are displayed on the dot matrix crystal the engine into the red zone *1 . display when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The scale length and the red zone vary with the engine model. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the dis- CAUTION tance of individual trips. When engine speed approaches the red Changing the display: zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine Pushing the TRIP RESET switch *3 on the speed. Operating the engine in the red zone right of the combination meter panel may cause serious engine damage. changes the display as follows:

Instruments and controls 2-7 CAUTION

If the gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature is near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease the temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and let the engine idle. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “6. In case of emergency” SIC4321 section for immediate action required. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone *1 shown in the illustration. The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

2-8 Instruments and controls fuel level is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reaches “0”. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches “0”.

CAUTION

. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light SIC4322 should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle FUEL GAUGE inspected by an INFINITI retailer. The gauge indicates the approximate fuel . For additional information, see “Mal- level in the tank. function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in this section. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to “0” (Empty) after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers “0” (Empty). The low fuel warning appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display when the

Instruments and controls 2-9 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light* ECO drive indicator light warning light (orange)* Lane departure warning light Front fog light indicator light Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning (orange)* light Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic transmission check warning light Master warning light High beam indicator light Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off indicator Preview Function warning light (orange)* light* Brake warning light Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON indica- Seat belt warning light and chime tor light (green)* Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Blind Spot Inter- Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) vention (BSI) system warning light (orange)* Charge warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light Security indicator light Distance Control Assist (DCA) system warn- Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) off Low beam indicator light ing light (orange)* indicator light* Automatic transmission (AT) position indi- 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) warning light* Turn signal/hazard indicator lights cator light Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) ON indicator Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator Engine oil pressure warning light light (green)* light *: if so equipped

CHECKING BULBS circuit in the electrical system. Have the With all doors closed, apply the parking The following lights come on briefly and system checked by an INFINITI retailer. brake and push the ignition switch to the then go off (if so equipped): Some indicators and warnings are also ON position without starting the engine. , or , , , , , , displayed on the dot matrix crystal display The following lights will come on (if so , between the speedometer and tachometer. equipped): (See “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” If any light does not come on, it may , or , , , , , , later in this section.) indicate a burned-out bulb or an open

2-10 Instruments and controls WARNING LIGHTS will change to 2WD to prevent the If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning AWD system from malfunctioning. If the warning light turns off, you can then operates normally, but without anti- “ ” light (if so equipped) drive again. lock assistance. (See Brake system in the The warning light comes on when the “5. Starting and driving” section.) — blinks slowly (about once every ignition switch is pushed to ON. It turns off Automatic transmission check soon after the engine is started. 2 seconds): Pull off the road in a safe area, and warning light If the Intelligent AWD system malfunctions, idle the engine. Check that all tire or the diameter of the front and the rear When the ignition switch is pushed to the sizes are the same, tire pressure is ON position, the light comes on for 2 wheels are different, the warning light will correct and tires are not worn. either remain illuminated or blink. (See seconds. If the light comes on at any other . “Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the If the warning light is still on after the time, it may indicate the transmission is “5. Starting and driving” section.) above operations, have your vehicle not functioning properly. Have your INFINITI checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon retailer check and repair the transmission. as possible. CAUTION or Brake warning light or Anti-lock Braking This light functions for both the parking . brake and the foot brake systems. If the warning light comes on while System (ABS) warning light driving there may be a malfunction in Parking brake indicator: the Intelligent AWD system. Reduce the When the ignition switch is in the ON When the ignition switch is in the ON vehicle speed and have your vehicle position, the Anti-lock Braking System position, the light comes on when the checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon (ABS) warning light illuminates and then parking brake is applied. as possible. turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera- tional. . If the AWD warning light blinks on when Low brake fluid warning light: you are driving: If the ABS warning light illuminates while When the ignition switch is in the ON the engine is running, or while driving, it position, the light warns of a low brake — blinks rapidly (about twice a may indicate the ABS is not functioning fluid level. If the light comes on while the second): properly. Have the system checked by an Pull off the road in a safe area, and engine is running with the parking brake INFINITI retailer. idle the engine. The driving mode not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: Instruments and controls 2-11 1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake nearest service station for repairs. the systems checked by an INFINITI retailer. “ fluid is necessary, add fluid and have Otherwise, have your vehicle towed See Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/ TM ” the system checked by your INFINITI because driving it could be dangerous. Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) system in retailer. (See “Brake fluid” in the “8. the “5. Starting and driving” section. . Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- Pressing the brake pedal with the tion.) engine stopped and/or low brake fluid Charge warning light level may increase your stopping dis- 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have If the light comes on while the engine is tance and braking will require greater running, it may indicate the charging the warning system checked by an pedal effort as well as pedal travel. INFINITI retailer. system is not functioning properly. Turn . If the brake fluid level is below the the engine off and check the alternator Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning minimum or MIN mark on the brake fluid belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or indicator: reservoir, do not drive until the brake if the light remains on, see an INFINITI When the parking brake is released and system has been checked at an INFINITI retailer immediately. the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both retailer. the brake warning light and the Anti-lock CAUTION Braking System (ABS) warning light illumi- Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/ nate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake sys- Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) sys- Do not continue driving if the alternator belt tem checked, and if necessary repaired, by tem warning light (orange; if so is loose, broken or missing. an INFINITI retailer promptly. (See “Anti- equipped) lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” When the ignition switch is pushed to the Distance Control Assist (DCA) earlier in this section.) ON position, the indicator light will first system warning light (orange; if so illuminate in orange and turn green before equipped) turning off. This indicates that the Blind WARNING Spot Warning (BSW) and Blind Spot Inter- This light comes on if there is a malfunc- vention (BSI) systems are operational. tion in the Distance Control Assist (DCA) . Your brake system may not be working system. properly if the warning light is on. If the light comes on in orange and remains on, it may indicate that the BSW and BSI If the warning light illuminates, park the Driving could be dangerous. If you judge vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, it to be safe, drive carefully to the systems are not functioning properly. Although the vehicle is still driveable, have restart the engine, resume driving and turn 2-12 Instruments and controls on the DCA system again. Engine oil pressure warning tion in the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) If it is not possible to turn on the system light system. or the warning light stays on, it may This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the warning light comes on, park the indicate that the system is malfunctioning. If the light flickers or comes on during vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, Although the vehicle is still driveable normal driving, pull off the road in a safe restart the engine, resume driving and set under normal conditions, have the vehicle area, stop the engine immediately and call the ICC system again. checked at an INFINITI retailer. an INFINITI retailer or other authorized If it is not possible to set the system or the 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) repair shop. indicator stays on, it may indicate that the warning light (if so equipped) The engine oil pressure warning light is system is malfunctioning. Although the not designed to indicate a low oil level. vehicle is still driveable under normal If the light comes on while the engine is Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See conditions, have the vehicle checked at running, it may indicate that there is a “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and an INFINITI retailer. malfunction with the 4 Wheel Active Steer do-it-yourself” section.) (4WAS) portion of the steering system. Lane departure warning light Push the ignition switch to the OFF position (orange; if so equipped) and then to the ON position. If the light CAUTION When the ignition switch is pushed to the does not turn off after cycling the engine, ON position, the light will come on in have the system checked by an INFINITI Running the engine with the engine oil orange, turn green, and then turn off. This retailer. pressure warning light on could cause indicates that the Lane Departure Warning For further information about the 4 Wheel serious damage to the engine almost (LDW) and Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) Active Steer system, see “4 Wheel Active immediately. Such damage is not covered systems are operational. ” “ Steer (4WAS) system in the 5. Starting by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as While the LDW and/or LDP system is on, ” and driving section. it is safe to do so. the light will blink in orange and a warning If a malfunction occurs in the system, the 4 chime will sound if the vehicle is traveling Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) function will Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) close to either the left or the right of a cease but driving can be continued. How- system warning light (orange; if so traveling lane with detectable lane mar- ever, the steering wheel is slightly turned equipped) kers. even when driving on a straight road. Drive If the light comes on in orange and remains This light comes on if there is a malfunc- carefully to the nearest INFINITI retailer. on, it may indicate that the LDW and LDP Instruments and controls 2-13 systems are not functioning properly. Have sure for each tire will also be displayed. on after the 1 minute. Have the system the systems checked by an INFINITI retailer. When the low tire pressure warning light checked by an INFINITI retailer. The CHECK See “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys- illuminates, you should stop and adjust TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if tem/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) sys- the tire pressure to the recommended the low tire pressure warning light illumi- tem” in the “5. Starting and driving” COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and nates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. section. Loading Information label. The low tire For additional information, see “Tire Pres- pressure warning light does not automati- sure Monitoring System (TPMS) ” in the “5. Low tire pressure warning cally turn off when the tire pressure is Starting and driving” section. light adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire recommended pressure, the vehicle must Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 WARNING monitors the tire pressure of all tires km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the . except the spare. low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire If the light does not illuminate with the pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. ignition switch pushed ON, have the The low tire pressure warning light warns vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as of low tire pressure or indicates that the The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is soon as possible. TPMS is not functioning properly. active as long as the low tire pressure . warning light remains illuminated. If the light illuminates while driving, After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this avoid sudden steering maneuvers or “ light illuminates for about 1 second and For additional information, see Dot matrix abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, ” turns off. liquid crystal display later in this section, pull off the road to a safe location and “ ” Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Low tire pressure warning: “ ” in the 5. Starting and driving section and Driving with under-inflated tires may If the vehicle is being driven with low tire “ ” Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) permanently damage the tires and in- pressure, the warning light will illuminate. in the “6. In case of emergency” section. A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also crease the likelihood of tire failure. appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal TPMS malfunction: Serious vehicle damage could occur display. If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check If you select tire pressure information in low tire pressure warning light will flash for the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the display, the LOW PRESSURE warning approximately 1 minute when the ignition the tire pressure to the recommended message will be displayed. The tire pres- switch is pushed ON. The light will remain COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire 2-14 Instruments and controls and Loading Information label to turn . Be sure to install the specified size of If the indicator stays on, it may indicate the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If tires to the four wheels correctly. that the system is malfunctioning. the light still illuminates while driving Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire Master warning light may be flat. If you have a flat tire, checked at an INFINITI retailer. When the ignition switch is in the ON replace it with a spare tire as soon as Seat belt warning light and possible. position, the master warning light illumi- nates if any of the following are displayed chime . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel on the dot matrix liquid crystal display: The light and chime remind you to fasten is replaced, the TPMS will not function . seat belts. The light illuminates whenever and the low tire pressure warning light No key warning . Low fuel warning the ignition switch is pushed to the ON will flash for approximately 1 minute. position, and will remain illuminated until . Low washer fluid warning The light will remain on after the 1 the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the . minute. Contact your INFINITI retailer as Parking brake release warning same time, the chime will sound for about soon as possible for tire replacement . Door/trunk open warning 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is and/or system resetting. . Loose fuel cap warning securely fastened. . Replacing tires with those not originally . Check tire pressure warning The seat belt warning light for the front specified by INFINITI could affect the . Intelligent Key system warning passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is proper operation of the TPMS. See “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” later not fastened when the front passenger’s in this section. seat is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position, the CAUTION Preview Function warning light system does not activate the warning light (orange; if so equipped) for the front passenger. . The TPMS is not a substitute for the The light comes on if there is a malfunction See “1. Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — regular tire pressure check. Be sure to in the Brake Assist (with Preview Function) Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- check the tire pressure regularly. system. straint system” section for precautions on . If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of If the warning light comes on, park the seat belt usage. less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, may not operate correctly. restart the engine, then resume driving.

Instruments and controls 2-15 Supplemental air bag warning mental restraint system” in the “1. Safety control, active trace control (if so light — Seats, seat belts and supplemental equipped), Rise-up & Build-up function, restraint system” section. Brake Force Distribution or hill start assist After pushing the ignition switch to the ON system may not be functioning properly. position, the supplemental air bag warning Have the system checked by an INFINITI light will illuminate. The supplemental air WARNING retailer. If a malfunction occurs in the bag warning light will turn off after about 7 system, the vehicle dynamic control sys- seconds if the supplemental front air bag If the supplemental air bag warning light is tem function will be canceled but the and supplemental side air bag, curtain on, it could mean that the supplemental vehicle is still driveable. For additional side-impact air bag systems and/or pre- front air bag, supplemental side air bag, information, see “Variable voltage control tensioner seat belt are operational. curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or system” in the “5. Starting and driving” If any of the following conditions occur, the pretensioner seat belt will not operate in an section of this manual. supplemental front air bag, supplemental accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or side air bag, supplemental curtain side- others, have your vehicle checked by a INDICATOR LIGHTS retailer as soon as possible. impact air bag and pretensioner seat belt Adaptive Front lighting System needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest INFINITI retailer. (AFS) off indicator light (if so Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) equipped) . The supplemental air bag warning light warning light remains on after approximately 7 sec- When the ignition switch is pushed to the The light will blink when the VDC system or onds. ON position, the Adaptive Front lighting the traction control system is operating, . System (AFS) off indicator light will illumi- The supplemental air bag warning light thus alerting the driver that the vehicle is flashes intermittently. nate. The light will turn off in about 1 nearing its traction limits. The road surface second if the AFS is operational. . The supplemental air bag warning light may be slippery. does not come on at all. This light also illuminates when the AFS is When the vehicle dynamic control warning turned off using the AFS switch. Unless checked and repaired, the Supple- light illuminates when the vehicle dynamic If the AFS off indicator light blinks, it may mental Restraint Systems and/or the pre- control system is turned on, this light indicate the AFS is not functioning prop- tensioner seat belt may not function alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle erly. Have the system checked by an properly. dynamic control system’s fail-safe mode is INFINITI retailer. For additional information, see “Supple- operating, for example the vehicle dynamic

2-16 Instruments and controls See “Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)” (BSI) system warning light” earlier in this bag will be OFF depending on how the front later in this section. section). passenger seat is being used. Automatic Transmission (AT) For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning For front passenger air bag status light TM “ position indicator light (BSW) system/Blind Spot Intervention operation, see INFINITI Advanced Air Bag (BSI) system” in the “5. Starting and System (front seats)” in the “1. Safety — When the ignition switch is pushed to the driving” section. Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- ON position, the indicator shows the straint system” section of this manual. automatic selector position. ECO drive indicator light In the manual shift mode, when the When the ignition switch is pushed to the High beam indicator light transmission does not shift to the selected ON position, the light will come on in This light comes on when the headlight gear due to a transmission protection orange, turn green, and then turn off. high beam is on and goes out when the low mode, the AT position indicator light will When the drive mode select switch is beam is selected. blink and a chime will sound. turned to the ECO mode, the ECO drive Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) See “Automatic transmission” in the “5. indicator light will illuminate or change its off indicator light (if so equipped) Starting and driving” section for further color depending on the accelerator pedal details. operation to help assist the driver to drive The light illuminates when the Intelligent economically. For more details, see “Eco Brake Assist (IBA) off switch is pushed to Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) mode” in the “5. Starting and driving” OFF. This indicates that the Intelligent ON indicator light (green; if so section. Brake Assist (IBA) system is not operating. equipped) When the IBA off indicator light illuminates Front fog light indicator light The light comes on in green when the Blind while the system is turned on (without the Spot Intervention (BSI) system is turned The front fog light indicator light illumi- warning chime sound), this light indicates on. The light turns off when the system is nates when the front fog lights are on. (See that the system control is temporarily “ ” turned off. Fog light switch later in this section.) unavailable. When the IBA off indicator light illuminates NOTE: Front passenger air bag status light with the warning chime sound while the This light is common with the blind spot IBA system is turned on, this light indicates warning light (orange). (See “Blind Spot The front passenger air bag status light that the system may not be functioning Warning (BSW)/Blind Spot Intervention ( ) will be lit and the passenger front air properly. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

Instruments and controls 2-17 Check to see if the laser sensor is clean. Warning (LDW) system/Lane Departure Operation: Turn the engine off, then restart the Prevention (LDP) system” in the “5. Start- The malfunction indicator light will come engine. ing and driving” section. on in one of two ways: If the IBA off indicator light illuminates Malfunction Indicator Light . Malfunction indicator light on steady — after following the procedures above, it (MIL) An emission control system malfunc- may indicate that the system or Active tion has been detected. Check the fuel- If the malfunction indicator light comes on Trace Control (if so equipped) is malfunc- filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP steady or blinks while the engine is tioning. Although the vehicle is still drive- warning appears in the dot matrix running, it may indicate a potential emis- able under normal conditions, have the liquid crystal display. If the fuel-filler sion control malfunction. vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer. (See cap is loose or missing, tighten or “Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system” in The malfunction indicator light may also install the cap and continue to drive the the “5. Starting and driving” section and come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose vehicle. The light should turn off “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. after a few driving trips. If the light the “5. Starting and driving” section.) Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is does not turn off after a few driving installed and closed tightly, and that the Lane Departure Prevention trips, have the vehicle inspected by an vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) INFINITI retailer. You do not need to (LDP) ON indicator light (green; if so of fuel in the fuel tank. have your vehicle towed to the retailer. equipped) After a few driving trips, the light . Malfunction indicator light blinking — The light comes on in green when the Lane should turn off if no other potential An engine misfire has been detected Departure Prevention (LDP) system is emission control system malfunction ex- which may damage the emission con- turned on. The light turns off when the ists. trol system. system is turned off. If this indicator light remains on for 20 To reduce or avoid emission control NOTE: seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds system damage: when the engine is not running, it indicates This light is common with the lane 1) Do not drive at speeds above 45 that the vehicle is not ready for an departure warning light (orange). (See MPH (72 km/h). emission control system inspection/main- “Lane departure warning light” earlier in 2) Avoid hard acceleration or decelera- “ this section.) tenance test. (See Readiness for Inspec- tion. tion/Maintenance (I/M) test (US only)”.) For more details, see “Lane Departure 3) Avoid steep uphill grades.

2-18 Instruments and controls 4) If possible, reduce the amount of Low beam indicator light AUDIBLE REMINDERS cargo being hauled or towed. (green) Key reminder chime The malfunction indicator light may The low beam indicator light illuminates A chime will sound if the driver side door is stop blinking and remain on. when the front park lights, rear combina- opened while the ignition switch is pushed Have the vehicle inspected by an tion lights and license plate lights are on. to the ACC position. Make sure the ignition INFINITI retailer. You do not need to The indicator light turns off when the switch is pushed to the OFF position, and have your vehicle towed to the retailer. is turned off. take the Intelligent Key with you when Turn signal/hazard indicator leaving the vehicle. CAUTION lights Light reminder chime The light flashes when the turn signal Continued vehicle operation without having A chime will sound when the driver side switch lever or hazard switch is turned on. the emission control system checked and door is opened with the light switch in the repaired as necessary could lead to poor Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) or position and the ignition switch driveability, reduced fuel economy, and off indicator light in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. possible damage to the emission control Turn the light switch off when you leave the system. The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to vehicle. OFF. This indicates that the vehicle dynamic The chime will also sound for 2 seconds Security indicator light control system and traction control system when the ignition switch is turned to the The light blinks when the ignition switch is are not operating. OFF position with the fog lights on while in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This the headlight switch is in the AUTO function indicates the security system position. equipped on the vehicle is operational. Parking brake reminder chime If the security system is malfunctioning, The parking brake reminder chime will this light will remain on while the ignition sound if the vehicle is driven at more than switch is in the ON position. For additional 4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking brake “ ” information, see Security systems later applied. Stop the vehicle and release the in this section. parking brake.

Instruments and controls 2-19 DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

Brake pad wear warning section. For details about the ICC system, “ The disc brake pads have audible wear see Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys- ” “ ” warnings. When a brake pad requires tem in the 5. Starting and driving replacement, it will make a high pitched section. For details about the DCA system, “ ” scraping sound when the vehicle is in see Distance Control Assist (DCA) system “ ” motion. This scraping sound will first occur in the 5. Starting and driving section. For only when the brake pedal is depressed. the details about the Intelligent Key “ ” After more wear of the brake pad, the system, see Intelligent Key system in “ sound will always be heard even if the the 3. Pre-driving checks and adjust- ” brake pedal is not depressed. Have the ments section. brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. SIC4323

The dot matrix liquid crystal display *1 is located between the tachometer and the speedometer, and it displays the auto- matic transmission position indicator, the cruise control, the Intelligent Cruise Con- trol (ICC) system (if so equipped), the Distance Assist (DCA) system (if so equipped) information, the Intelligent Key operation information and other warnings and information. For details about the automatic transmis- sion position indicator, see “Indicator lights” earlier in this section. For details about the cruise control, see “Cruise control” in the “5. Starting and driving”

2-20 Instruments and controls SIC4678

Instruments and controls 2-21 INDICATORS FOR OPERATION Unregistered Intelligent Key: To push the ignition switch to the OFF position, perform the following procedure: 1. Engine start operation indicator The warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed from the LOCK position . SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the selec- This indicator appears when the selector and the Intelligent Key cannot be recog- tor lever to “P”) ? PUSH warning ? lever is in the P (Park) position. nized by the system. You cannot start the (Push the ignition switch ? ignition This indicator means that the engine will engine with an unregistered key. Use the switch position is turned to ON) ? start by pushing the ignition switch with registered Intelligent Key. PUSH warning ? (Push the ignition the brake pedal depressed. You can start See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3. Pre- switch ? ignition switch position is the engine directly in any position. driving checks and adjustments” section turned to OFF) 2. Steering lock release malfunc- for more details. 6. Intelligent Key battery discharge tion indicator (if so equipped) 4. SHIFT “P” warning indicator This indicator appears when the steering This warning appears when the ignition This indicator appears when the Intelligent wheel cannot be released from the LOCK switch is pushed to stop the engine with Key battery is running out of power. position. the selector lever in any position except If this indicator appears, replace the If this indicator appears, push the push- the P (Park) position. battery with a new one. (See “Intelligent button ignition switch while lightly turning If this warning appears, move the selector Key battery replacement” in the “8. Main- the steering wheel right and left. lever to the P (Park) position or push the tenance and do-it-yourself” section.) 3. NO KEY warning ignition switch to the ON position. 7. Engine start operation for Intel- An inside warning chime will also sound. This warning appears in either of the ligent Key system indicator (See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3. following conditions. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- This indicator appears when the Intelligent No key inside the vehicle: tion.) Key battery is running out of power and when the Intelligent Key System and The warning appears when the door is 5. “PUSH” warning vehicle are not communicating normally. closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the This warning appears when the selector If this indicator appears, touch the ignition ACC or ON position. Make sure that the lever is moved to the P (Park) position with switch with the Intelligent Key while Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. the ignition switch in the ACC position after depressing the brake pedal. (See “Intelli- the SHIFT “P” warning appears. gent Key battery discharge” in the “5.

2-22 Instruments and controls Starting and driving” section.) 12. Intelligent Key system warning this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring ” “ This warning appears if there is a malfunc- System (TPMS) in the 5. Starting and 8. Parking brake release warning ” tion in the steering lock system (if so driving section.) This warning appears when the vehicle equipped) or Intelligent Key system. speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the 15. “TIMER” indicator parking brake is applied. If this warning appears while the engine is This indicator appears when the set stopped, the steering lock (if so equipped) “TIMER” indicator activates. You can set 9. Low fuel warning cannot be released or the engine cannot be the time for up to 6 hours. (See “Trip This warning appears when the fuel level in started. If this warning appears while the computer” later in this section.) the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it engine is running, the vehicle can be is convenient, preferably before the fuel driven. However, contact an INFINITI retai- 16. Low outside temperature warn- gauge reaches the empty (0) position. ler for repair as soon as possible. ing There is a small reserve of fuel remaining 13. Loose fuel cap warning This warning appears if the outside tem- in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches perature is below 378F(38C). The warning This warning appears when the fuel-filler the empty (0) position. can be set not to be displayed. (See “Trip cap is not tightened correctly after the computer” later in this section.) 10. Low washer fluid warning vehicle has been refueled. (See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and This warning appears when the washer 17. Cruise indicator adjustments” section.) tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid Cruise main switch indicator: as necessary. (See “Window washer fluid” 14. Check tire pressure warning The indicator is displayed when the cruise in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” This warning appears when the low tire control main switch is pushed. When the section.) pressure warning light in the meter illumi- main switch is pushed again, the indicator 11. Door/trunk open warning (igni- nates and low tire pressure is detected. If disappears. When the cruise control main switch indicator is displayed, the cruise tion switch is in the ON position) this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the pressure to the recommended control system is operational. This warning appears if any of the doors COLD tire pressure shown on the recom- and/or the trunk lid are open or not closed Cruise set switch indicator: mended COLD tire pressure shown on the securely. The vehicle icon indicates which The indicator is displayed while the vehicle Tire and Loading Information label. (See speed is controlled by the cruise control door or the trunk lid is open on the display. “ ” Low tire pressure warning light earlier in system. If the indicator blinks while the

Instruments and controls 2-23 engine is running, it may indicate that the driving” section.) cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by an 20. INFINITI Drive Mode Selector INFINITI retailer. indicator See “Cruise control” in the “5. Starting and When a driving mode is selected, the driving” section for details. selected mode indicator is displayed for approximately 2 seconds. 18. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) . STANDARD system MAIN switch indicator (if so . SPORT equipped) . ECO The indicator is displayed when the In- . SNOW telligent Cruise Control (ICC) system main (See “INFINITI drive mode selector” in the switch is pushed. When the main switch is “5. Starting and driving” section.) pushed again, the indicator disappears. While the main switch indicator is dis- played, the ICC system is operational. (See “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) 19. Distance Control Assist (DCA) system switch indicator (if so equipped) The indicator is displayed when the Dis- tance Control Assist (DCA) system switch is pushed on. When the switch is pushed again, the indicator disappears. While the SIC4325 indicator is displayed, the DCA system is operational. (See “Distance Control Assist (DCA) system” in the “5. Starting and

2-24 Instruments and controls INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE yourself” section. Many factors including 1. Engine oil replacement indicator tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when This indicator appears when the customer tires should be replaced. Setting the tire set time comes for changing the engine oil. replacement indicator for a certain driving You can set or reset the distance for distance does not mean your tires will last “ changing the engine oil. (See Trip compu- that long. Use the tire replacement indicator ” ter later in this section.) as a guide only and always perform regular 2. Oil filter replacement indicator tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could This indicator appears when the customer result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage set time comes for replacing the oil filter. could occur and may lead to a collision, You can set or reset the distance for which could result in serious personal injury replacing the oil filter. (See “Trip compu- or death. ter” later in this section.) 3. Tire replacement indicator 4. “OTHER” indicator This indicator appears when the customer This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for replacing tires. You set time comes for replacing items other can set or reset the distance for replacing than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. You “ ” tires. (See Trip computer later in this can set or reset the distance for replacing section.) the items. (See “Trip computer” later in this section.) WARNING More maintenance reminders are also available on the center display. (See The tire replacement indicator is not a “How to use INFO button” in the “4. substitute for regular tire checks, including Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice tire pressure checks. See “Changing wheels recognition systems” section.) and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

Instruments and controls 2-25 SIC4327

TRIP COMPUTER Switches for the trip computer are located on the right side of the combination meter panel. To operate the trip computer, push the side or front of the switches as shown above. *A switch *B switch When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, modes of the trip computer SIC4326 can be selected by pushing the switch *A . Each time the switch *A is pushed, the display will change as follows:

2-26 Instruments and controls Current fuel consumption ? Average fuel average fuel consumption is also reset at amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the consumption and speed ? Elapsed time the same time.) actual fuel consumption. ? and trip odometer Distance to empty The display is updated every 30 seconds. The display is updated every 30 seconds. (dte) ? Outside air temperature (ICY) ? The first 30 seconds after a reset, the The dte mode includes a low range warning Setting ? Warning check “——” display shows . feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning 1. Current fuel consumption 3. Elapsed time and trip odometer is displayed on the screen. The current fuel consumption mode shows (mls or km) When the fuel level drops even lower, the the current fuel consumption. dte display will change to “——”. Elapsed time: . If the amount of fuel added is small, the 2. Average fuel consumption (MPG The elapsed time mode shows the time display just before the ignition switch since the last reset. The displayed time can or l (liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH is pushed to the OFF position may be reset by pushing the switch *B for or km/h) continue to be displayed. longer than 1 second. (The trip odometer is Fuel consumption: . also reset at the same time.) When driving uphill or rounding curves, The average fuel consumption mode shows the fuel in the tank shifts, which may the average fuel consumption since the Trip odometer: momentarily change the display. last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the The trip odometer mode shows the total — 8 * distance the vehicle has been driven since 5. Outside air temperature (ICY F switch B for longer than 1 second. 8 (The average speed is also reset at the the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing or C) same time.) the switch *B for longer than 1 The outside air temperature is displayed in 8 8 − 8 − The display is updated every 30 seconds. second. (The elapsed time is also reset at For C in the range of 22 to 131 F( 30 8 At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a the same time.) to 55 C). reset, the display shows “——”. 4. Distance to empty (dte — mls or The outside air temperature mode includes a low temperature warning feature. If the Speed: km) outside air temperature is below 378F The average speed mode shows the The distance to empty (dte) mode provides (38C), the warning is displayed on the average vehicle speed since the last reset. you with an estimation of the distance that screen. Resetting is done by pushing the can be driven before refueling. The dte is The outside temperature sensor is located switch *B for longer than 1 second. (The constantly being calculated, based on the in front of the radiator. The sensor may be

Instruments and controls 2-27 affected by road or engine heat, wind the “TIMER” indicator activates. . BACK directions and other driving conditions. . ICY Select this submenu to return to the top The display may differ from the actual Select this submenu to display the low page of the setting mode. outside temperature or the temperature outside temperature warning. . LANGUAGE displayed on various signs or billboards. MAINTENANCE: Select this submenu to choose English or French for display. 6. Setting There are 5 submenus under the main- . Setting cannot be made while driving. A tenance menu. UNIT “ Select this submenu to choose the unit message Setting can only be operated . BACK when stopped” is also displayed on the from miles, MPG, 8F or km, l/100km, Select this submenu to return to the top dot matrix crystal display. 8C. page of the setting mode. . EFFECTS The switch *A and switch *B are . OIL used in the setting mode to select and Select this menu to set the dial effects Select this submenu to set or reset the decide a menu. described below to on or off. distance for changing the engine oil. — The indicator needles sweep in the SKIP: . FILTER meters when the engine is started. Push the switch *A to move to the Select this submenu to set or reset the warning check mode. distance for replacing the oil filter. 7. Warning check Push the switch *B to select other . TIRE SKIP: menus. Select this submenu to set or reset the Push the switch *A to move to the ALERT: distance for replacing tires. warning check mode. . OTHER There are 3 submenus under the alert Push the switch *B to select other menu. Select this submenu and set or reset menus. the distance for replacing items other . BACK than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. DETAIL: Select this submenu to return to the top This item is available only when a warning page of the setting mode. OPTIONS: is displayed. . There are 4 submenus under the display TIMER Select this menu to see the details of menu. Select this submenu to specify when warnings.

2-28 Instruments and controls SECURITY SYSTEMS

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors, hood, or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that acti- vates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo- nents in all situations. Always secure your SIC2132 vehicle even if parking for a brief period. SIC2045 Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in the Your vehicle has two types of security vehicle, and always lock it when unat- How to arm the vehicle security systems, as follows: tended. Be aware of your surroundings, system . Vehicle security system and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever 1. Close all windows. . INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System possible. The system can be armed even if the The security condition will be shown by the Many devices offering additional protec- windows are open. security indicator light. tion, such as component locks, identifica- tion markers, and tracking systems, are 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF available at auto supply stores and speci- position. alty shops. Your INFINITI retailer may also 3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the offer such equipment. Check with your vehicle. insurance company to see if you may be 4. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock eligible for discounts for various theft all doors. The doors can be locked with protection features. the Intelligent Key, door handle request switch, power door lock switch or

Instruments and controls 2-29 mechanical key. alarm reactivates if the vehicle is INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER 5. Confirm that the security indicator light tampered with again. SYSTEM comes on. The security indicator light The alarm is activated by: The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System stays on for about 30 seconds. The . Unlocking the door or opening the trunk will not allow the engine to start without vehicle security system is now pre- lid without using the button on the the use of the registered Intelligent Key. armed. After about 30 seconds the Intelligent Key, the door handle request Never leave these keys in the vehicle. vehicle security system automatically switch or the mechanical key. (Even if This device complies with Part 15 of FCC shifts into the armed phase. The the door is opened by releasing the Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation security light begins to flash once every door inside lock knob, the alarm will is subject to the following two conditions: approximately 3 seconds. If, during this activate.) (1) this device may not cause interference, 30-second pre-arm time period, the . Opening the hood. door is unlocked, or the ignition switch and (2) this device must accept any is pushed to ACC or ON, the system will How to stop an activated alarm interference, including interference that not arm. The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by may cause undesired operation of this device. Even when the driver and/or passengers pushing the unlock button on the Intelli- are in the vehicle, the system will activate gent Key, the door handle request switch with all doors, hood, and trunk lid locked or using the mechanical key. The alarm will with the ignition switch in the LOCK not stop if the ignition switch is pushed to position. When pushing the ignition switch the ACC or ON position. to the ACC or ON position, the system will If the system does not operate as de- be released. scribed above, have it checked by an Vehicle security system activation INFINITI retailer. The vehicle security system will give the following alarm: . The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. . The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 1 minute. However, the

2-30 Instruments and controls WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see an INFINITI WARNING retailer for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. In freezing temperatures the washer solu- Please bring all Intelligent Keys that you tion may freeze on the windshield and have when visiting an INFINITI retailer for obscure your vision which may lead to an service. accident. Warm windshield with the defros- ter before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

SIC2045 . Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. Security indicator light . Do not operate the washer if the The security indicator light is located on reservoir tank is empty. the meter panel. It indicates the status of . Do not fill the window washer reservoir the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System. tank with washer fluid concentrates at The light blinks after the ignition switch full strength. Some methyl alcohol was in the LOCK, ACC or OFF position. This based washer fluid concentrates may function indicates the security systems permanently stain the grille if spilled equipped on the vehicle are operational. while filling the window washer reser- voir tank. If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System . is malfunctioning, this light will remain on Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with ’ while the ignition switch is in the ON water to the manufacturer srecom- position. mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir

Instruments and controls 2-31 tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate washer. Then the wiper will also operate and water. several times. Pulling up the wiper arm: The wiper arm should be in the up position when replacing the wiper. To pull up the wiper arm, push up *4 twice, the wiper operation stops in mid- operation. The wiper arm can be pulled up. The selector lever should be in the P (Park) position. To replace the wiper arm, place the wiper arm in the down position and then push SIC4281 the lever *4 up once. The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. CAUTION Push the lever down to operate the wiper Do not operate the windshield wiper while at the following speed: the wiper arm is pulled up. The wiper arm *1 AUTO — operates the rain-sensing may be damaged. auto wiper system. (See “Rain-sen- ” sing auto wiper system later in this Wiper drip wipe system: section.) The wiper will also operate once about 3 *2 LO — continuous low speed operation seconds after the washer and wiper are — *3 HI continuous high speed operation operated. This operation is to wipe washer *4 MIST — one sweep operation of the fluid that has dripped on the windshield. wiper Pull the lever toward you *5 to operate the

2-32 Instruments and controls front *2 (High) or toward the rear *3 sensor even if it is raining. (Low). . When the windshield glass is coated . High — High sensitive operation with water repellent, the speed of the . Low — Low sensitive operation rain-sensing auto wipers may be high- To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system er even though the amount of the off, push up the lever to the OFF position, rainfall is small. . or pull down the lever to the LO or HI Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing position. auto wiper system when you use a car wash. . Using genuine wiper blades is recom- CAUTION mended for proper operation of the rain-sensing auto wiper system. (See Do not touch the rain sensor and around it “ ” “ SIC4190 Windshield wiper blades in the 8. when the wiper switch is in the AUTO Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- position and the ignition switch is in the tion for wiper blade replacement.) RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYS- ON position. The wipers may operate un- TEM expectedly and cause to an injury or a wiper The rain-sensing auto wiper system can damage. automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on the . The rain-sensing auto wipers are in- rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the tended for use during rain. If the switch rain sensor located on the upper part of is left in the AUTO position, the wipers the windshield. may operate unexpectedly when dirt, To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, fingerprints, oil film or insects are push the lever down to the AUTO position stuck on or around the sensor. The *1 . The wiper will sweep once while the wipers may also operate when exhaust ignition switch is in the ON position. gas or moisture affect the rain sensor. . The rain sensor sensitivity level can be The rain-sensing auto wipers may not adjusted by turning the knob toward the operate if rain does not hit the rain

Instruments and controls 2-33 REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH DEFROSTER SWITCH

XENON HEADLIGHTS It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle stops at a WARNING traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), HIGH VOLTAGE the xenon headlights do not turn on. . When xenon headlights are on, they This way the life of the xenon head- produce a high voltage. To prevent an lights is not reduced. electric shock, never attempt to modify . If the xenon headlight bulb is close to or disassemble. Always have your xenon burning out, the brightness will dras- headlights replaced at an INFINITI retai- tically decrease, the light will start ler. blinking, or the color of the light will SIC4330 . Xenon headlights provide considerably become reddish. If one or more of the more light than conventional headlights. above signs appear, contact an INFINITI To defog/defrost the rear window glass If they are not correctly aimed, they retailer. and outside mirrors, start the engine and might temporarily blind an oncoming push the switch *1 on. The indicator light driver or the driver ahead of you and *2 will come on. Push the switch again to cause a serious accident. If headlights turn the defroster off. are not aimed correctly, immediately It will automatically turn off in approxi- take your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer mately 15 minutes. and have the headlights adjusted cor- rectly.

CAUTION When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies When cleaning the inner side of the rear slightly. However, the color and brightness window, be careful not to scratch or damage will soon stabilize. the rear window defroster. . The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off operation.

2-34 Instruments and controls The autolight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark and turn off the headlights when it is light. For US models: The headlights will also be turned on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is operated continuously). If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the head- lights remain on for 5 minutes. Automatic headlights off delay: SIC3267 SIC3268 You can keep the headlights on for up to 180 seconds after you push the ignition HEADLIGHT SWITCH Autolight system switch to OFF and open any door then close Lighting The autolight system allows the headlights all the doors. to be set so they turn on and off *1 Turn the switch to the position: You can adjust the period of the automatic automatically. The front park, side marker, tail and headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) license plate lights will come on. To set the autolight system: to 180 seconds. The factory default setting is 45 seconds. *2 Turn the switch to the position: 1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the Headlights will come on and all the AUTO position *1 . For automatic headlights off delay setting, “ ” “ other lights remain on. 2. Push the ignition switch to the ON see Light Off Delay in the 4. Monitor, position. climate, audio, phone and voice recogni- tion systems” section. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, or position.

Instruments and controls 2-35 Battery saver system A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the light switch in the or position and the ignition switch in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. When the headlight switch is in the or position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the lights will automati- cally turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF position. When the headlight switch remains in the SAA0642A SIC3269 or position after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will turn Be sure not to put anything on top of the Headlight beam select on when the ignition switch is pushed to photo sensor *A located on the top of the *1 To select the low beam, put the lever the ON position. instrument panel. The photo sensor con- in the neutral position as shown. trols the autolight; if it is covered, the * photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the 2 To select the high beam, push the CAUTION headlights will illuminate. lever forward while the switch is in the position. Pull it back to select the . When you turn on the headlight switch low beam. again after the lights automatically turn *3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash off, the lights will not turn off auto- the headlight high beam even when matically. Be sure to turn the light the headlight switch is in the OFF switch to the OFF position when you position. leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will be discharged.

2-36 Instruments and controls ’ . Never leave the light switch on when the improve the driver s view. When the head- engine is not running for extended light switch is ON and the driver operates periods of time even if the headlights the steering wheel in a turn, the AFS turn off automatically. system will be activated. The AFS will operate: Daytime running light system (Ca- . when the headlight switch is ON. nada only) . when the selector lever is in any position other than P (Park) or R The daytime running lights automatically (Reverse). illuminate when the engine is started with . the parking brake released. The daytime when the vehicle is driven at above 16 running lights operate with the headlight MPH (25 km/h) for the left-side head- switch in the OFF position or in the light. Note that the right-side low beam position. Turn the headlight switch to the headlight will swivel but the left side SIC4333 will not swivel when the vehicle is position for full illumination when To turn the AFS off, push the AFS switch. driving at night. below 3 MPH (5 km/h) and the steering wheel is turned. The vehicle must attain (The AFS OFF indicator light will illuminate.) If the parking brake is applied before the a speed above 16 MPH (25 km/h) Push the switch again to turn the system engine is started, the daytime running before AFS activates the left-side head- on again. lights do not illuminate. The daytime light. AFS will also adjust the headlight to a running lights illuminate once the parking proper axis automatically, depending on brake is released. The daytime running the number of occupants in the vehicle, the lights will remain on until the ignition load the vehicle is carrying and the road switch is pushed to the OFF position. conditions. Adaptive Front lighting System If the AFS OFF indicator light blinks after (AFS) (if so equipped) the ignition switch has been pushed to the The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) ON position, this may indicate that the AFS will automatically adjust the headlights is not functioning properly. Have the (low beam) toward the turning direction to system checked by an INFINITI retailer. When the engine is started, the headlights Instruments and controls 2-37 will vibrate to check the system condition. This is not a malfunction.

SIC4331

SIC3270

2-38 Instruments and controls Instrument brightness control The instrument brightness control switch can be operated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. When the switch is operated, the dot matrix liquid crystal display switches to the brightness adjust- ment mode. Push the upper switch *A to brighten the instrument panel lights. The bar *1 moves to the + side. When reaching the maximum brightness, “MAX” appears on the display *2 . Push the lower switch *B to dim the SIC3271 SIC3272 instrument panel lights. The bar *1 moves to the − side. When reaching the minimum TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH brightness, “MIN” appears on the display *1 Turn signal To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight *3 . However, “MIN” does not appear switch to the position, then turn the during the nighttime. Move the lever up or down to signal the switch to the position. To turn them The dot matrix liquid crystal display turning direction. When the turn is com- off, turn the switch to the OFF position. returns to the normal display under the pleted, the turn signals cancel automati- cally. The headlights must be on for the fog following conditions: lights to operate. *2 . when the instrument brightness control Lane change signal When the headlight switch is in the AUTO switch is not operated for more than 5 To indicate a lane change, move the lever position, turning the fog light switch to the seconds. up or down to the point where lights begin position will turn on the headlights, . when the side or front of the switch flashing. fog lights and the other lights while the or switch on the right side of the ignition switch is in the ON position or the combination meter panel is pushed. engine is running.

Instruments and controls 2-39 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

. Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

Theflashercanbeactuatedwiththe ignition switch in any position. When an impact that could activate the supplemental air bags is detected, the hazard warning flasher lights blink auto- matically. If the hazard warning flasher switch is pushed, the hazard warning flashers will turn off.

SIC4401 SIC2574 WARNING Push the switch on to warn other drivers The heated steering wheel system is when you must stop or park under Do not turn the hazard warning flasher designed to operate only when the surface emergency conditions. All turn signal lights switch to off until you can make sure that it temperature of the steering wheel is below 8 8 will flash. is safe to do so. Also, the hazard flasher 68 F (20 C). warning may not blink automatically de- Push the heated steering wheel switch to pending on the force of impact. warm the steering wheel after the engine WARNING starts. The indicator light *1 on the switch Some state laws may prohibit the use of will illuminate. . If stopping for an emergency, be sure to the hazard warning flasher switch while move the vehicle well off the road. If the surface temperature of the steering driving. wheel is below 688F (208C), the system will . Do not use the hazard warning flashers heat the steering wheel and cycle off and while moving on the highway unless on to maintain a temperature above 688F unusual circumstances force you to drive (208C). The indicator light will remain on as so slowly that your vehicle might be- long as the system is on. come a hazard to other traffic.

2-40 Instruments and controls HORN HEATED SEATS

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The WARNING indicator light will turn off. Do not use or allow occupants to use the NOTE: seat heater if you or the occupants cannot If the surface temperature of the steering monitor elevated seat temperatures or have wheel is above 688F(208C) when the an inability to feel pain in body parts that switch is turned on, the system will not contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by heat the steering wheel. This is not a such people could result in serious injury. malfunction.

CAUTION SIC4332 . The battery could run down if the seat To sound the horn, push the center pad heater is operated while the engine is area of the steering wheel. not running. . Do not use the seat heater for extended WARNING periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so . Do not put anything on the seat which could affect proper operation of the supple- insulates heat, such as a blanket, mental front air bag system. Tampering with cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the the supplemental front air bag system may seat may become overheated. result in serious personal injury. . Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

Instruments and controls 2-41 . Any liquid spilled on the heated seat 3. To turn off the heater, return the knob should be removed immediately with a to the OFF position *3 . Make sure that dry cloth. the indicator light turns off. . When cleaning the seat, never use The heater is controlled by a thermis- gasoline, thinner, or any similar materi- tor, automatically turning the heater on als. and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. . If any abnormalities are found or the ’ heated seat does not operate, turn the When the vehicle s interior is warmed, switch off and have the system checked or before you leave the vehicle, be sure by an INFINITI retailer. to turn off the switch.

SSS0911

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine. 2. Turn the control knob *A to the right *1 and select the desired heat range. . For high heat, turn the knob to the right *1 . . For low heat, turn the knob to the left *2 . . The indicator light *B will illuminate when the heater is on.

2-42 Instruments and controls CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (if so equipped)

or cooled, and/or before you leave the . Do not put anything on the seat which vehicle, be sure to turn the control insulates heat, such as a blanket, knob to the OFF position (center). The cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the indicator light *B on the control knob seat may become overheated. goes off at the OFF position. . Do not place anything hard or heavy on To check the air filter for the climate the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar controlled seat, contact an INFINITI object. This may result in damage to the retailer. climate controlled seat. . Any liquid spilled on the seat should be WARNING removed immediately with a dry cloth. . The climate controlled seat has an air Do not use or allow occupants to use the SIC4334 filter. Do not operate climate controlled seat heater if you or the occupants cannot seat without an air filter. This may result The climate controlled seat warms up or monitor elevated seat temperatures or have in damage to the system. an inability to feel pain in body parts that cools down the front seats by blowing . When cleaning the seat, never use contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by warm or cool air from the surface of the gasoline, thinner, or any similar materi- such people could result in serious injury. seat. The switches located on the center als. console can be operated independently of . If any malfunctions are found or the each other. climate controlled seat does not operate, 1. Start the engine. CAUTION turn the switch off and have the system 2. Turn the control knob *A to the heat checked by an INFINITI retailer. . side *1 or to the cool side *2 . The The battery could run down if the climate indicator light *B on the control knob controlled seat is operated while the will illuminate. engine is not running. 3. Adjust the temperature using the con- . Do not use the climate controlled seat trol knob *A . for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. 4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

Instruments and controls 2-43 WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) OFF equipped) SWITCH (if so equipped)

ahead. (See “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) The LDW system will sound a warning chime and blink the lane departure warn- ing light (orange) to alert the driver if the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of a traveling lane with detectable lane markers. (See “Lane De- parture Warning (LDW) system/Lane De- parture Prevention (LDP) system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) SIC4335 The BSW system will turn on the BSW/ SIC4337 Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) indicator The warning systems switch is used to turn lights, located next to the outside mirrors, The vehicle should be driven with the on and off the warning systems (Forward if the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system on Collision Warning (FCW), Lane Departure detection zone. If the turn signal is for most driving conditions. Warning (LDW) and Blind Spot Warning activated in the direction of the detected The Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system (BSW) systems) that are activated using vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the will sound a warning chime and the vehicle the settings menu on the center display. BSW/BSI indicator light will flash. (See ahead detection indicator light blinks to When the warning systems switch is turned “Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/Blind alert the driver when the vehicle is travel- off, the indicator *1 on the switch is off. Spot InterventionTM (BSI) system” in the ing too close to the vehicle ahead. The The indicator will also be off if all of the “5. Starting and driving” section.) system will also apply the brake control if warning systems are deactivated using the necessary. settings menu. To turn off the system, push the IBA OFF The FCW system will sound a warning switch. The indicator will illuminate. chime and the vehicle ahead detection The IBA system will remain in the last ON indicator light blinks to alert the driver if or OFF state it was left in until it is the vehicle is traveling close to the vehicle manually changed by pushing the IBA OFF 2-44 Instruments and controls VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH switch. “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in “ ” See “Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system” the 5. Starting and driving section.) in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

SIC4336

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving conditions. If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator will illumi- nate. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. (See Instruments and controls 2-45 CLOCK POWER OUTLET

phone and voice recognition systems” section.

SIC4338 SIC4339

If the power supply is disconnected, the The power outlet is located in the center clock will not indicate the correct time. console. Readjust the time. ADJUSTING THE TIME CAUTION 1. To set the clock forward, push the . button *1 . The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. 2. To set the clock backward, push the . button *2 . Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do 3. To move forward or backward faster, not use double adapters or more than push and hold the button more than 5 one electrical accessory. seconds. . Use power outlet with the engine run- For details about display clock adjustment ning to avoid discharging the vehicle (if so equipped), see “How to use SETTING battery. button” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,

2-46 Instruments and controls CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAYS

. Avoid using power outlet when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window CAUTION defroster is on. . The cigarette lighter socket is a power . This power outlet is not designed for use source for the cigarette lighter element with a cigarette lighter unit. only. The use of the cigarette lighter . Push the plug in as far as it will go. If socket as a power source for any other good contact is not made, the plug may accessory is not recommended. overheat or the internal temperature . Do not use any other power outlet for an fuse may blow. accessory lighter. . Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. SIC4340 . When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any liquid to FRONT contact the outlet. To open the ashtray lid, push the lid down and release it *1 . To empty the ashtray, pull out *2 . The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Push the lighter in all the way *3 , then release it. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the lighter to its original position after use.

Instruments and controls 2-47 STORAGE

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

. Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. . Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

SIC4341 SIC4342 Front REAR To open the cup holder, push the lid *1 . To open the ashtray lid, pull *1 . To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull To empty the ashtray, pull *2 . it up as illustrated *2 .

2-48 Instruments and controls . Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the glasses.

SIC2875 SIC4344 Rear Open the lid of the rear center armrest to SUNGLASSES HOLDER use the cup holder. WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident.

To open the sunglasses holder, push *1 .

CAUTION

. Do not use for anything other than glasses.

Instruments and controls 2-49 usage, see “Keys” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

SIC4345 SIC4346

GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX To open the console box, push up the knob WARNING *A and pull up the lid. To close, push the lid down until latched. Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle *1 . To close, push the lid in until the lock latches. To lock *2 /unlock *3 the glove box, use the mechanical key. For the mechanical key

2-50 Instruments and controls CARD HOLDER The card holder is located on or behind the driver’s or passenger’s sun visor. To use the card holder, slide the card in the card holder.

SIC3929 SIC4351 Type A REAR POCKET To open the rear pocket, push the *1 button.

SIC4348 Type B Instruments and controls 2-51 CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 22 lb (10 kg) to a single hook.

SIC3248 SIC4350

COAT HOOKS TRUNK HOOKS The coat hooks are equipped beside the rear personal lights. WARNING CAUTION . Always make sure that the cargo is properly secured. Use the suitable ropes Do not place items which are more than 2 lb and hooks. (1 kg) on the hook. . Unsecured cargo can become dangerous in an accident or sudden stop.

2-52 Instruments and controls WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS Locking passengers’ windows When the lock button *C is pushed in, only WARNING the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel. . Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the win- dows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. . Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and be- SIC4352 come trapped in the window. Unat- 1. Driver side window tended children could become involved in serious accidents. 2. Front passenger side window 3. Rear left passenger side window The power windows operate when the 4. Rear right passenger side window ignition switch is in the ON position or for 5. Window lock button about 45 seconds after the ignition switch ’ is pushed to the OFF position. If the Main power window switch (driver s driver’sorfrontpassenger’s door is side) opened during this period of about 45 To open or close the window, push down seconds, power to the windows is can- *A or pull up *B the switch and hold it. celed. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

Instruments and controls 2-53 Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing, the SIC4353 SIC4354 window will be immediately lowered. The auto reverse function can be activated Passenger side power window Automatic operation when the window is closed by automatic switch To fully open or close the window, com- operation when the ignition switch is in the The passenger side switch will open or pletely push down or pull up the switch ON position or for 45 seconds after the close only the corresponding window. To and release it; it need not be held. The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF open or close the window, push down or window will automatically open or close all position. pull up the switch and hold it. the way. To stop the window, just push or Depending on the environment or driving lift the switch in the opposite direction. conditions, the auto reverse function may A light push or pull on the switch will cause be activated if an impact or load similar to the window to open or close until the something being caught in the window switch is released. occurs.

2-54 Instruments and controls MOONROOF

If the windows do not close auto- AUTOMATIC MOONROOF matically WARNING The moonroof only operates when the If the power window automatic function ignition switch is in the ON position. . In an accident you could be thrown from (closing only) does not operate properly, The automatic moonroof is operational for the vehicle through an open moonroof. perform the following procedure to initi- about 45 seconds, even if the ignition Always use seat belts and child re- alize the power window system. switch is pushed to the OFF position. If the straints. 1. Push the ignition switch to the ON driver’s door or the passenger’s door is . position. Do not allow anyone to stand up or opened during this period of about 45 extend any portion of their body out of 2. Close the door. seconds, power to the moonroof is can- the moonroof opening while the vehicle celed. 3. Open the window completely by oper- is in motion or while the moonroof is ating the power window switch. closing. 4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after CAUTION the window is closed completely. 5. Release the power window switch. . Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand Operate the window by the automatic from the moonroof before opening. function to confirm the initialization is . Do not place any heavy object on the complete. moonroof or surrounding area. 6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other windows. If the power window automatic function does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Instruments and controls 2-55 Sliding the moonroof matically when the auto reverse function To fully open or close the moonroof, push activates due to a malfunction, push and * * hold the moonroof switch to the close the switch to the open 2 or close 1 * position and release it; it need not be held. position 1 . The roof will automatically open or close all Depending on the environment or driving the way. To stop the roof, push the switch conditions, the auto reverse function may once more while it is opening or closing. be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof Auto reverse function occurs. If the moonroof does not operate WARNING If the moonroof does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initi- There are some small distances immediately SIC4355 alize the moonroof operation system. before the closed position which cannot be Sunshade detected. Make sure that all passengers 1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle repeatedly pushing the moonroof The sunshade will open automatically before closing the moonroof. switch to the close position *1 to tilt when the moonroof is opened. However, the moonroof up. it must be closed manually. If the control unit detects something 2. Push and hold the switch to the close Tilting the moonroof caught in the moonroof when it is closing, position *1 . To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then the moonroof will be immediately opened. 3. Release the moonroof switch after the push the switch to the tilt up position *1 The auto reverse function can be activated moonroof moves slightly up and down. and release it; it need not be held. To tilt when the moonroof is closed by automatic 4. Push and hold the switch to the open down the moonroof, push the switch to the operation when the ignition switch is in the position *2 to fully tilt the moonroof tilt down position *2 . ON position or for about 45 seconds after down. the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF 5. Check if the moonroof switch operates position. normally. If the moonroof cannot be closed auto- If the moonroof does not operate properly

2-56 Instruments and controls REAR SUNSHADE (if so equipped) after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer. CAUTION

. To avoid personal injury, keep your hands, fingers and head away from the sunshade arm, arm rail and sunshade inlet port. . Do not allow children near the rear sunshade system. They could be injured. . Do not place objects on or near the rear sunshade. This could cause improper operation or damage it. . Do not pull or push the rear sunshade. SIC4349 This could cause improper operation or damage it. The rear sunshade operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The rear sunshade switches are located on the instrument panel. To raise and lower the sunshade, push the switch. The switch need not be held. When the selector lever is moved to the "R" (Reverse) position, the rear sunshade automatically lowers.

Instruments and controls 2-57 WELCOME LIGHT

completed. CAUTION Once the welcome light function is active, the puddle light *A and the passenger . Do not place objects (such as news- cabin illumination will illuminate when you papers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the approach the vehicle with the Intelligent sunshade inlet port. Doing so may Key (within approximately 3.3 ft ( 1 m) of entangle these objects in the sunshade the antenna built inside the door handles) when it is extending or retracting, and the following conditions are met. causing improper operation or damage . All doors are closed and locked. to the sunshade. . The ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF . Do not push the sunshade arm with your position. hands, etc., as this may deform it. . The Intelligent Key is outside the Improper operation or damage to the SIC4328 vehicle. sunshade may result. To activate or deactivate the welcome light . The puddle light operates within a set . Do not put any object into the sunshade function, perform the following procedure. duration. inlet port as this may result in improper Note that the function is set to disabled as In order to help maximize battery life, do operation or damage the sunshade. the factory default setting. not store the Intelligent Key within the . Do not hang any object on the arm rail 1. Push the ignition switch to the ON vehicle detection range. as this may result in improper operation position. or damage the sunshade. BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM 2. Open the driver’s side door. . Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. The welcome light function will be deacti- Doing so may elongate the sunshade. 3. Within 20 seconds after the ignition vated automatically to prevent battery Improper operation or damage to the switch is pushed to the ON position, discharge under the following conditions. sunshade may result. push the door open request switch on . If the welcome light function does not the driver’s side door handle for more operate within a set duration. Note that than 5 seconds with the driver’s door the duration is set to 9 days as the open. factory default setting. To activate the 4. A chime sounds when the setting is welcome light function again, start the

2-58 Instruments and controls INTERIOR LIGHTS

engine. . If the welcome light function is acti- vated 15 consecutive times when you approach and leave the vehicle with the Intelligent Key without the doors being unlocked. To activate the welcome light function again, unlock any door.

SIC4356 SIC3250

MAP LIGHTS PERSONAL LIGHTS Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on or off. Rear Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-59 . ignition switch is switched to the OFF to the OFF position (see “Vehicle informa- position tion and settings” in the “4. Monitor, — remain on for about 15 seconds. climate, audio, phone and voice recogni- ” . doors are unlocked by pushing the tion systems section), the lights will UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key illuminate under the following condition: or door handle request switch with the . any door is opened with the ignition ignition switch in the LOCK position switch in any position — remain on for about 15 seconds. — remain on while the door is opened. . any door is opened and then closed When the door is closed, the lights with the ignition switch in the LOCK go off. position — remain on for about 15 seconds. CAUTION SIC4357 . any door is opened — remain on while the door is opened. Do not use for extended periods of time with INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH When the door is closed, the lights the engine stopped. This could result in a *1 ON switch go off. discharged battery. When the DOOR OFF switch *2 is pushed When the ON switch *1 is pushed on, the on, the map and rear personal lights will map lights and rear personal lights will not illuminate under the above condition. illuminate. When the switch is turned off, The map and rear personal lights can be the lights will not illuminate, regardless of turned on only with the ON switch *1 . the condition. The lights will also turn off after 30 *2 DOOR OFF switch minutes when the lights remain illumi- When the DOOR OFF switch *2 is not nated after the ignition switch has been pushed on, the map lights and rear pushed to the OFF or LOCK position to personal lights will illuminate under the prevent the battery from becoming dis- following conditions: charged. When the auto interior illumination is set

2-60 Instruments and controls VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS TRUNK LIGHT HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the a convenient way to consolidate the func- light will turn off. tions of up to three individual hand-held The light will also turn off after 30 minutes transmitters into one built-in device. when the light remains illuminated after HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: the ignition switch has been pushed to the . Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) OFF or LOCK position to prevent the devices such as garage doors, gates, battery from becoming discharged. home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. . Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is ® SIC3869 disconnected, HomeLink will retain all programming. The light on the vanity mirror will turn on Once HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is when the cover on the vanity mirror is programmed, retain the original transmit- opened. ter for future programming procedures When the cover is closed, the light will turn (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon off. sale of the vehicle, the programmed ® The lights will also turn off after 30 HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons minutes when the lights remain illumi- should be erased for security purposes. “ nated to prevent the battery from becom- For additional information, see Program- ®” ing discharged. ming HomeLink later in this section.

WARNING

. Do not use HomeLink® Universal Trans- ceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as Instruments and controls 2-61 “ ” required by federal safety standards. with rolling code protection ; you will (These standards became effective for need to use a ladder to get up to the opener models manufactured after April garage door opener motor to be able to “ ” 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which access the smart or learn program cannot detect an object in the path of a button. closing garage door and then automati- cally stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these fea- tures increases the risk of serious injury or death. . During programming procedure, your garage door or security gate may open SIC3612 or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door, 1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer gate, etc. that you are programming. HomeLink® buttons (to clear the mem- * . Your vehicle’s engine should be turned ory) until the indicator light A blinks off while programming HomeLink® Uni- (after 20 seconds). Release both but- versal Transceiver. tons. 2. Position the end of the hand-held PROGRAMMING HomeLink® transmitter 1-3 inches away from the HomeLink® surface. To program your HomeLink® Transceiver to operate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener, home or office lighting, you need to be at the same location as the device. Note: Garage door openers (manufactured after 1996) have “rolling code protection”. To program a garage door opener equipped

2-62 Instruments and controls programmed device, push and hold 7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing the programmed HomeLink® button - and releasing the garage door opener releasing when the device begins to training button) and firmly push and activate. release the HomeLink® button you’ve 5. If the indicator light on HomeLink® just programmed. Push and release the ® blinks rapidly for two seconds and then HomeLink button up to three times to turns solid, HomeLink® has picked up a complete the training. “rolling code” garage door opener 8. Your HomeLink® button should now be signal. You will need to proceed with programmed. To program the remaining the next steps to train HomeLink®, HomeLink® buttons for additional door completing the programming may re- or gate openers, follow steps 2 through quire a ladder and another person for 8 only. convenience. SIC3613 NOTE: 6. Push and release the program button Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to 3. Using both hands, simultaneously push located on the garage door opener’s ® “clear” all previously programmed and hold both the HomeLink button motor to activate the “training mode”. HomeLink® buttons. you want to program and the hand-held This button is usually located near the transmitter button. antenna wire that hangs down from the If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 motor. If the wire originates from under buttons, please refer to the HomeLink® has been completed. a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the training button. web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1- 4. Hold down both buttons until the 800-355-3515. indicator light on HomeLink® flashes, NOTE: ® changing from a “slow blink” to a Once you have pushed and released the PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR “rapid blink”. This could take up to 90 training button on the garage door CANADIAN CUSTOMERS ’ “ ” seconds. When the indicator light opener s motor and the training light Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required blinks rapidly, both buttons may be is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting released. The rapidly flashing light perform step 7. For convenience, use after 2 seconds. To program your hand- indicates successful programming. To the help of a second person to assist held transmitter to HomeLink®, continue to activate the garage door or other when performing this step. Instruments and controls 2-63 push and hold the HomeLink® button (note PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNO- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN- steps 2 through 4 under “Programming SIS FORMATION HomeLink®”) while you push and re-push If HomeLink® does not quickly learn the Individual buttons cannot be cleared, (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every hand-held transmitter information: however to clear all programming, push 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes and hold the two outside buttons and rapidly (indicating successful program- . replace the hand-held transmitter bat- release when the indicator light begins to ming). teries with new batteries. flash (in approximately 20 seconds). . position the hand-held transmitter with NOTE: its battery area facing away from the REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE ® If programming a garage door opener, etc., HomeLink surface. HomeLink® BUTTON it is advised to unplug the device during . push and hold both the HomeLink® and To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal the “cycling” process to prevent possible hand-held transmitter buttons without Transceiver button, complete the following. damage to the garage door opener com- interruption. ® ponents. . position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNI- 5 in (50 to 127 mm) away from the button. Do not release the button until VERSAL TRANSCEIVER HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit- step 4 has been completed. 2. When the indicator light begins to flash HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once ter in that position for up to 15 ® slowly (after 20 seconds), position the programmed) may now be used to activate seconds. If HomeLink is not pro- hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to the garage door, etc. To operate, simply grammed within that time, try holding 127 mm) away from the HomeLink® push the appropriate programmed the transmitter in another position - surface. HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. keeping the indicator light in view at all The red indicator light will illuminate while times. 3. Push and hold the hand-held transmit- the signal is being transmitted. Ifyoucontinuetohaveprogramming ter button. difficulties, please contact the INFINITI 4. The HomeLink® indicator light will Consumer Affairs Department. The phone flash, first slowly and then rapidly. numbers are located in the Foreword of When the indicator light begins to flash ’ this Owner s Manual. rapidly, release both buttons. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but- ton has now been reprogrammed. The new

2-64 Instruments and controls device can be activated by pushing the NOTE: HomeLink® button that was just pro- Changes or modifications not expressly grammed. This procedure will not affect approved by the party responsible for any other programmed HomeLink® but- compliance could void the user’s authority tons. to operate the equipment. IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN For Canada: If your vehicle is stolen, you should change This device complies with RSS-210 of the codes of any non-rolling code device Industry Canada. Operation is subject to that has been programmed into the following two conditions: (1) this ® HomeLink . Consult the Owner’s Manual device may not cause interference, and of each device or call the manufacturer or (2) this device must accept any interfer- retailer of those devices for additional ence, including interference that may information. cause undesired operation of the device. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni- versal Transceiver with your new transmit- ter information. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Instruments and controls 2-65 MEMO

2-66 Instruments and controls 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys...... 3-2 Trunk lid ...... 3-18 Intelligent Key ...... 3-2 Trunk lid release switch ...... 3-19 Valet hand-off...... 3-3 Trunk open request switch...... 3-19 Doors ...... 3-4 Opening with key...... 3-19 Locking with mechanical key ...... 3-4 Trunk open button ...... 3-19 Opening and closing windows with the Trunk release power cancel switch...... 3-20 mechanical key...... 3-5 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-20 Locking with inside lock knob ...... 3-5 Fuel-filler door...... 3-21 Locking with power door lock switch ...... 3-5 Opening the fuel-filler door...... 3-21 Automatic door locks...... 3-6 Fuel-filler cap...... 3-21 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-6 Tilt/telescopic steering...... 3-23 Intelligent Key system ...... 3-7 Electric operation...... 3-24 Intelligent Key operating range...... 3-8 Sun visors...... 3-24 Door locks/unlocks precaution ...... 3-9 Mirrors...... 3-25 Intelligent Key operation ...... 3-10 Inside mirror...... 3-25 Battery saver system...... 3-11 Outside mirrors...... 3-26 Warning signals...... 3-12 Vanity mirror...... 3-27 Troubleshooting guide...... 3-13 Automatic drive positioner ...... 3-28 Remote keyless entry system...... 3-14 Entry/exit function...... 3-28 How to use remote keyless entry system...... 3-14 Seat synchronization function ...... 3-29 Hood ...... 3-18 Memory storage...... 3-29 Setting memory function...... 3-30 System operation...... 3-31 KEYS

A key number plate is supplied with your INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System of your keys. Record the key number and keep it in vehicle. Since the registration process a safe place (such as your wallet), not in requires erasing all memory in the Intelli- the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see an gent Key components when registering INFINITI retailer for duplicates by using the new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent key number. INFINITI does not record any Keys that you have to the INFINITI retailer. key numbers so it is very important to keep It is possible that the Intelligent Key track of your key number plate. functions become canceled. Contact an A key number is only necessary when you INFINITI retailer. have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by an INFINITI CAUTION retailer. SPA2222 . Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a 1. Intelligent Keys (2 sets) precision device with a built-in transmit- 2. Mechanical keys (inside the Keys) (2 ter. To avoid damaging it, please note sets) the following. 3. Key number plate (1 set) — The Intelligent Key is water INTELLIGENT KEY resistant; however, wetting Your vehicle can only be driven with the may damage the Intelligent Intelligent Keys which are registered to Key. If the Intelligent Key gets your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com- wet, immediately wipe until it is ponents and INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer completely dry. System components. As many as 4 Intelli- — Do not bend, drop or strike it gent Keys can be registered and used with against another object. one vehicle. The new keys must be — Do not place the Intelligent Key registered by an INFINITI retailer prior to for an extended period in a use with the Intelligent Key system and place where temperatures ex- 3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ceed 1408F (608C). Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- straint system” section. — Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. — Do not use a magnet key holder. CAUTION — Do not place the Intelligent Key Always carry the mechanical key installed in near an electric appliance such the key. as a television set or personal computer. VALET HAND-OFF — Do not allow the Intelligent Key When you have to leave a key with a valet, to come into contact with water give them the Intelligent Key itself and or salt water, and do not wash it keep the mechanical key with you to in a washing machine. This SPA2033 protect your belongings. could affect the system function. Mechanical key To prevent the glove box and the trunk . If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, To remove the mechanical key, release the from being opened during valet hand-off, INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code follow the procedures below. of that Intelligent Key. This will prevent lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key. the Intelligent Key from unauthorized To install the mechanical key, firmly insert 1. Push the trunk release power cancel use to unlock the vehicle. For informa- it into the Intelligent Key until the lock switch to the CANCEL side. tion regarding the erasing procedure, knob returns to the lock position. 2. Remove the mechanical key from the please contact an INFINITI retailer. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock Intelligent Key. the doors, glove box and trunk pass- 3. Lock the glove box and the trunk pass- through lid, if they are equipped with a through with the mechanical key. key cylinder. 4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, See “Doors” later in this section and keeping the mechanical key in your “Trunk lid” later in this section, “Storage” pocket or bag for insertion into the in the “2. Instruments and controls” Intelligent Key when you retrieve your section and “Seats” in the “1. Safety — vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 DOORS

See “Trunk lid” later in this section, “Storage” in the “2. Instruments and WARNING controls” section and “Seats” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple- . Always have the doors locked while mental restraint system” section. driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. . Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. SPA2527 . Do not leave children unattended inside LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unat- The power door lock system allows you to tended children could become involved lock or unlock all doors simultaneously in serious accidents. using the mechanical key. . Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle *1 will lock all doors. . Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once to the rear of the vehicle *2 will unlock the driver’s door. After returning the key to the neutral position *3 , turning it to the rear again within 60 seconds will unlock all doors.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments . You can switch the lock system to the mode that allows you to open all the doors when the key is turned once. (See “How to use SETTING button” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” sec- tion.) OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY The driver’s door key operation also allows you to open and close the window that is equipped with the automatic open/close function. (See “Power windows” in the “2. SPA2726 SPA2727 Instruments and controls” section). To open the window, turn the driver’s door LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for To lock the door individually, move the SWITCH longer than 1 second. The door is unlocked inside lock knob to the lock position *1 Operating the power door lock switch will and the window keeps opening while then close the door. lock or unlock all the doors. The switches turning the key. To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the are located on the driver’s and front ’ This function can also be performed by unlock position *2 . passenger s door armrests. pushing and holding the door UNLOCK When locking the door without an Intelli- To lock the doors, push the power door button of the Intelligent Key. (See “Remote gent Key, be sure not to leave the lock switch to the lock position *1 with the keyless entry system” later in this section.) Intelligent Key inside the vehicle. driver’s or front passenger’s door open, To close the window, turn the driver’s door then close the door. key cylinder to the front of the vehicle for When locking the door this way, be certain longer than 1 second. The door is locked not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the and the window keeps closing while turn- vehicle. ing the key.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 To unlock the doors including the fuel-filler 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON door, push the power door lock switch to position. the unlock position *2 . 3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step Lockout protection 2, push and hold the power door lock switch to the position (UNLOCK) for When the power door lock switch is moved more than 5 seconds. to the lock position and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. 4. When activated, the hazard indicator With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle will flash twice. When deactivated, the and any door open, all doors will unlock hazard indicator will flash once. automatically and a chime will sound after 5. The ignition switch must be placed in the door is closed. the OFF and ON position again between These functions help to prevent the In- each setting change. telligent Key from being accidentally When the automatic door unlock system is SPA2728 locked inside the vehicle. deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS position. To unlock the door manually, use The child safety rear door lock helps . All doors lock automatically when the the inside lock knob or the power door lock prevent doors from being opened acciden- vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side). tally, especially when small children are in km/h). the vehicle. . All doors unlock automatically when the When the levers are in the lock position ignition switch is placed in the OFF *1 , the rear doors can be opened only position. from the outside. The automatic unlock function can be To disengage, move the levers to the deactivated or activated. To deactivate or unlock position *2 . activate the automatic door unlock system, perform the following procedure: 1. Close all doors.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

nal computer. WARNING CAUTION . When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter. . Radio waves could adversely affect . Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with In such cases, correct the operating condi- electric medical equipment. Those who you when operating the vehicle. tions before using the Intelligent Key use a pacemaker should contact the . Never leave the Intelligent Key in the function or use the mechanical key. electric medical equipment manufacturer vehicle when you leave the vehicle. for the possible influences before use. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, . The Intelligent Key transmits radio The Intelligent Key is always communicat- the battery’s life is approximately 2 years. waves when the buttons are pushed. ing with the vehicle as it receives radio If the battery is discharged, replace it with The FAA advises that the radio waves waves. The Intelligent Key system trans- a new one. may affect aircraft navigation and com- mits weak radio waves. Environmental Since the Intelligent Key is continuously munication systems. Do not operate the conditions may interfere with the operation Intelligent Key while on an airplane. receiving radio waves, if the key is left near of the Intelligent Key system under the equipment which transmits strong radio Make sure the buttons are not operated following operating conditions. unintentionally when the unit is stored waves, such as signals from a TV and . When operating near a location where during a flight. personal computer, the battery life may strong radio waves are transmitted, become shorter. such as a TV tower, power station and The Intelligent Key system can operate all For information regarding replacement of a broadcasting station. the doors and the trunk lid using the battery, see “Intelligent Key battery repla- . remote controller function or pushing the When in possession of wireless equip- cement” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- request switch on the vehicle without ment, such as a cellular telephone, yourself” section. transceiver, and CB radio. taking the key out from a pocket or purse. For models with a steering wheel lock . The operating environment and/or condi- When the Intelligent Key is in contact mechanism: Because the steering wheel is tions may affect the Intelligent Key system with or covered by metallic materials. locked electrically, unlocking the steering operation. . When any type of radio wave remote wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK Be sure to read the following before using control is used nearby. position is impossible when the vehicle the Intelligent Key system. . When the Intelligent Key is placed near battery is completely discharged. Pay an electric appliance such as a perso- special attention that the vehicle battery

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 is not completely discharged. . Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be key holder that contains a magnet. registered and used with one vehicle. For . Do not place the Intelligent Key near information about the purchase and use of equipment that produces a magnetic additional Intelligent Keys, contact an field, such as a TV, audio equipment INFINITI retailer. and personal computers.

CAUTION If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code . Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This contains electrical components, to come may prevent the unauthorized use of the into contact with water or salt water. Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For This could affect the system function. information regarding the erasing proce- dure, contact an INFINITI retailer. . Do not drop the Intelligent Key. . Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object. . Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. . Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immedi- SPA2538 ately wipe until it is completely dry. . Do not place the Intelligent Key for an INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING extendedperiodinanareawhere RANGE temperatures exceed 1408F (608C). The Intelligent Key functions can only be . If the outside temperature is below 148F used when the Intelligent Key is within the (−108C), the battery of the Intelligent specified operating range from the request Key may not function properly. switch *1 .

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- trunk, make sure you carry the key with charged or strong radio waves are present you and then lock the doors or the near the operating location, the Intelligent trunk. Key system’s operating range becomes . Do not pull the door handle before narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not pushing the door handle request function properly. switch. The door will be unlocked but The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 will not open. Release the door handle cm) from each request switch *1 . once and pull it again to open the door. . If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door The Intelligent Key system (opening/ glass, handle or rear bumper the request closing doors with the door handle switches may not function. request switch) can be set to remain inactive. (See “Vehicle information and When the Intelligent Key is within the settings” in the “4. Monitor, climate, operating range, it is possible for anyone SPA2407 audio, phone and voice recognition who does not carry the Intelligent Key to systems” section.) push the request switch to lock/unlock the DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU- doors and open the trunk lid. TION . Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli- gent Key is outside the vehicle. . After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them. . To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle or the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 Locking doors and fuel-filler door 1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1 2. Close all the doors.*2 3. Push the door handle request switch (driver’s or front passenger’s) *A while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.*3 4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will lock. 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and SPA2729 SPA2730 the outside chime sounds twice. *1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION When you carry the Intelligent Key with while the ignition switch is in the ACC you, you can lock or unlock all doors by or ON position. You can lock or unlock the doors without pushing the door handle request switch taking the key out from your pocket or bag. *2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent (driver’s or front passenger’s) *A within Key while any door is open. the range of operation. *3: Doors will not lock by pushing the When you lock or unlock the doors or the door handle request switch with the trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash Intelligent Key inside the vehicle. and the horn (if so equipped) (or the However, when an Intelligent Key is outside chime) will sound as a confirma- inside the vehicle, doors can be tion. For details, see “Setting hazard locked with another registered Intelli- indicator and horn mode” later in this gent Key. section.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door Opening trunk lid 1. Push the door handle request switch 1. Push the trunk open request switch *A (driver’s or front passenger’s) *A once for more than 1 second. while carrying the Intelligent Key with 2. The trunk will unlatch. An outside you. chime will sound four times. 2. The hazard indicator flashes once and 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk. outside chime sounds once. The corre- sponding door will unlock. Lockout protection: The fuel-filler door will also unlock To prevent the Intelligent Key from being when the driver’s door handle request accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout switch is pushed. protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system. 3. Push the door handle request switch again within 1 minute. SPA2731 When the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside 4. The hazard indicator flashes once and chime will sound and the trunk will open. outside chime sounds once again. All the doors will unlock. BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM All doors and the fuel-filler door will be When all the following conditions are met locked automatically unless one of the for 60 minutes, the battery saver system following operations is performed within 1 will cut off the power supply to prevent minute after pushing the request switch battery discharge. while the doors are locked. . The ignition switch is in the ACC . Opening any door position, and . Pushing the ignition switch . All doors are closed, and During this 1-minute time period, if the . The selector lever is in the P (Park) UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key position. is pushed, all doors will be locked auto- SPA2732 matically after another 1 minute.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and a warning displays in the dot matrix liquid crystal display. When a chime or beep sounds or the warning displays, be sure to check the vehicle and Intelligent Key. See “Troubleshooting guide” later in this section and “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” in the “2. Instruments and con- trols” section.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Symptom Possible cause Action to take The SHIFT P warning appears on the display When pushing the ignition switch The selector lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) and the inside warning chime sounds con- to stop the engine position. position. tinuously. When opening the driver’s door to The inside warning chime sounds continu- The ignition switch is in the ACC Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. get out of the vehicle ously. position. The NO KEY warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds 3 times and the The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. inside warning chime sounds for a few position. When closing the door after get- seconds. ting out of the vehicle The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Move the selector lever to the P (Park) The SHIFT P warning appears on the display position and the selector lever is not in position and push the ignition switch to the and the outside chime sounds continuously. the P (Park) position. OFF position. When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Carry the Intelligent Key with you. inside lock knob turned to LOCK and all the doors unlock. or trunk. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle When pushing the request switch Carry the Intelligent Key with you. or LOCK button on the Intelligent The outside chime sounds for a few seconds. or trunk. Key to lock the door A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely. The outside chime sounds for approximately When closing the trunk lid The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. 10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

The lock and unlock buttons on the WARNING Intelligent Key will not operate when: . the distance between the Intelligent Key The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m). when the buttons are pushed. The FAA . the Intelligent Key battery is dis- advises that the radio waves may affect charged. aircraft navigation and communication sys- After locking with the remote keyless entry tems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key function, pull the door handle to make sure while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons the doors are securely locked. are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored during a flight. The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies depending on the environment. To securely operate the lock and unlock buttons, It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel- approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) SPA2100 filler door, activate the panic alarm and from the door. open the windows by pushing the buttons 1. LOCK button on the Intelligent Key from outside the 2. UNLOCK button vehicle. 3. TRUNK button Before locking the doors, make sure the 4. PANIC button Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle. HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelli- ENTRY SYSTEM gent Key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the When you lock or unlock the doors or the vehicle. (The effective distance depends trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash upon the conditions around the vehicle.) and the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details, see As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode” with one vehicle. For information concern- later in this section. ing the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact an INFINITI retai- ler. 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Locking doors and fuel-filler door 4. The hazard indicator flashes once button, release and push the UNLOCK 1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF again. All the doors will unlock. button again until the window opens position and make sure you carry the All doors will be locked automatically completely. Intelligent Key with you.*1 unless one of the following operations is Window cannot be closed using the In- 2. Close all the doors.*2 performed within 1 minute after pushing telligent Key. * the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key The door window can also be operated by 3. Push the LOCK button 1 on the while the doors are locked. If during this 1- Intelligent Key. turning the mechanical key in a door lock. minute time period, the UNLOCK button on (See “Doors” earlier in this section.) 4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will lock. be locked automatically after another 1 Opening trunk lid 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and minute. 1. Push the TRUNK button *3 on the the horn chirps once. . Opening any door Intelligent Key for more than 1 second. *1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key . Pushing the ignition switch 2. The trunk will unlatch. while the ignition switch is in the ACC 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk. or ON position. Opening windows *2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent The UNLOCK button *2 operation also Using panic alarm Key while any door is open. Operate allows you to open the window that is If you are near your vehicle and feel the door handles to confirm that the equipped with the automatic open/close threatened, you may activate the alarm to “ ” “ doors have been securely locked. function. (See Power windows in the 2. call attention as follows: Instruments and controls” section). Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door 1. Push the PANIC button *4 on the To open the window, push the door key for more than 1 second. 1. Push the UNLOCK button *2 on the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key Intelligent Key once. for about 3 seconds after the door is 2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds. 2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The unlocked. driver’s door and fuel-filler door will To stop opening, release the UNLOCK 3. The panic alarm stops when: . unlock. button. It has run for 25 seconds, or . Any of the buttons on the Intelligent 3. Push the UNLOCK button on the If the window open operation is stopped in Key are pushed. (Note: Panic button Intelligent Key again within 1 minute. mid-operation while pushing the UNLOCK should be pushed for more than 1

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 second.) Setting hazard indicator and horn mode This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn mode when you first receive the vehicle. In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the LOCK button *1 is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK button *2 is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once. If horns are not necessary, the system can be switched to the hazard indicator mode. In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Hazard indicator and horn mode: Switching procedure: To switch the hazard indicator and horn DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK (chime) operation, push the LOCK *1 Intelligent Key system HAZARD - none HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once and UNLOCK *2 buttons on the In- (Using door handle or trunk OUTSIDE CHIME - 4 OUTSIDE CHIME - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - once telligent Key simultaneously for more than request switch) times 2 seconds. Remote keyless entry system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once HAZARD - none (Using , or button) . When the hazard indicator mode is set, HORN - once HORN - none HORN - none the hazard indicator flashes 3 times. . When the hazard indicator and horn Hazard indicator mode: mode is set, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once. DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK Intelligent Key system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none (Using door handle or trunk OUTSIDE CHIME - none OUTSIDE CHIME - none OUTSIDE CHIME - none request switch) Remote keyless entry system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none (Using , or button) HORN - none HORN - none HORN - none

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 HOOD TRUNK LID

WARNING

. Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual. . Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from play- ing and becoming locked in the trunk SPA2733 where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk 1. Pull the hood lock release handle *1 closed, when not in use, and prevent located below the instrument panel; WARNING children’s access to Intelligent Keys. the hood will then spring up slightly. 2. Pull the lever *2 up at the front of the . Make sure the hood is completely closed hood with your fingertips and raise the and latched before driving. Failure to do hood. so could cause the hood to fly open and 3. When closing the hood, slowly close result in an accident. the hood down to latch both the right . If you see steam or smoke coming from and left locks. Push the hood down to the engine compartment, to avoid injury lock the hood securely into place. do not open the hood.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments SPA2734 SPA2732 SPA2766

TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH TRUNK OPEN REQUEST SWITCH OPENING WITH KEY The trunk lid release switch *A is located The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the To open the trunk lid, insert the mechanical on the instrument panel. trunk open request switch *A when the key to the trunk key cylinder and turn the To open the trunk lid, push the release Intelligent Key is within the operating key to the right side of the vehicle. To switch. To close, push the trunk lid down. range of the trunk lock/unlock function close, remove the key and push the trunk regardless of the inside lock knob position. lid down. You can open the trunk lid with Intelligent (See “Intelligent Key system” earlier in this Key. (See “Intelligent Key system” earlier in TRUNK OPEN BUTTON “ section.) this section or Remote keyless entry The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the ” system earlier in this section.) TRUNK OPEN button on the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 vehicle and the Intelligent Key with the valet and keep the mechanical key with you. See “Keys” earlier in this section. To connect the power to the trunk lid, push the switch to the ON *B position.

SPA2767 SPA2768

TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCEL INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH When the switch located inside the glove WARNING box is in the OFF position *A , the power to the trunk lid will be canceled and the trunk Closely supervise children when they are lid cannot be opened by the trunk lid around cars to prevent them from playing release switch, the trunk open request and becoming locked in the trunk where switch or the TRUNK button on the they could be seriously injured. Keep the car Intelligent Key. locked, with the trunk lid securely latched, When you have to leave the vehicle with a when not in use, and prevent children’s valet and want to keep your belongings access to Intelligent Keys. safe in the glove box and the trunk, push this switch to OFF and lock the glove box The interior trunk lid release mechanism with the mechanical key. Then leave the allows opening of the trunk lid in the event

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments FUEL-FILLER DOOR that people become locked inside the trunk . Push the power door lock switch to the or in the event of the loss of electrical UNLOCK position. power such as a discharged battery. To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely Releasing inside the trunk and lock all doors by operating the door handle request switch, the LOCK button on To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the Intelligent Key, the mechanical key or the release handle *1 until the lock the power door lock switch. releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is made of a material that FUEL-FILLER CAP glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light. WARNING The handle is located on the back of the trunk lid as illustrated. . SPA2735 Gasoline is extremely flammable and Releasing from the rear seat highly explosive under certain condi- OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR tions. You could be burned or seriously You can access the release handle through injured if it is misused or mishandled. the trunk pass-through (rear seat armrest). To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel- Always stop engine and do not smoke or “ ” “ — (See Armrest in the 1. Safety Seats, filler door by using one of the following allow open flames or sparks near the seat belts and supplemental restraint operations, then push the upper left side vehicle when refueling. system” section.) of the door. . Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank . To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, Push the door handle request switch after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off pull the release handle towards front of with the Intelligent Key carried with automatically. Continued refueling may vehicle until the lock releases. you. cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel . Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelli- spray and possibly a fire. gent Key. . Use only an original equipment type . Insert the mechanical key into the door fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a lock cylinder and turn it to the rear of built-in safety valve needed for proper the vehicle. operation of the fuel system and emis- sion control system. An incorrect cap can

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 result in a serious malfunction and damage. possible injury. It could also cause the . Insert the cap straight into the fuel-filler malfunction indicator light to come on. tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler cap . Never pour fuel into the throttle body to clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler attempt to start your vehicle. cap properly may cause the mal- . Do not fill a portable fuel container in function indicator light (MIL) to illumi- the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity nate. If the light illuminates can cause an explosion of flammable because the fuel-filler cap is loose or liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or missing, tighten or install the cap and trailer. To reduce the risk of serious continue to drive the vehicle. The injury or death when filling portable fuel light should turn off after a few driving containers: trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle — Always place the container on the JVP0046X inspected by an INFINITI retailer. ground when filling. . The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear To remove the fuel-filler cap: — Do not use electronic devices when if the fuel-filler cap is not properly 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise filling. tightened. Failure to tighten the fuel- to remove. — Keep the pump nozzle in contact filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder with the container while you are CAP warning appears may cause the *A while refueling. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to filling it. To install the fuel-filler cap: illuminate. — Use only approved portable fuel 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the . For additional information, see “Mal- containers for flammable liquid. fuel-filler tube. function Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section. 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard. CAUTION

. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING

3. Push the reset switch *A on the right side of the combination meter panel for WARNING longer than 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning after tighten- . Do not adjust the steering wheel while ing the fuel cap. driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. . Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater SPA2832 risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries Loose fuel cap warning from the air bag if you are up against it The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on when it inflates. Always sit back against the dot matrix liquid crystal display when the seatback and as far away as practical the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly from the steering wheel. Always use the after the vehicle has been refueled. It may seat belts. take a few driving trips for the warning to be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the following: 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. (See “Fuel-filler cap” earlier in this section.) 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23 SUN VISORS

positioner” later in this section.

SPA2737

ELECTRIC OPERATION Tilt or telescopic operation Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel up or down, forward or rearward to the desired position. Entry/Exit function operation: The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up auto- matically when the driver’s door is opened SPA2471 with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This lets the driver get into and 1. To block glare from the front, swing out of the seat more easily. down the main sun visor *1 . For more information, see “Automatic drive

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments MIRRORS

2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side *2 . 3. Slide the sun visor *3 in or out as needed.

SPA2447 SPA2450

INSIDE MIRROR Automatic anti-glare type Adjust the height and the angle of the The inside mirror is designed so that it inside mirror to the desired position. automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the following vehicle. The anti-glare system will be automatically turned on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. When the anti-glare system is turned on, the indicator light *A will illuminate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. Push the “*” switch *C to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25 The indicator light will turn off. Push the “I” switch *D to turn the system on. Do not allow any object to cover the sensors *E or apply glass cleaner on them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in improper operation. For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver operation, see “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section. OUTSIDE MIRRORS SPA2739 SPA2738

WARNING Adjusting outside mirrors Foldable outside mirrors The outside mirror control switch is located Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the on the armrest. passenger side are closer than they appear. CAUTION Be careful when moving to the right. Using The outside mirror will operate only when only this mirror could cause an accident. the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON . Do not touch the mirrors while they are Use the inside mirror or glance over your position. moving. Your hand may be pinched, and shoulder to properly judge distances to Move the switch right or left to select the the mirror may malfunction. other objects. right or left side mirror *1 , then adjust . Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You using the control switch *2 . will be unable to see behind the vehicle. Defrosting outside mirrors . If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by hand, there is a chance that the mirror The outside mirrors will be heated when will move forward or backward during the rear window defroster switch is oper- driving. If the mirrors were folded or ated. unfolded by hand, be sure to adjust 3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments them again electrically before driving. switch. 4. The outside mirror surface moves The outside rearview mirror remote control downward. operates when the ignition switch is in the When one of the following conditions has “ACC” or “ON” position. occurred, the outside mirror surface will To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push return to its original position. the outside rearview mirror folding switch . The selector lever is moved to any to the CLOSE position *1 . To unfold, push position other than R (Reverse). to the OPEN position *2 . . The outside mirror control switch is set If mirrors are manually operated or to the center position. bumped, the mirror body can become . The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF loose at the pivot point. To correct electro- position. nic mirror operation, cycle mirrors by SIC3869 pushing the “CLOSE” switch until comple- tely closed, then push “OPEN” until mirror VANITY MIRROR is in the open position. To use the front vanity mirror, pull down Reverse tilt-down feature the sun visor and pull up the cover. When backing up the vehicle, the right and left outside mirrors will turn downward automatically to provide better rear visibi- lity. 1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Move the selector lever to the R (Reverse) position. 3. Select the right or left side mirror by operating the outside mirror control

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER

The automatic drive positioner system has four features: Cancel or activate entry/exit func- Initialize entry/exit function tion If the battery cable is disconnected, or if . Entry/exit function The selector lever must be in the P (Park) the fuse opens, the entry/exit function will . Seat synchronization function position with the ignition switch in the OFF not work though this function was set on . Memory storage position. before. In such a case, after connecting the . Setting memory function The entry/exit function can be activated or battery or replacing with a new fuse, open ’ ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION canceled by pressing and holding the SET and close the driver s door more than two switch for more than 10 seconds. times after the ignition switch is turned This system is designed so that the driver’s from the ON position to the LOCK position. seat and steering column will automati- The indicator lights on the memory The entry/exit function will be activated. cally move when the selector lever is in the switches (1 and 2) will blink once when P (Park) position. This allows the driver to the function is canceled, and the indicator get into and out of the driver’s seat more lights will blink twice when the function is easily. activated. Note that the indicator lights The driver’s seat will slide backward and may illuminate after 5 seconds while the steering wheel will move up when the holding the SET switch. This indicates driver’s door is opened with the ignition readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to switch in the LOCK position. a stored memory position. Keep the SET switch pressed for more than 10 seconds ’ The driver s seat and steering wheel will to turn on or off the entry/exit function. return to the previous positions when the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC The entry/exit function can also be acti- “ position. vated or canceled if the Lift Steering Wheel on Exit” key or “Slide Driver Seat ’ The driver s seat will not return to the Back on Exit” key is turned to ON or OFF in previous positions if the seat or steering the “Comfort settings” settings. (See “Ve- adjusting switch is operated when the seat hicle information and settings” in the “4. is at the exit position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.)

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments The seat synchronization function operates MEMORY STORAGE under the following conditions: Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering . The ignition switch is in the ON posi- column and outside mirrors can be stored tion. in the automatic drive positioner memory. . The selector lever is in the P (Park) Follow these procedures to use the mem- position. ory system. If the outside mirrors or the steering wheel 1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) reaches its maximum adjustment, the position. function is automatically disabled. Restart 2. Push the ignition switch to the ON the function by selecting a previously position. stored seat memory position using the ’ memory switches (1 or 2). An Intelligent 3. Adjust the driver s seat, steering col- umn and outside mirrors to the desired SPA2792 Key that was previously linked to the stored seat memory can also be used to positions by manually operating each restart the function. adjusting switch. For additional infor- SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION mation, see “Seats” in the “1. Safety — The seat synchronization function automa- If a seat position was not previously stored Seats, seat belts and supplemental tically adjusts the positions of the steering in the seat memory, restart the function by restraint system” section and “Tilt/ wheel and outside mirrors when the seat is adjusting the steering wheel and outside telescopic steering” earlier in this adjusted using the power seat switches. mirrors manually for your best driving section and “Outside mirrors” earlier position and then drive the vehicle above in this section. However, the steering wheel and outside 4 MPH (7 km/h). mirrors will not move if the seat is adjusted 4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 over the maximum thresholds. The system Cancel or activate seat synchroni- seconds, push the memory switch (1 considers that the steering wheel and zation function or 2) fully for at least 1 second. outside mirror adjustments are not neces- The selector lever must be in the P (Park) The indicator light for the pushed sary because the seat may not be adjusted position with the ignition switch in the ACC memory switch will stay on for approxi- for the driving position. Note that the position. mately 5 seconds after pushing the function is set to disabled as the factory switch. default setting. If memory is stored in the same

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29 memory switch, the previous memory indicator light will stay on for approxi- The driver’s seat, steering column will be deleted. mately 5 seconds. and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indica- . Linking Intelligent Key to a stored If the battery cable is disconnected, or if tor light flashing, and then the light the fuse opens, the memory will be will stay on for approximately 5 memory position canceled. In this case, reset the desired seconds. The Intelligent Key can be linked to a position using the previous procedure. SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION stored memory position with the following . If optional Intelligent Keys are added to procedure. your vehicle, the memory storage pro- The status of the following settings can be 1. Follow the steps for storing a memory cedure to switch 1 or 2 and linking linked to the Intelligent Key and the position. Intelligent Key procedure to a stored memorized settings can be available for each Intelligent Key. 2. While the indicator light for the memory memory position should be performed . switch being set is illuminated for 5 again for each Intelligent Key. For Climate control system seconds, push the button on the additional Intelligent Key information, . Navigation system (if so equipped) “ ” Intelligent Key. If the indicator light see Keys earlier in this section. . Audio system blinks, the Intelligent Key is linked to Selecting the memorized position To use the memory function, lock the doors that memory setting. with the Intelligent Key that is linked to the 1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) settings. Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi- position. tion, and then push the button on the To enable the memorized settings: Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat, steering 2. Use one of the following methods to ’ 1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked wheel and outside mirrors will move to the move the driver s seat, the outside mirrors and the steering wheel. to the settings, and unlock the doors by memorized position. ’ . Push the ignition switch to the ON pushing the driver s door handle re- Confirming memory storage position and push the memory quest switch or UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key. . Push the ignition switch to the ON switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 position and push the SET switch. If second. 2. Push the ignition switch to the “ON” the main memory has not been stored, . Within 45 seconds of opening the position. “Connection with the key has the indicator light will come on for driver’s door, push the memory been done” will be displayed on the approximately 0.5 second. When the switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 screen and the memorized settings are memory has stored in position, the second. available (only when a new Intelligent

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Key is used). . When the driver’s door remains open for more than 45 seconds and the SYSTEM OPERATION ignition switch is not in the ON posi- The automatic drive positioner system will tion. not work or will stop operating under the . The seat synchronization function is following conditions: automatically disabled if the outside . When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH mirrors or steering wheel reaches its (7 km/h). maximum adjustment. . When the adjusting switch for the . The seat synchronization function will driver’s seat and steering column is not operate if the seat is adjusted over turned on while the automatic drive one of the following maximum thresh- positioner is operating. olds: . When the memory switch 1 or 2 is not — Seat sliding: 3.0 in (76 mm) pushed for at least 1 second. — Seatback reclining: 9.1 degrees . When the seat, steering column and — Seat lifter (rear side): 0.8 in (20 mm) outside mirrors have already been moved to the memorized position. . When no position is stored in the memory switch. . When the engine is started while moving the automatic drive positioner. . When the selector lever is moved from the P (Park) position to any other position. (However, it will not be canceled if the switch is pushed while the seat and steering column are returning to the previous positions (entry/exit function).)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31 MEMO

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recogni- tion systems

Safety note...... 4-3 Ventilators ...... 4-33 Center multi-function control panel...... 4-4 Automatic climate control...... 4-33 How to use INFINITI controller...... 4-6 Automatic climate control (Type A)...... 4-36 How to use touch screen (models with Automatic climate control (Type B)...... 4-40 navigation system) ...... 4-6 Forest Air®...... 4-42 Menu options (models with Operating tips...... 4-46 navigation system) ...... 4-8 Linking intelligent key...... 4-47 How to select menus on the screen...... 4-9 In-cabin microfilter...... 4-47 Vehicle information and settings...... 4-10 Servicing climate control...... 4-47 How to use STATUS button ...... 4-10 Audio system...... 4-48 How to use brightness control and display Audio operation precautions...... 4-48 ON/OFF button ...... 4-10 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc How to use DISP button ...... 4-10 (CD) player...... 4-61 How to use ECON button DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player operation (models without navigation system) ...... 4-10 (models with navigation system)...... 4-65 How to use INFO button ...... 4-10 USB input operation ...... 4-68 How to use SETTING button...... 4-16 Bluetooth® streaming audio Rearview monitor...... 4-26 (models with navigation system)...... 4-73 How to read displayed lines...... 4-27 iPod® player operation ...... 4-78 How to park with predicted course lines...... 4-27 Music Box (models with Difference between predicted and navigation system)...... 4-79 actual distances ...... 4-29 CD/DVD/USB memory care and cleaning...... 4-86 Predictive course line settings...... 4-32 Steering-wheel-mounted controls How to adjust screen ...... 4-32 for audio ...... 4-87 Operating tips ...... 4-32 Antenna...... 4-88 Car phone or CB radio...... 4-89 Voice recognition system ...... 4-102 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System Pairing procedure ...... 4-107 (models with navigation system)...... 4-89 Phonebook registration...... 4-108 Regulatory information ...... 4-91 Making a call...... 4-109 Voice commands ...... 4-91 Receiving a call...... 4-109 Control buttons ...... 4-91 During a call...... 4-109 Connecting procedure...... 4-92 Phone settings...... 4-110 Phone selection...... 4-92 Voice adaptation mode ...... 4-113 Vehicle phonebook...... 4-92 INFINITI Voice Recognition system Making a call ...... 4-95 (models with navigation system)...... 4-114 Receiving a call ...... 4-96 INFINITI Voice Recognition During a call ...... 4-97 standard mode ...... 4-115 Phone setting...... 4-97 Using the system...... 4-118 Troubleshooting guide...... 4-99 INFINITI Voice Recognition alternate Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System command mode...... 4-127 (models without navigation system)...... 4-100 Using the system...... 4-136 Regulatory information ...... 4-101 Troubleshooting guide ...... 4-142 Control buttons ...... 4-102 SAFETY NOTE

WARNING

. Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electric shock. . Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. . In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest INFINITI retailer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric shock. . Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake to view the images on the front center display screen.

Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme temperature conditions [below −48F(−208C) and above 1588F (708C)]. Operating this system under these condi- tions may result in system malfunctions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3 CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL

9. “ OFF” brightness control and display ON/OFF button (P.4-10)

SAA2953 Models with navigation system 1. “DISP” display setting button (P.4-10) mation button (P.4-10) 2, 5, 6. 4. “SETTING” button (P.4-16) For navigation system control buttons 7. INFINITI controller (P.4-6) (Refer to the separate Navigation 8. “STATUS” status display button ’ System Owner s Manual.) (P.4-10) 3. “INFO” vehicle and navigation infor-

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 9. “ ” brightness DOWN button (P.4-10) When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start.

SAA2954 Models without navigation system 1. “INFO” vehicle information button 5. “ ECON” button (P.4-10) (P.4-10) 6. “SETTING” button (P.4-16) 2. “STATUS” status display button 7. INFINITI controller (P.4-6) (P.4-10) 8. “ OFF” brightness control and 3. “DISP” display setting button (P.4-10) display ON/OFF button (P.4-10) 4. “ ” brightness UP button (P.4-10)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 HOW TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER use a small amount of neutral detergent Choose an item on the display by rotating with a soft cloth. Never use a rough or pushing the center dial *2 upward/ cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any downward, and push the ENTER button *1 kind of solvent or paper towel with a for operation. chemical cleaning agent. They will If you push the BACK button *3 before the scratch or deteriorate the panel. setup is completed, the setup will be . Do not splash any liquid such as water canceled and/or the display will return to or car fragrance on the display. Contact the previous screen. with liquid will cause the system to After the setup is completed, push the malfunction. BACK button *3 and return to the previous screen. To ensure safe driving, some functions SAA2955 cannot be operated while driving. For the VOICE button *4 functions, refer to Models with navigation system the separate Navigation System Owner’s The on-screen functions that are not “ Manual. available while driving will be grayed out” or muted. HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN Park the vehicle in a safe location and then (models with navigation system) operate the navigation system.

CAUTION WARNING

. The glass screen on the liquid crystal . ALWAYS give your full attention to display may break if it is hit with a hard driving. or sharp object. If the glass screen . Avoid using vehicle features that could breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could distract you. If distracted, you could lose result in an injury. control of your vehicle and cause an SAA2956 . To clean the display, use a soft, dry accident. Models without navigation system cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, 4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SAA2473 SAA2474 SAA2475 Example Adjusting an item: Inputting characters: Touch screen operation Touch the + *1 or − *2 key to adjust the Touch the letter or number *1 . With this system, the same operations as settings. There are some options available when those for the INFINITI controller are possi- Touch the *3 or *4 key to move to inputting characters. ble using the touch screen operation. the previous or next item. . Uppercase: Selecting the item: Touch the *5 or *6 key to move to Shows uppercase characters. Touch an item to select it. To select the the previous or next page. . Lowercase: “Audio” settings, touch the “Audio” area Shows lowercase characters. *1 on the screen. . Symbols: Touch the “BACK” *2 key to return to the Shows symbols such as the question previous screen. mark (?). . Space: Inserts a space.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7 . Delete: Deletes the last character that has been input with one touch. Push and hold to delete all of the characters. . OK: Completes character inputs. Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces- sary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dam- SAA3011 SAA2476 pen the cloth first, and then wipe the screen. MENU OPTIONS (models with navi- Available items gation system) Destination/Route: The start menu can be displayed using the These items are for the navigation system. menu control switch on the steering-wheel- See the separate Navigation System Own- mounted controls. er’s Manual for details. 1. While the MAP or STATUS screen is Info: displayed, push and hold the menu Displays the information screen. It is the control switch until the “Menu Options” same screen that appears when you push screen appears. the INFO button. 2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting the menu control switch up or down, Settings: and then push the menu control switch Displays the settings screen. It is the same to select it. screen that appears when you push the SETTING button.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE about the menu selection currently SCREEN highlighted. Vehicle functions are viewed on the display screen in menus. To select each key item, highlight the preferred item using the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button. Whenever a menu selection is made or menu item is highlighted, different areas on the screen provide you with important information. See the following for details. 1. Header: SAA2477 Shows the path used to get to the Models with navigation system current screen. 2. Menu Selections: Shows the options to choose within that menu screen. 3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator: Shows that the INFINITI controller may be used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and select more options. 4. Menu Items Counter: Shows the total number of items listed across all pages for the current menu. 5. Footer/Information Line: SAA3149 Provides more information (if available) Models without navigation system Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS

HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON HOW TO USE DISP BUTTON To display the status of the audio, climate Push the DISP button to show the display control system, fuel consumption and setting screen. (See “Display settings navigation system (if so equipped), push (models with navigation system)” later in the STATUS button. The following informa- this section.) tion will appear when the STATUS button is pushed repeatedly. HOW TO USE ECON BUTTON Audio and Climate control system ? Audio (models without navigation system) and fuel economy ? Audio and Navigation Push the “ECON” button to show fuel system (if so equipped) economy information. (See “Fuel Economy information” later in this section.) HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON- TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON SAA3144 Push the “ OFF” button to switch the The display screen shows vehicle and Models with navigation system display brightness to the daytime mode or navigation (if so equipped) information the nighttime mode, and to adjust the for your convenience. display brightness using the INFINITI con- The information shown on the screen troller while the indicator is displayed at should be a guide to determine the the bottom of the screen. condition of the vehicle. See the following Push and hold the “ OFF” button for for details. more than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the button again to turn the display on. Models without navigation system: The display brightness can also be ad- justed using the “ ” button or “ ” button. SAA2145 Models without navigation system 4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Vehicle information display 1. Push the INFO button on the control panel. 2. Select an item from the INFO menu. 3. After viewing or adjusting the informa- tion on the following screens, push the BACK button to return to the INFO menu. See the separate Navigation System Own- er’s Manual for the following items: . Where am I? . Traffic Info SAA2479 JVH0056M . Weather Info Models with navigation system Models without navigation system . Map Update . Navigation Version When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the “Navigation Version” key is displayed after selecting the “Others” key.

SAA2480 JVH0057M Models with navigation system Models without navigation system Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 Fuel Economy information TIRE PRESSURE information The approximate distance to empty, aver- age fuel economy and current fuel econo- WARNING my will be displayed for reference. To reset the average fuel economy (Avg . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel Fuel Econ), select the “Reset Fuel Eco” or is replaced, tire pressure will not be “Reset” key. indicated, the TPMS will not function If the “Fuel Eco History” or “View” key is and the low tire pressure warning light selected, the average fuel consumption will flash for approximately 1 minute. history will be displayed in graph form The light will remain on after 1 minute. along with the average for the previous Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as Reset-to-Reset period. possible for tire replacement and/or SAA3146 system resetting. The unit can be converted between “US” and “Metric”. (See “How to use SETTING Models with navigation system . Replacing tires with those not originally button” later in this section.) specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. The fuel economy information may differ from the information displayed on the vehicle information display. This is due to The tire pressure will be displayed for the timing difference in updating the reference. information and does not indicate a mal- The pressure indication “** kPa” or “** function. psi” on the screen means that the pressure For models without the navigation system, is being measured. After a few driving the information can be displayed by trips, the pressure for each tire will be displayed. pushing the ECON button on the control panel. For models with navigation system, to change the measurement units, select the “ ” SAA3147 Select Units key with the INFINITI con- troller and push the ENTER button. Models without navigation system 4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The unit can be converted in the LANGUAGE & UNITS settings display. (See “How to use SETTING button” later in this section for details.) In case of low tire pressure, LOW PRES- SURE information will be displayed on the screen. Check the pressure of all tires. Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition and the temperature. After tire rotation is performed, tire pres- sure will not be displayed in the actual tire position. Drive the vehicle at over 25 MPH SAA2481 SAA2830 (40 km/h) for approximately 10 minutes to reset the display. For more details about the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), see “Tire Pres- sure Monitoring System (TPMS) ” in the “5. Starting and driving” section. When the ignition switch is in the ACC position, the “Tire Pressure” key is not displayed.

SAA2482 SAA3141 Models with navigation system Models without navigation system

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 Maintenance information button” later in this section.) The maintenance intervals can be dis- played for the engine oil, oil filter, tire and other reminders. To set a maintenance interval, select a preferred item from the list. You can also set to display a message to remind you that the maintenance needs to be performed. The following example shows how to set the engine oil maintenance information. Use the same steps to set the other maintenance information. SAA3003 1. Set the interval (mileage) of the main- Models with navigation system tenance schedule. To determine the recommended maintenance interval, refer to your “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”. 2. To display the reminder automatically when the desired distance is reached, select the “Reminder” key. 3. Reset the driving distance to the new maintenance schedule. 4. To return to the previous screen, push the BACK button. “ ” The unit can be converted between US SAA1611 and “Metric”. (See “How to use SETTING Models without navigation system 4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The Reminder will be automatically dis- GPS Position: played when the specified distance has For the details of this item, see the been driven and every time the ignition separate Navigation System Owner’s Man- switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position. ual. The reminder will not appear while driving. Voice Recognition: Select the “OK” key to hide the reminder For the details of this item, see “INFINITI for the rest of the current drive. Voice Recognition system (models with To stop the reminder from appearing, navigation system)” later in this section. perform one of the following actions: . Select the “Reset Distance” key. . Deactivate the “Reminder”. . Increase the “Interval” distance to be more than the current distance being SAA3145 tracked. Others information (models with navigation system) The Others information display will appear when pushing the INFO button and select- ing the “Others” key. Navigation Version: For the details of this item, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man- ual. When the ignition switch is in the ignition position, the “Navigation Version” key is displayed after pushing the INFO button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON The display as illustrated will appear when the SETTING button is pushed. For navigation settings, refer to the sepa- rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SAA3009 SAA2485 Models with navigation system Models with navigation system

SAA3013 SAA2740 Models without navigation system Models without navigation system 4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Audio settings BOSE® Centerpoint® (if so equipped): not properly embedded in the file or The display as illustrated will appear when When this item is turned to ON, an exciting device, the image will not be displayed. pushing the SETTING button and selecting surround sound effect is generated from a Phone settings (models with navi- the “Audio” key. traditional stereo recording. gation system) ® ® Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade: BOSE AudioPilot (if so equipped): For details of the “Phone” settings, see To adjust the speaker tone quality and When this item is turned to ON, Audio- “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ® sound balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, Pilot 2 Noise Compensation Technology (models with navigation system)” later in “Balance” or “Fade” key and adjust it with monitors noise in the passenger compart- this section. ment with a microphone and compensates the INFINITI controller. ® for any unpleasant noise. Bluetooth settings (models with Theseitemscanalsobeadjustedby navigation system) pushing and turning the AUDIO knob. Surround Effect (if so equipped): “ ®” To adjust the surround sound volume, For details of the Bluetooth settings, Speed Sensitive Vol. (if so equipped): “ ® select “Surround Effect” key and adjust it see Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System The audio system’s volume is increased ” with the INFINITI controller. (models with navigation system) later in with the vehicle speed. Select the “Speed this section or “Bluetooth® streaming ® Sensitive Vol.” key and adjust the effect DivX Registration Code (models with audio (models with navigation system)” level with the INFINITI controller. The Speed navigation system): later in this section. Sensitive Volume function is turned off The registration code for a device that is when the level is set to OFF. Increasing the used to download DivX® files will be value will cause the volume to increase displayed on the screen. If a disc is loaded faster with vehicle speed. or a USB memory is connected to the audio Precision Phased Audio (if so equipped): system, this function will not be activated. When this item is turned to ON, super high Display Album Cover Art (models with pitch sound and super low pitch sound are navigation system): emphasized and midrange sound is played When this item is turned to ON, the album naturally. cover image is displayed when playing iPod® or MP3 music files through a CD, DVD or USB memory. When the image is

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 Guidance Volume: being heard, please check the Guidance To adjust the guidance voice volume louder Volume level. or softer, select the “Guidance Volume” key and adjust it with the INFINITI con- troller. You can also adjust the guidance voice volume by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice guidance is being an- nounced. Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call: For the details of these items, see “Blue- tooth® Hands-Free Phone System (models SAA2554 with navigation system)” later in this section. Volume and Beeps settings (models with navigation system) Switch Beeps: When this item is turned to ON, you will The display as illustrated will appear when hear a beep sound when you use a button. pushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Volume & Beeps” key. Guidance Voice: Audio Volume: When this item is turned to ON, you will hear voice guidance in the navigation To increase or decrease the audio volume, operation or in other operations. select the “Audio Volume” key and adjust it with the INFINITI controller. You can also NOTE: adjust the audio volume by turning the When the voice guidance is being an- VOLUME control knob. nounced during audio playback, turning the volume knob does not adjust the music level; it adjusts the guidance volume level. If voice guidance is not 4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems and adjust it with the INFINITI controller. For the details of “ECO DRIVE”, see “ECO pedal system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section. DRIVER ASSISTANCE settings (if so equipped) For the details of the “Driver Assistance” settings, see the following items: . “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys- tem/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section. SAA2605 SAA3008 . “Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/ TM ” Button Beeps settings (models Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) system Others settings (models with navi- in the “5. Starting and driving” section. without navigation system) gation system) . “Distance Control Assist (DCA) system” “ ” The Button Beeps screen will appear in the “5. Starting and driving” section. The Others settings display will appear when pushing the SETTING button, select- when pushing the SETTING button and . “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) sys- ing the “Button Beeps” keywiththe selecting the “Others” key. tem” in the “5. Starting and driving” INFINITI controller and pushing the ENTER section. The following items are available: button. . Comfort Button Beeps: . Language & Units When this item is turned to ON, you will . Voice Recognition hear a beep sound when you use a button. . Camera ECO DRIVE settings (if so equipped) . Image Viewer To adjust the Eco pedal driver’s assist, Depending on the vehicle equipment, select the “Standard”, “Soft“ or “OFF” key pushing SETTING button will display the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 following items. The other method is to push and hold the “ ” . Display OFF button for more than 2 seconds. . Clock When any mode button is pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on for further operation. The screen will turn off auto- matically 5 seconds after the operation is finished. To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON position, or push and hold the “ OFF” button. . Brightness/Contrast/Background Color To adjust the brightness and contrast of SAA2486 the screen, select the “Brightness” or “Contrast” key. Display settings (models with na- Then, you can adjust the brightness and vigation system) the contrast using the INFINITI controller. The display as illustrated will appear when For information on the “Background Color” pushing the SETTING button and selecting key, refer to the separate Navigation the “Others” key, and then selecting the System Owner’s Manual. “Display” key. Color Theme: Display Adjustment: Choose the theme color of the menu screen To adjust the display settings, select the from “Black”, “Brown” or “Silver”. “Display Adjustment” key. The following settings are available. . Display To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button and turn the “Display” indicator off.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems To turn on the screen, set this item to the “ON” position or push the “ ” button. Brightness/Contrast/Background Color: To adjust the brightness, contrast and background color of the screen, select the appropriate “Brightness”, “Contrast” or “Background Color” key and push the ENTER button. Then, you can adjust the brightness, and the contrast using the INFINITI controller. Switch the background color to the day- time mode or the nighttime mode by SAA2115 pushing the ENTER button. SAA3151 Models with navigation system Display settings (models without navigation system) The “Display” screen will appear when pushing the DISP button on the control panel. Display: To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button and turn the “ON” indicator off. When any mode button is pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on for further operation. The screen will turn off auto- matically 5 seconds after the operation is finished. SAA3150 Models without navigation system Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 Comfort settings After getting into the vehicle and pushing When this item is turned to OFF, all the Models with navigation system the ignition switch to the ACC position, the doors will be unlocked after the door steering wheel moves to the previous unlock operation is performed once. The display as illustrated will appear when position. pushing the SETTING button and selecting Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock: the “Others” key, and then selecting the Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit (if so When this item is turned to ON, door lock/ “Comfort” key. This key does not appear on equipped): unlock function by pushing the door the display until the ignition switch is When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s handle request switch will be activated. seat moves backward for easy exit if the pushed to the ON position. Return All Settings to Default: ignition switch is in the OFF position and Models without navigation system “ ” the driver’s door is opened. After getting Select this item and then select YES to The display as illustrated will appear when into the vehicle and pushing the ignition return all settings to the default. pushing the SETTING button and selecting switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat “ ” the Comfort key. This key does not moves to the previous position. appear on the display until the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. Light Off Delay: Auto Interior Illumination: Choose the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, When this item is turned to ON, the interior 120, 150 and 180 second periods. lights will illuminate if any door is un- locked. Selective Door Unlock: Light Sensitivity: When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s door is unlocked first after the door Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic unlock operation. When the door handle headlights higher (right) or lower (left). request switch on the driver’s or front Lift Steering Wheel on Exit (if so passenger’s side door is pushed to be equipped): unlocked, only the corresponding door is When this item is turned to ON, the unlocked first. All the doors can be steering wheel moves upward for easy exit unlocked if the door unlock operation is if the ignition switch is in the LOCK performed again within 60 seconds. position and the driver’s door is opened. 4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system. Clock Format (24h): When this item is turned to ON, the 24- hour clock is displayed. When this item is not turned to ON, the 12-hour clock is displayed. Offset (hour)/(min): Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per hour or per minute.

SAA2487 Daylight Saving Time: SAA3007 Turn this item to ON for daylight saving Models with navigation system Clock settings (models with navi- time application. gation system) Time Zone: The display as illustrated will appear when Choose the time zone from the following pushing the SETTING button and selecting . Pacific the “Others” key, and then selecting the . “Clock” key. Mountain . Central The clock settings display cannot be . operated while driving. Stop the vehicle Eastern in a safe place and apply the parking brake . Atlantic before setting the clock. . Newfoundland . On-screen Clock: Hawaii . Alaska When this item is turned to ON, a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner SAA3014 of the screen. Models without navigation system Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 Language & Units settings following display, select “kPa” or “psi”. The Language & Units settings display will When the ignition switch is in the ACC “ ” appear when pushing the SETTING button, position, the Select Units (Tire Pressure) selecting the “Language & Units” key with key is not displayed. the INFINITI controller and pushing the Voice Recognition settings (models ENTER button. with navigation system) For models with the navigation system, For details about the “Voice Recognition” “ ” select the Others key to show the settings, see “INFINITI Voice Recognition “ ” Language & Units key. system (models with navigation system)” Select Language: later in this section. Select the “Select Language” key. Choose Camera settings “English”, “Français” or “Español” for your “ ” SAA2491 favorite display appearance. The CAMERA screen will appear when selecting the “Camera” key with the “ ” If you select the Français key, the French INFINITI controller and pushing the ENTER Image Viewer (models with naviga- language will be displayed, so please use button. tion system) the French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual, see “Owner’s For the details about the camera system The image files in the USB memory will be “ ” Manual/Service Manual order information” operation, see Rearview monitor later in displayed. To display the Image Viewer, in the “9. Technical and consumer informa- this section. push the SETTING button, select the tion” section. “Other” key and then select the “Image Viewer” key. The image of the selected file Select Units: is displayed on the right side of the screen. “ ” “ ” Select the Select Units key. Choose US When a number of folders are included in 8 “ ” 8 (Mile, F, MPG) or Metric (km, C, L/100 the USB memory, select a folder from the km) for your favorite display appearance. list to display the file list. Select Units (Tire Pressure): Images will not be shown on the display Choose the “Select Units (Tire Pressure)” while the vehicle is in any drive position to key and push the ENTER button. From the reduce driver distraction. To view images,

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems stop the vehicle in a safe location and file. apply the parking brake. . (Previous) Select the “ ” key to display the previous file. Setting the Image Viewer: The Image Viewer setting display will appear when selecting the “Settings” key on the full screen display. The following settings are available for the full screen display. . Slideshow Speed Select the “Slideshow Speed” key. SAA2492 From the following display, select the Full Screen Display: changing time from 5, 10, 30, 60 seconds or “No Auto Change”. The full screen display will appear when . Slideshow Order selecting the “Full Screen Display” key. Select the “Slideshow Order” key. From To operate the Image Viewer or to change the following display, select “Random” the settings, select the desired key using or “Order List”. For “Order List”, the the INFINITI controller. image order is the order of the files as . (Start) stored on the USB memory. Select the “ ” key to start playing Operating tips: the slideshow. . Only files that meet the following . (Stop) conditions will be displayed. Select the “ ” key to stop the — Image type: JPEG slideshow. — File Extensions: *.jpg, *jpeg . (Next) Select the “ ” key to display the next Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 REARVIEW MONITOR

When the selector lever is shifted into the — Maximum Resolution: 2048 6 1536 “R” (Reverse) position, the monitor display monitoring range limitation. pixels shows view to the rear of the vehicle. . Do not put anything on the rearview — Maximum Size: 2-MB The system is designed as an aid to the camera. The rearview camera is installed — Colors: 32768 (15-bit) driver in detecting large stationary objects above the license plate. — Maximum File Name lengths: 253- to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The . When washing the vehicle with high- Bytes system will not detect small objects below pressure water, be sure not to spray it — Maximum Folders: 500 the bumper and may not detect objects around the camera. Otherwise, water — Maximum Images per Folder: 1024 close to the bumper or on the ground. may enter the camera unit causing water . If an electronic device (such as a digital condensation on the lens, a malfunction, camera) is directly connected to the WARNING fire or an electric shock. vehicle using a USB cable, no image . Do not strike the camera. It is a precision will be displayed on the screen. . The rearview camera is a convenience instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunc- . If the file name is too long, some file but it is not a substitute for proper tion or cause damage resulting in a fire names may not be entirely displayed. backing up. Always turn and check that or an electric shock. . When the total number of characters in it is safe to do so before backing up. the file name exceeds 100 or if 1 file Always back up slowly. name in a directory exceeds 100 . characters, all files will show a shor- Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor CAUTION tened 8-character version. The image differ from actual distance because a There is a plastic cover over the camera. Do will still be displayed when selected. wide-angle lens is used. Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or opposite like ones viewed in the inside snow from the cover. and outside mirrors. . Make sure that the trunk is securely closed when backing up. . Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView monitor because of its

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems up. . On a snow-covered or slippery road, Predicted course lines *6 : there may be a difference between the Indicate the predicted course when back- predicted course line and the actual ing up. The predicted course lines will be course line. displayed on the monitor when the selector . If the battery is disconnected or be- lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position and comes discharged, the predicted course the steering wheel is turned. The predicted lines may not be displayed correctly. If course lines will move depending on how this occurs, drive the vehicle on a much the steering wheel is turned and will straight road for more than 5 minutes. not be displayed while the steering wheel . The displayed lines will appear slightly is in the neutral position. off to the right because the rearview HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED camera is not installed in the rear center SAA1896 COURSE LINES of the vehicle. . The distance guide line and the vehicle HOW TO READ DISPLAYED LINES width guide line should be used as a Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle WARNING reference only when the vehicle is on a width and distances to objects with re- level paved surface. The distance viewed . ference to the bumper line *A are dis- Always turn and check that it is safe to on the monitor is for reference only and played on the monitor. park your car before backing up. Always may be different than the actual distance back up slowly. Distance guide lines: between the vehicle and displayed ob- . Use the displayed lines as a reference. jects. Indicate distances from the bumper. The lines are highly affected by the . When backing up the vehicle up a hill, . Red line *1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle objects viewed in the monitor are further . Yellow line *2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) position, road condition and road grade. than they appear. When backing up the . Green line *3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) . If the tires are replaced with different vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the . Green line *4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m) sized tires, the predicted course line monitor are closer than they appear. Use Vehicle width guide lines *5 : may not be displayed correctly. the inside mirror or glance over your Indicate the vehicle width when backing shoulder to properly judge distances to

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 other objects.

The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

SAA1897 SAA1898

1. Visually check that the parking space is 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting safe before parking your vehicle. the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines *B enter the parking 2. The rearview of the vehicle is displayed * on the screen *A as illustrated when space C . the selector lever is moved to the “R” 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make (Reverse) position. the vehicle width guide lines *D parallel to the parking space *C while 4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems referring to the predicted course lines. actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on the hill is the 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space place *B . Note that any object on the hill is completely, move the selector lever to further than it appears on the monitor. the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different from the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

SAA1899

Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft (1 m) to the place *A , but the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 but the actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on the hill is the place *B . Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

SAA1900 SAA1923

Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting object When backing up the vehicle down a hill, The predicted course lines *A do not touch the distance guide lines and the vehicle the object in the display. However, the width guide lines are shown further than vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual distance. For example, the the actual backing up course. display shows 3 ft (1 m) to the place *A ,

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems may hit the object when backing up to the position *A if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

SAA2404 Models with navigation system

SAA1924

Backing up behind a projecting object The position *C is shown further than the position *B in the display. However, the * position C is actually at the same SAA2606 distance as the position *A . The vehicle Models without navigation system Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE SETTINGS OPERATING TIPS . Objects on the monitor may not be clear To turn ON or OFF the predictive course line . When the selector lever is shifted to the in a dark place or at night. This is not a display, push the SETTING button, select “R” (Reverse) position, the monitor malfunction. the “Camera” key and push the ENTER screen automatically changes to the . If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the button. RearView monitor mode. camera, the RearView monitor may not clearly display objects. Clean the cam- . Predictive Course Lines . It may take some time until the Rear- era. When this item is turned to ON, the View monitor is displayed after the “ ” . Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner predicted course lines will be displayed selector lever has been shifted to R to clean the camera. This will cause on the monitor when the selector/shift from another position or to another “ ” discoloration. To clean the camera, lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position. position from R . Objects may be distorted momentarily until the Rear- wipe with a cloth dampened with HOW TO ADJUST SCREEN View monitor screen is displayed com- diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth. To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, pletely. . Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the . When the temperature is extremely high Do not damage the camera as the RearView monitor, push the SETTING but- or low, the screen may not clearly monitor screen may be adversely af- ton with the RearView monitor on, select display objects. This is not a malfunc- fected. the “Display” key on the screen and select tion. . Do not use wax on the camera window. the item key and adjust the level using the . When strong light directly enters the Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth INFINITI controller. camera, objects may not be displayed dampened with mild detergent diluted with water. Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, clearly. This is not a malfunction. Contrast and Black Level of the RearView . Vertical lines may be seen in objects on monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make the screen. This is due to strong sure the parking brake is firmly applied reflected light from the bumper. This and the engine is not running. is not a malfunction. The display of the predicted course lines . The screen may flicker under fluores- can be set to ON or OFF. For details, see cent light. This is not a malfunction. “Camera settings” earlier in this section. . The colors of objects on the RearView monitor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object. 4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems VENTILATORS AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. WARNING : This symbol indicates that the ventilators are closed. . The air conditioner cooling function : This symbol indicates that the ventilators are operates only when the engine is run- open. ning. . Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to SAA3142 cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Front . Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the automatic climate control system.

SAA3012 Rear

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 When the “STATUS” button is pushed, the automatic climate control status screen will appear. (See “How to use STATUS button” earlier in this section.) You can individually set the driver and front passenger side temperature using each temperature control button.

SAA3143 Models with navigation system

JVH0055M Models without navigation system 4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 7. “ ” air intake control button 8. “ ” air recirculation button 9. “CLIMATE” button 10, 11. Temperature control button (driver side) 12. “ ” manual air flow control button (driver side) 13. “ ” manual air flow control button (passenger side) 14, 15. Temperature control button (passen- ger side)

SAA2952 Type A 1. “ ” front defroster button tem 2. “ ” rear window defroster button 4. “ ” fan speed decrease button “ (See Rear window and outside mirror 5. “ ” fan speed increase button ” “ defroster switch in the 2. Instru- 6. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON ” ments and controls section.) button 3. “OFF” button for climate control sys-

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL 3. To turn off the climate control system, increase “ ” button and set it to (Type A) push the “OFF” button. the maximum position. A visible mist may be seen coming from the . As soon as possible after the wind- Automatic operation ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the shield is clean, push the “AUTO” button Cooling and/or dehumidified heating air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate to return to the auto mode. (AUTO): a malfunction. . When the front defroster “ ” button is pushed, the air conditioner will This mode may be used all year round. The Dehumidified defrosting or defogging: system works automatically to control the automatically be turned on at outside 1. Push the front defroster “ ” button. inside temperature, air flow distribution temperatures above 238F(−58C) to (The indicator light on the button will and fan speed after the preferred tempera- defog the windshield, and the air come on.) ture is set manually. recirculate mode will automatically be 2. Push the temperature control button turned off. 1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The (driver side) to set the desired tem- indicator on the button will illuminate Outside air is drawn into the passenger perature. and AUTO will be displayed.) compartment to improve the defogging . The temperature can be set within performance. 2. Push the temperature control button the following range. (driver side) to set the desired tem- Manual operation – For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C) perature. – 8 Fan speed control: . The temperature can be set within For Canada: 64 to 90 F (18 to 328C) Push the fan speed increase “ ” or the following range. “ ” . The temperature of the passenger decrease button to manually control – For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C) compartment will be maintained the fan speed. – For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to automatically. Air flow distribution Push the “AUTO” button to return to 328C) and fan speed will also be controlled automatic control of the fan speed. . The temperature of the passenger automatically. Temperature control: compartment will be maintained 3. To turn off the climate control system, automatically. Air flow distribution Turn the temperature control dial to set the push the “OFF” button. and fan speed will also be controlled desired temperature. . automatically. To quickly remove ice from the outside . The temperature can be set within the of the windows, push the fan speed following range.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems — For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C) both indicator lights will blink twice — For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to 328C) indicating that the system is in the automatic control mode. Air recirculation: Push the air recirculation “ ” button to Air flow control: change the air circulation mode. When the Pushing the “ ” button selects the air indicator light illuminates, the flowing air outlet to: is recirculated inside the vehicle. : Air flows from center and side ventilators. The air recirculation mode cannot be : Air flows from center and side ventilators and activated when the air conditioner is in foot outlets. the front defrosting mode “ ”. : Air flows mainly from foot outlets. : Air flows from defroster and foot outlets. Outside air circulation: Push the outside air circulation “ ” SAA3002 button to change the air circulation mode. Models with navigation system When the indicator light illuminates, the flowing air is drawn from outside the vehicle. Automatic air intake control: To set the automatic control mode, perform one of the following operations. . When the outside air circulation mode is on, push and hold the outside air circulation “ ” button for more than 2 seconds. . When the air recirculation mode is on, push and hold the air recirculation “ ” button for more than 2 seconds. JVH0054M When setting the automatic control mode, Models without navigation system Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 CLIMATE setting screen function does not activate even if the The air flow against the driver’sor “ ” ’ Climate control settings can be changed on A/C indicator light illuminates. passenger s upper body becomes gen- tle. the screen. Dual control mode setting: . Push the CLIMATE button on the instrument You can individually set the driver and front Distribution between straight and up- panel and turn the display to the Climate passenger side temperature and air flow ward flows is determined automatically mode. mode using each temperature control by the climate control system. If you button or manual air flow control button. prefer strong air flow against your Heating (A/C OFF): upper body, select the “Upper Vent” “ ” The air conditioner does not activate in this 1. Push the CLIMATE button to on. key to turn the indicator light off. mode. When you need to heat only, use 2. By selecting the “DUAL” key, or when . When the outside temperature de- this mode. the passenger side temperature control creases to approximately 148F 1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on. button or manual air control button is (−108C), the “Upper Vent” function pushed, the “DUAL” indicator on the does not activate. The “Upper Vent” 2. If the “A/C” indicator on the screen screen will illuminate. function reactivates automatically when illuminates, select the “A/C” key. (The ambient temperature is 148F(−108C) or “A/C” indicator will turn off.) 3. To turn off the passenger side tempera- ture control, select the “DUAL” key and more. 3. Push the temperature control button to the “DUAL” indicator will turn off. set the desired temperature. . The Dual control mode cannot be . The temperature of the passenger activated when the air conditioner is compartment will be maintained auto- in the front defrosting mode “ ”. matically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automati- Automatic upper ventilator system: cally. In this mode, air from the center ventilators . Do not set the temperature lower than flows both straight and upward in order to the outside air temperature. Otherwise control the cabin temperature without the system may not work properly. blowing air directly on the occupants. . Not recommended if windows fog up. 1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on. When the outside temperature decreases 2. Select the “Upper Vent” key, and the to approximately −238F(08C), the A/C indicator on the screen will illuminate.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 8. “ ” intake air control button 9. “CLIMATE” button 10, 11. Temperature control button (driver side) 12. “ ” manual air flow control button (driver side) 13. “ ” manual air flow control button (passenger side) 14, 15. Temperature control button (passen- ger side)

SAA2951 Type B 1. “ ” front defroster button tem 2. “ ” rear window defogger button 4. “ ” fan speed decrease button “ (See Rear window and outside mirror 5. “ ” fan speed increase button ” “ defroster switch in the 2. Instru- 6. “AUTO” automatic operation button ments and controls” section.) 7. “ ” Forest button 3. “OFF” button for climate control sys-

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL 3. To turn off the climate control system, defogging performance. push the “OFF” button. (Type B) Manual operation A visible mist may be seen coming from the Automatic operation ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the The manual mode can be used to control Cooling and/or dehumidified heating air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate the heater and air conditioner to your (AUTO): a malfunction. desired settings. This mode may be used year-round as the To turn off the heater and air conditioner, Dehumidified defrosting/defogging: “ ” system automatically controls constant push the OFF button. 1. Push the “ ” button. (The indicator temperature, air flow distribution and fan light will illuminate.) Fan speed control: speed after the desired temperature is set Push the fan speed control “ ” button manually. 2. Push the temperature control button (driver side) to set the desired tem- to increase the fan speed. 1. Push the “AUTO” button. perature. Push the fan speed control “ ” button to (The AUTO indicator light on the button . To remove frost from the outside decrease the fan speed. “ ” will illuminate and AUTO will appear surface of the windshield quickly, Push the “AUTO” button to change the fan on the display.) set the temperature control and fan speed to the automatic mode. 2. Push the temperature control button speed control to their maximum Air flow control: (driver’s side) to set the desired tem- position. “ ” perature. . After the windshield is cleared, push Push the button to change the air flow mode. . The temperature can be set within the “AUTO” button to set to the the following range. automatic mode. : Air flows from the center and side ventilators. – For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C) . When the “ ” button is pushed, : Air flows from the center and side ventilators, the air conditioner will automatically and foot outlets. – For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to turn on when the outside air tem- : Air flows mainly from the foot outlets. 328C) perature is above 238F(−58C) to : Air flows from the defogger and foot outlets. . The temperature of the passenger defog the windshield. The air recir- Temperature control: compartment will be maintained culation mode will automatically Turn the temperature control dial to set the automatically. Air flow distribution turn off. The outside air circulation desired temperature. and fan speed will also be controlled mode will be selected to improve the automatically. 4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . The temperature can be set within the and “AUTO” will appear on the display.) following range. 3. If the “A/C” indicator illuminates, — For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C) select the “A/C” key. (The “A/C” — For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to 328C) indicator will turn off.) Air recirculation: 4. Push the temperature control button to Push the intake air control “ ” button to set the desired temperature. recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. . Do not set the temperature lower than The “ ” indicator light on the button will the outside air temperature. Doing so come on. may cause the temperature to not to be The air recirculation mode cannot be controlled properly. activated when the air conditioner is in . If the windows fog up, use dehumidified the front defrosting mode “ ”. heating instead of A/C off heating. SAA2959 Outside air circulation: Dual control mode setting: Push the intake air control “ ” button to CLIMATE setting screen You can individually set driver and front passenger side temperature and air flow change the air circulation from the intake Climate control settings can be changed on “ ” mode using each temperature control or air to the outside air. The indicator the screen. light will turn off. manual air flow control button. Push the “CLIMATE” button on the instru- 1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on. Automatic air intake control: ment panel and turn the display to the “ ” In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be “Climate” screen. 2. By selecting the DUAL key, or when controlled automatically. To manually con- the passenger side temperature control Heating (A/C off): trol the intake air, push the intake air button or manual air control button is “ ” control “ ” button. To return to the The air conditioner does not activate in this pushed, the DUAL indicator on the automatic control mode, push the intake mode. When you need to heat only, use screen will illuminate. air control “ ” button for approximately this mode. 3. To turn off the passenger side tempera- 2 seconds. The indicator lights will flash 1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on. ture control, select the “DUAL” key and twice, and then the intake air will be 2. Push the “AUTO” button. (The “AUTO” the “DUAL” indicator will turn off. controlled automatically. indicator on the screen will illuminate

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 . The Dual control mode cannot be Display Forest Air® system setting screen: the button will illuminate.) activated when the air conditioner is The “Forest Air setting” screen will appear When the following functions and sensors “ ” in the front defrosting mode . when selecting the “Forest Air Setting” key. are turned on, the Forest Air® system Automatic upper ventilator system: For the details about the Forest Air® settings will activate. 1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on. system setting operation, see “Setting . Breeze Mode Forest Air®” later in this section. 2. Select the “Upper Vent” key and the . Outside odor and exhaust gas detection indicator on the screen will illuminate. Display Forest Air® Information screen: sensor . The air flow against the driver’sor The Forest Air® system information screen Inside Air Quality sensor passenger’s upper body becomes gen- will appear when selecting the “Forest Air . Auto humidity control tle. Info” key. The fan speed and air flow is automatically In this mode, air from the center For details about the Forest Air® system set to the AUTO position. ventilators flows both straight and information screen, see “Forest Air® sys- . The Forest Air® system can be adjusted upward in order to control the cabin tem Information” later in this section. and/or activated/deactivated for each temperature without blowing air di- ® ® function. For details of The Forest Air rectly on the occupants. FOREST AIR system settings, see later in this ® Distribution between straight and upward The Forest Air system keeps the air inside section. flows is determined automatically by the the vehicle clean using the automatic air . When the “ ” Forest button is climate control system. If you prefer strong intake system and automatic ventilation. pushed while the air conditioner is ® air flow against your upper body, select The Forest Air system also makes the off, the air conditioner will automati- “Upper Vent” key to turn the indicator off. inside of the vehicle more comfortable, cally activate. using a combination of the upper ventilator . When the outside temperature de- . When the outside temperature drops to and center ventilators at random. creases to approximately 148F approximately 328F(08C), the Forest ® (−108C), the “Upper Vent” function *Forest Air is a trademark of Nissan Motor Air® system will automatically turn off, does not activate. The “Upper Vent” Co., Ltd. and the system will not be reactivated function reactivates automatically when Main operation automatically even if the outside tem- the ambient temperature is 148F perature reaches 328F(08C). To reacti- (−108C) or more. Push the “ ” Forest button. vate the system, push the Forest (The “ ” and “AUTO” indicator light on button manually. (The indicator light on

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems the Forest button will illuminate.) . When operating fan speed or air flow the ventilator. After 40 seconds, the out- ® . The air flow control is not available in control while the Forest Air system is side odor and exhaust gas sensor activates the front defogger mode. When the turned on, the “ ” indicator light on and automatically alternates between the “ ” button is pushed while the the button will turn off automatically, recirculation mode and outside air circula- Forest Air® system is turned on, the and the Breeze Mode function will turn tion mode. ® Forest Air system will turn off. off. . The outside odor and exhaust gas . When the Breeze Mode function is detection sensor detects industry odors Operating tips ® turned off while the Forest Air system such as pulp or chemicals, and exhaust Breeze Mode: is on, the Breeze Mode function will gas such as gasoline or diesel. remain off until the “ ” Forest button When this mode is ON, fan speed fluc- Inside Air Quality sensor: tuates during the Forest Air® system is turned off and on again. This vehicle is equipped with an inside air operation, creating a wind breeze similar Outside odor and exhaust gas detection quality sensor. When the sensor detects to a natural breeze using a combination of sensor: odor in the cabin, the system increases the the upper ventilator and the center venti- This vehicle is equipped with an outside fan speed automatically. When the Forest lators at random. odor and exhaust gas detection sensor. Air® system is on, the inside air quality . Breeze Mode will activate after the When the automatic intake air control is sensor will turn on. This function may not temperature of the passenger compart- on, the sensor detects odors and exhaust work during the first 5 minutes after the ment becomes suitable. gas, and then the system automatically engine is started because the system is . This function will not operate immedi- changes from the outside air circulation still warming up. mode to the recirculation mode. When the ately after the engine starts. . The Outside/Inside Air Mix function will “ ” Forest button is pushed, the outside . Breeze Mode will activate when the air turn off when the air recirculation and odor and exhaust gas detection sensor will flow mode is in the “ ” and “ ” outside air circulation modes are chan- turn on. mode. ged manually. When the Outside/Inside ® . This function will turn off if the fan When the Forest Air system is on, for the Air Mix function is not active, turn off speed or a ventilator outlet is manually first 40 seconds, the recirculation mode is and on the Forest Air® system, the adjusted. selected to prevent dust, dirt and pollen Outside/Inside Air Mix function will . The breeze patterns may change in from entering the vehicle, and the system activate again. accordance with the amount of sun cleans the air inside of the vehicle with ® load. Plasmacluster ion that are emitted from Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 Auto humidity control: Breeze Mode ON/OFF: The sensor installed on the upper side of When this item is turned to ON, the Breeze the windshield detects the temperature Mode function will activate while the Forest and humidity of the passenger compart- Air® system operates. ment and the surface of the windshield, Fan Speed Variance: and controls the humidity of the passenger compartment to not be over-dry or moist Set the Breeze Mode fluctuation effect. enough to fog the windows. Moreover, it Select the “Fan Speed Variance” key and detects potential fog before formation on select the “High” or “Low” key setting of the windows and operates to remove it. the Breeze Mode fluctuation effect. . Push the “AUTO” or “ ” Forest button Setting the fan speed to “High” allows a (The “AUTO” or “ ” indicator light on larger fluctuation change. “ the button will illuminate and AUTO SAA2961 Outside/Inside Air Mix: DEF” will appear on the display.) This item allows the user to set priority . “ ” ® The Auto humidity control function Setting Forest Air between the outside air circulation and air will not operate if the fan speed or a 1. Push the “CLIMATE” button on the recirculation modes. vent outlet is manually adjusted. instrument panel and turn the display “ ” (“AUTO DEF” will disappear from the Select the Outside/Inside Air Mix key to the “CLIMATE mode” screen. “ ” “ ” display.) and use or key to adjust “ ” priority. . When auto humidity control is turned 2. Select the Forest Air Setting key. off while the Forest Air® system is on, The Forest Air® system settings screen Greater priority will be given to the air turn off and on the Forest Air® system, is displayed. recirculation mode when the indicator is closer to “ ”,andtheoutsideair the auto humidity control will activate . No settings, except for auto humidity circulation mode when the indicator is again. control, are available unless the “ ” closer to “ ”. indicator light on the button illumi- nates. Auto Defogging Sensitivity: This item allows the user to set the timing of the automatic defogging activation function. 4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Select the “Auto Defogging Sensitivity” key The present condition of air inside and and select the “Slow” or “Fast” key. outside the vehicle is indicated by When set to OFF, the automatic defogging color. function will turn off. Blue: The air is clean. Orange: The air is not clean. 3. Outside air circulation/Air recirculation arrow The air flow of the outside air circula- tion and air recirculation functions is indicated with an arrow. Blue arrow: The air is clean. SAA2962 Orange arrow: The air is not clean. 4. Auto humidity control status ® Forest Air system Information The condition of fog on the window is The present status of the Forest Air® displayed. When the window starts to system operation and the conditions of fog, the color turns white. air inside and outside of the vehicle can be 5. Outside air circulation/Air recirculation checked. display “ ” Push the CLIMATE button on the instru- When the outside air circulation or air ment panel and turn the display to the recirculation mode is automatically “ ” CLIMATE mode screen and select the selected, either “ ” or “ ” is “ ” Forest Air Info key. displayed. When the outside air circula- 1. Breeze Mode tion or air recirculation mode is manu- The animation image of the Breeze ally selected, either “ ” or “ ”, Mode function is displayed. and “Manual” are displayed. 2. The condition of outside and inside air

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45 The amount of Plasmacluster® ion in- creases according to the amount of air flow. When the air flow is high, “ ” is displayed on the screen and when the air flow is low, the indication in the screen changes to “ ”. Plasmacluster® and Plasmacluster® ion are trademarks of Sharp Corporation. OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate. SAA3015 This is not a malfunction. After the coolant SIC2768 temperature warms up, air will flow nor- Ion control mally from the foot outlets. This unit generates highly concentrated Plasmacluster® ion into the air blown from the ventilators and reduces odor absorbed into the interior trim. The high-density Plasmacluster® ions gen- erated in the air conditioner’s air stream not only suppress airborne bacteria and reduce the adherence of odors to the interior trim, but also have a proven skin moisture preserving effect. When the air conditioner is turned on, the system generates Plasmacluster® ion auto- JVH0039X matically.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The sensors *A and *B on the instrument With Forest Air® system control system refrigerant and lubricant panel helps maintain a constant tempera- The climate control system is equipped recommendations.) ture. Do not put anything on or around this with a natural grape seed polyphenol filter Your INFINITI retailer will be able to service sensor. which collects and neutralizes dirt, pollen, your environmentally friendly climate con- LINKING INTELLIGENT KEY dust, etc. To make sure that the air trol system. conditioner heats, defogs and ventilates The Climate control system settings can be efficiently, replace the filter in accordance memorized for each Intelligent Key. For with the maintenance schedule in the WARNING more details, see “Setting memory func- INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide. tion” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and The system contains refrigerant under high To replace the filter, contact an INFINITI adjustments” section. pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air retailer. conditioner service should be done only by IN-CABIN MICROFILTER The filter should be replaced if the air flow an experienced technician with the proper Without Forest Air® system decreases significantly or if windows fog equipment. up easily when operating the heater or air The climate control system is equipped conditioner. with an in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen, dust, allergen (such as pollen, SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL tick shell), etc. To make sure that the air The climate control system in your INFINITI conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates is charged with a refrigerant designed with efficiently, replace the filter in accordance the environment in mind. This refrigerant with the maintenance schedule in the will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide. However, special charging equipment and To replace the filter, contact an INFINITI lubricant are required when servicing your retailer. INFINITI air conditioner. Using improper The filter should be replaced if the air flow refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe decreases significantly or if windows fog damage to your climate control system. up easily when operating the heater or air (See “Capacities and recommended fuel/ conditioner. lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con- sumer information” section for climate

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47 AUDIO SYSTEM

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception Radio area, and do not indicate any malfunction Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON in your INFINITI radio system. position and push the radio band select Reception conditions will constantly button to turn on the radio. If you listen to change because of vehicle movement. the radio with the engine not running, the Buildings, terrain, signal distance and ignition switch should be pushed to the interference from other vehicles can work ACC position. against ideal reception. Described below Radio reception is affected by station are some of the factors that can affect your signal strength, distance from radio trans- radio reception. mitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and Some cellular phones or other devices may other external influences. Intermittent cause interference or a buzzing noise to SAA0306 changes in reception quality normally are come from the audio system speakers. caused by these external influences. Storing the device in a different location FM radio reception: Using a cellular phone in or near the may reduce or eliminate the noise. Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 vehicle may influence radio reception to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural quality. (single station) FM having slightly more Radio reception: range than stereo FM. External influences Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with may sometimes interfere with FM station state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en- reception even if the FM station is within hance radio reception. These circuits are 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM designed to extend reception range, and to signal is directly related to the distance enhance the quality of that reception. between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibit- However there are some general character- ing many of the same characteristics as istics of both FM and AM radio signals that light. For example they will reflect off can affect radio reception quality in a objects. moving vehicle, even when the finest

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away turbulence even in areas where no obsta- from a station transmitter, the signals will cles exist. tend to fade and/or drift. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical Static and flutter: During signal interfer- power lines, electric signs and even traffic ence from buildings, large hills or due to lights. antenna position, usually in conjunction Satellite radio reception: with increased distance from the station transmitter, static or flutter can be heard. When the satellite radio is used for the first This can be reduced by lowering the treble time or the battery has been replaced, the setting to reduce the treble response. satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 Multipath reception: Because of the reflec- minutes with the satellite radio ON and the tive characteristics of FM signals, direct vehicle outside of any metal or large and reflected signals reach the receiver at building for the satellite radio to receive the same time. The signals may cancel all of the necessary data. each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound. The satellite radio mode requires an active XM® Satellite Radio subscription. The AM radio reception: satellite radio is not available in Alaska, AM signals, because of their low frequency, Hawaii and Guam. can bend around objects and skip along The satellite radio performance may be the ground. In addition, the signals can be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks bounced off the ionosphere and bent back the satellite radio signal. SAA0480 to earth. Because of these characteristics. If possible, do not put cargo near the AM signals are also subject to interference Compact Disc (CD) player satellite antenna. as they travel from transmitter to receiver. . Do not force a compact disc into the CD A build up of ice on the satellite radio Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing insert slot. This could damage the CD antenna can affect satellite radio perfor- through freeway underpasses or in areas and/or CD player. mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite with many tall buildings. It can also occur . Trying to load a CD with the CD door radio reception. for several seconds during ionospheric closed could damage the CD and/or CD

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49 player. tion. . During cold weather or rainy days, the — 3.1 in (8 cm) discs player may malfunction due to the — CDs that are not round humidity. If this occurs, remove the — CDs with a paper label CD and dehumidify or ventilate the — CDs that are warped, scratched, or player completely. have abnormal edges . The player may skip while driving on . This audio system can only play pre- rough roads. recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to . The CD player sometimes cannot func- record or burn CDs. tion when the passenger compartment . If the CD cannot be played, one of the temperature is extremely high. De- following messages will be displayed. crease the temperature before use. CHECK DISC: . Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) . round discs that have the “COMPACT Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or (the label side is facing up, etc.). packaging. . Confirm that the CD is not bent or . Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. warped and it is free of scratches. . CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, PUSH EJECT: scratched, covered with fingerprints, This is an error due to the temperature or that have pin holes may not work inside the player is too high. Remove the LHA0484 properly. CD by pushing the EJECT button, and after . The following CDs may not work prop- a short time reinsert the CD. The CD can be DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player erly: played when the temperature of the player (models with navigation system) — returns to normal. Copy control compact discs (CCCD) . Do not force a compact disc into the — Recordable compact discs (CD-R) UNPLAYABLE: CD/DVD insert slot. This could damage — Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) The file is unplayable in this audio system the CD/DVD player. . Do not use the following CDs as they (only MP3 or WMA CD). . During cold weather or rainy days, the may cause the CD player to malfunc- player may malfunction due to humid-

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ity. If this occurs, remove the CD/DVD . Do not use the following CD/DVDs as temperature of the player returns to and dehumidify or ventilate the player they may cause the CD/DVD player to normal. If the error persists, consult completely. malfunction. your local retailer. . The player may skip while driving on — 3.1 in (8 cm) discs Unplayable File: rough roads. — CD/DVDs that are not round . The file may be copy protected. . The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot — CD/DVDs with a paper label . The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A or function when the passenger compart- — CD/DVDs that are warped, scratched DivX® type. ment temperature is extremely high. or have abnormal edges Region Invalid: Decrease the temperature before use. — This audio system can only play . The DVD is not for region 1 or all . Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) prerecorded CD/DVDs. It has no regions. Use DVDs with a region code round discs that have the “COMPACT capabilities to record or burn CD/ “1”, “ALL” or “1 included” for your DVD disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video” DVDs. entertainment system. (The region code logo on the disc or packaging. . If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of *A is displayed as a small symbol . Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct the following messages will be dis- printed on the top of the DVD *B .) This sunlight. played. vehicle-installed DVD player cannot . CD/DVDs that are of poor quality, dirty, Disc Read Error: play DVDs with a region code other scratched, covered with fingerprints, or “ ” “ ” . Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted than 1 or ALL . that have pinholes may not work correctly (the label side is facing up, properly. Copyright and trademark: etc.). . The following CD/DVDs are not guaran- . The technology protected by the U.S. . Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent or teed to play: patent and other intellectual property warped and it is free of scratches. — Copy control compact discs (CCCD) rights owned by Macrovision Corpora- Please Eject Disc: tion and other right holders is adopted — Recordable compact discs (CD-R) . This may be an error due to the for this system. — Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) temperature inside the player being . This copyright protected technology — Recordable DVDs (DVD±R, DVD±R too high. Remove the CD/DVD by cannot be used without a permit from DL) pushing the EJECT button, and after a Macrovision Corporation. It is limited to — Rewritable DVDs (DVD±RW, DVD±RW short time reinsert the CD/DVD. The be personal use, etc., as long as the DL) CD/DVD can be played when the permit from Macrovision Corporation is

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51 not issued. USB (Universal Serial Bus) use a personal computer. . Modifying or disassembling is prohib- This system supports various USB memory . Partitioned USB devices may not be ited. sticks, USB hard drives and iPod® players. played correctly. . Dolby digital is manufactured under There are some USB devices which may not . Some characters used in other lan- license from Dolby Laboratories, Inc. be supported with this system. guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are . Dolby and the double D mark “ ” are . Make sure that the USB device is not displayed properly on the vehicle trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. connected correctly into the USB con- center screen. Using English language . DTS and DTS 2.0 “ ” are registered nector. characters with a USB device is recom- mended. trademarks of DTS, Inc. . Do not force the memory stick or USB . . DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ” are cable into the USB connector. This Do not connect a USB device if a registered trademarks of Digital Theater could damage the connector. connector or cable is wet. Allow the cable and/or connectors to dry com- Systems, Inc. . During cold weather or rainy days, the pletely before connecting the USB player may malfunction due to humid- Parental level (parental control): device. If the connector is exposed to ity. If this occurs, remove the USB DVDs with the parental control setting can fluids other than water, evaporative device and dehumidify or ventilate the be played with this system. Please use residue may cause a short between USB player completely. your own judgement to set the parental the connector pins. . The USB player sometimes cannot control with the system. . Large video podcast files cause slow function when the passenger compart- responses in an iPod®. The vehicle Disc selection: ment temperature is extremely high. center display may momentarily black The following disc formats can be played Decrease the temperature before use. out, but it will soon recover. with the DVD drive. . Do not leave USB memory in a place . If an iPod® automatically selects large . DVD-VIDEO prone to static electricity or where the video podcast files while in the shuffle . air conditioner blows directly. The data VIDEO-CD mode, the vehicle center display may in the USB memory may be damaged. . CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) momentarily black out, but it will soon . . DTS-CD The vehicle is not equipped with a USB recover. memory stick. . Audiobooks may not play in the same . A USB device cannot be formatted with order as they appear on an iPod®. this system. To format a USB device,

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . An iPod nano® (1st Generation) may compression reduces certain parts of . Multisession — Multisession is one of remain in fast forward or rewind mode sound that seem inaudible to most the methods for writing data to media. if it is connected during a seek opera- people. Writing data once to the media is called tion. In this case, please manually reset . WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a single session, and writing more than ® the iPod . a compressed audio format created by once is called a multisession. . An iPod nano® (2nd Generation) will Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The . ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the continue to fast forward or rewind if it WMA codec offers greater file compres- part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file is disconnected during a seek opera- sion than the MP3 codec, enabling that contains information about the tion. storage of more digital audio tracks in digital music file such as song title, . An incorrect song title may appear when the same amount of space when artist, album title, encoding bit rate, the Play Mode is changed while using compared to MP3s at the same level track time duration, etc. ID3 tag in- the iPod nano® (2nd Generation) of quality. formation is displayed on the Album/ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., . AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding Artist/Track title line on the display. ® ® registered in the U.S. and other countries. (AAC) is a lossy audio compression * Windows and Windows Media are format. Audio files that have been registered trademarks or trademarks of Compressed Audio Files (MP3/ encoded with AAC are generally smaller Microsoft Corporation in the United States WMA/AAC) in size and deliver a higher quality of of America and/or other countries. Explanation of terms: sound than MP3. . — . MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is of bits per second used by a digital the most well known compressed music file. The size and quality of a digital audio file format. This format compressed digital audio file is deter- allows for near “CD quality” sound, but mined by the bit rate used when at a fraction of the size of normal audio encoding the file. files. MP3 conversion of an audio track . Sampling frequency — Sampling fre- can reduce the file size by approxi- quency is the rate at which the samples mately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 of a signal are converted from analog to kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually digital (A/D conversion) per second. no perceptible loss in quality. The

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53 . The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order. . Music playback order of compressed audio files is as illustrated.

SAA2494

Playback order: . The folder names of folders not contain- ing compressed audio files are not shown in the display. . If there is a file in the top level of a disc/ USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Specification chart: Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM*5, DVD±R*5, DVD±RW*5, DVD±R DL*5, USB2.0 CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM*5, DVD±R*5, DVD±RW*5, DVD±R DL*5: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. Supported file systems * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported. UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0 * VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported. USB memory: FAT16, FAT32 Version MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9 Supported WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz versions*1 Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4 Version MPEG-AAC AAC*5 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4 ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only) Tag information (Song title and Artist name) WMA tag (WMA only) Models with navigation system: Folder levels: 8, Folders: 512 (including root folder), Files: 5,000 Folder levels Models without navigation system: Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder) Models with navigation system: 100 characters Text character number limitation Models without navigation system: 64 characters 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), Displayable character codes*3 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55 *1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played. *2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played. *3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed. *4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. *5 Models with navigation system

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Troubleshooting guide: Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Cannot play Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)”, “.M4A (.m4a)”,or“.AA3 (.aa3)” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright. Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing. the music starts playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not Music cuts off or skips match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data. Move immediately to the next song If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright when playing. protection, the player will skip to the next song. The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order. desired order. Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57 Compressed Video Files (models mined by the bit rate used when with navigation system) encoding the file. Explanation of terms: . DivX® - DivX® refers to the DivX® codec owned by DivX, Inc. used for a lossy compression of video based on MPEG- 4. . AVI - AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave. It is a standard file format originated by Microsoft Corporation. A “.divx” encoded file can be saved into the “.avi” file format for playback on this system if it meets the requirements stated in the table in this section. However, not all the “.avi” files are playable on this system since different encodings can be used than the DivX® codec. . ASF - ASF stands for Advanced Systems Format. It is a file format owned by Microsoft Corporation. Note: Only “. asf” files that meet the requirements stated in the table in this section can be played. . Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital video file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is deter-

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Requirement for Supporting Video Playback: Bluetooth® Audio player (models with navigation system) Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory . ® CD, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02 Some Bluetooth audio devices may CD-R, +ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0 not be recognized by the in-vehicle CD-RW, - ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. audio system. - Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista- DVD, . It is necessary to set up the wireless File Systems DVD±R, based computer) are not supported. DVD±RW, - VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported. connection between a compatible Blue- ® DVD±RW DL tooth audio device and the in-vehicle ® USB Memory FAT16, FAT32 Bluetooth module before using the ® Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6 Bluetooth audio player. .divx, .avi . ® Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM Operating procedure of the Bluetooth File Types Video Codec ISO-MPEG4 audio player will vary depending on the .asf device. Make sure it is understood how Audio Codec G.726 to operate an audio device before using Maximum Average 4Mbps Bit Rates .divx, .avi it with this system. Maximum Peak 8Mbps . The Bluetooth® audio player may be Minimum 32 6 32 .divx, .avi stopped under the following condi- Maximum 720 6 480 Resolution tions: Minimum 32 6 32 — Receiving a hands-free call. .asf 6 Maximum 720 576 — Checking the connection to the hands-free phone. . Do not place a Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent tone quality degra- dation and wireless connection disrup- tion.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59 . While an audio device is connected high-speed recording. ® through a Bluetooth wireless connec- . Jumping sounds may be recorded when tion, the battery power of the device a compact disc is recorded while may discharge quicker than usual. driving on rough roads and excessive . This system supports the Bluetooth® vibration occurs. Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, . A mark indicating jumping sounds is AVRCP). displayed if jumping sounds are re- . Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by corded. Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to . No sounds may be recorded if jumping Clarion Co., Ltd. sounds occurs or the disc is in poor condition. . Music Box (models with navigation Tracks that include Serial Copy Manage- ment System (SCMS) are not recorded. system) . If a compact disc is scratched or dirty, it Recording: may not be recorded, jumping sounds . Note that data that is lost and not may occur or it may take a long time to stored to the hard disk drive due to record. system damage, improper operation or Automatic title download: malfunction is not under warranty. . The title information that is automati- . Vehicle owners are not permitted to cally downloaded may differ from the record music without permission of the actual title. ownerofthecopyrightexceptfor . When newly released compact discs are personal use. recorded, their title information may . Check if the music is appropriately not be downloaded. recorded to the hard disk drive after . The title information in the hard disk recording when the compact disc can- can be updated. (See “Playing recorded not be rerecorded. songs” later in this section.) . Some music cannot be recorded de- pending on the disc condition due to 4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 10. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA/AAC folder selector / AUDIO control knob 11. Radio station preset buttons No satellite radio reception is available unless an XM Satellite Radio subscription is active. FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” earlier in this sec- tion. The satellite radio mode requires an active XM Satellite Radio subscription. The satel- lite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. It may take some time to receive the activation signal after subscribing the XM Satellite Radio. After receiving the activa- tion signal, an available channel list will be SAA2957 automatically updated in the radio. For XM, push the ignition switch from LOCK to ACC 1. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob 5. XM radio band select button to update the channel list. 2. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) 6. DISC·AUX selector button Audio main operation button for SEEK/TRACK 7. RDM (random) RPT (repeat) play but- 3. Radio CAT(category)/FF (fast forward) ton Head unit : button for SEEK/TRACK 8. Radio SCAN (tuning) button The auto loudness circuit enhances the low 4. FM·AM radio band select button 9. CD EJECT button and high frequency ranges automatically in both radio reception and CD playback. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61 ON·OFF/Volume control: Switching the display: When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON Pushing the DISC·AUX button will switch the radio will automatically change from position, and then push the ON·OFF button the displays as follows: stereo to monaural reception. while the system is off to turn on the last . Models with navigation system audio source (i.e. FM or CD), which was ® radio (FM·AM) band select : iPod /USB ? CD/DVD ? Music Box ? playing immediately before the system was ® ® Bluetooth Audio ? iPod /USB Pushing the XM radio band select button turned off. While the system is on, pushing will change the band as follows: . Models without navigation system the ON·OFF button turns the system off. AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM iPod®/USB ? CD ? iPod®/USB Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume. Linking Intelligent Key (models with navi- radio (XM) band select: gation system): Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal- Pushing the XM radio band select button ance: The audio settings can be memorized for will change the band as follows: each Intelligent Key. For more details, see To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1 “Setting memory function” in the “3. Pre- push the Audio control knob. When the driving checks and adjustments” section. The satellite radio is not available in display shows the setting you want to Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. change (Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade), FM-AM-SAT radio operation rotate the Audio control knob to set the TUNE (Tuning) : When the radio band select button is desired setting. For the other setting . For AM and FM radio pushed while the ignition switch is in the methods, see “How to use SETTING button” ACC or ON position, the radio will come on Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual earlier in this section. at the channel last played. tuning. This vehicle has some sound effect func- . For XM Satellite Radio The last channel played will also come on tions as follows: when the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON. Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek . Speed Sensitive Vol. channels from all of the categories If another audio source is playing when the . when any category is not selected. Precision Phased Audio (if so equipped) radio band select button is turned to ON, ® ® . BOSE Centerpoint 2 (if so equipped) the audio source will automatically be SEEK tuning/CATEGORY (CAT): . BOSE® AudioPilot® 2 (if so equipped) turned off and the last radio channel . For more details, see “How to use SETTING played will come on. For AM and FM radio button” earlier in this section. Push the SEEK button or to 4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems tune from low to high or high to low If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed Menu (XM Satellite Radio) (models with frequencies and to stop at the next within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to navigation system): broadcasting station. the next station/channel. When the “Menu” key on the display is . For XM Satellite Radio to Station memory operations: selected while the XM Satellite Radio is being played, the menu list will be Push the SEEK button or to 12 stations/channels can be set for the FM displayed. tune to the first channel of the next or band (6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for XM previous category. radio (6 each for XM1, XM2 and XM3) and 6 The following items are available. During satellite radio reception, the follow- stations can be set for the AM band. . Preset List ing notices will be displayed under certain 1. Choose the radio band using the radio Displays the preset channel list. If 1 of conditions. band select button. the 6 preset stations listed is touched . NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while 2. Tune to the desired station/channel and held, the current station will be the SAT tuner is connected.) using the , SCAN button or the stored as the new preset. . OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off) radio TUNE knob. . Customize Channel List . CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection 3. Push and hold the desired station Selects specific channels to skip while error) preset button to until the radio using the TUNE, SEEK/CATEGORY or . LOADING (When the initial setting is mutes. Menu-Categories feature. performed) . Favorite Artists & Songs 4. The station indicator will then come on . UPDATING (When the satellite radio and the sound will resume. Memorizing Stores the current artist or song that is subscription is not active) “ ” is now complete. being played. Touch the Alert key to be reminded when the stored artist or 5. Other buttons can be set in the same SCAN tuning: song is playing on a station while manner. Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from listening to XM. low to high frequencies and stop at each If the battery cable is disconnected, or if . Categories the fuse opens, the radio memory will be broadcasting station/channel for 5 sec- Selecting a category will go to the first erased. In that case, reset the desired onds. Pushing the button again during this channel in that category as defined by stations/channels. 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning XM Radio. and the radio will remain tuned to that . Direct Tune station/channel. Inputs the channel number by using a

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63 keypad. Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs. — 1 Track Repeat — Text (models without navigation system): 1 Disc Random PLAY: — When the “Text” key is selected with the 1 Folder Random (for CD with INFINITI controller on the display and then When the DISC·AUX (CD play) button is compressed audio files) the ENTER button is pushed while the pushed with the system off and the CD . Record to Music Box (for CD) satellite radio is being played, the text loaded, the system will turn on and the CD Select to choose specific songs on the information listed below will be displayed will start to play. CD to record to the Music Box. on the screen. When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with . Title Text Priority (for CD) . CH Name the CD loaded and the radio playing, the Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc radio will automatically be turned off and . Category Data Base) to acquire track information the CD will start to play. . Name from the Gracenote Database, or set the priority to CD-TEXT to acquire the . Title Menu (models with navigation system): information from CDs. . When the “Menu” key on the display is Other . selected while the CD is being played, the Automatic Recording (for CD) Compact Disc (CD) player operation menu screen will be displayed. The follow- When this item is turned to ON, the Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON ing menu options are available. Music Box hard drive automatically position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) . Folder List (for CD with compressed starts recording when a CD is inserted. . into the slot with the label side facing up. audio files) Recording Quality (for CD) The CD will be guided automatically into Displays the folder list. The larger number (132) will increase the slot and start playing. . Track List the recorded sound quality while taking up more space on the Music Box After loading the CD, the number of tracks Displays the track list. on the CD and the play time will appear on leaving less room for more songs. . Play Mode the display. For the details of Music Box, see “Music Select a play mode from the following Box (models with navigation system)” later If the radio is already operating, it will items. automatically turn off and the CD will play. in this section. — Normal Text (models without navigation system): If the system has been turned off while the — 1 Folder Repeat (for CD with com- “ ” CD was playing, pushing the ON·OFF pressed audio files) When the Text key is selected in the button will start the CD. screen using the INFINITI controller and 4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems then the ENTER button is pushed while the RANDOM (RDM), REPEAT (RPT): DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) PLAYER CD is being played, the music information OPERATION (models with naviga- below will be displayed on the screen. When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is played, the play pattern can be tion system) CD: changed as follows: Precautions . Disc title (CD) Start the engine when using the DVD . Track title entertainment system. CD with compressed audio files: Movies will not be shown on the front . Folder title display while the vehicle is in any drive . File title (CD with compressed audio files) position to reduce driver distraction. Audio . Song title is available when a movie is played. To . Album title view movies in the front display, stop the . Artist vehicle in a safe location, move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. Next/Previous Track and Fast For- CD EJECT: ward/Rewind: When the CD EJECT button is pushed with WARNING When the or button is pushed for the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected. more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is . When this button is pushed while the CD is The driver must not attempt to operate being played, the CD will play while fast being played, the CD will be ejected. the DVD system or wear the headphones forwarding or rewinding. When the button while the vehicle is in motion so that full is released, the CD will return to normal If the CD comes out and is not removed, it attention may be given to vehicle opera- play speed. will be pulled back into the slot to protect tion. it. When the or button is pushed for . Do not attempt to modify the system to less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being display a movie on the front screen while played, the next track or the beginning of the vehicle is being driven. Doing so may the current track on the CD will be played. distract the driver and may cause a collision and serious personal injury or death.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65 being played, and it will turn off auto- CAUTION matically after a period of time. To turn it on again, push the DISC·AUX button again. . Only operate the DVD while the vehicle DVD operation keys: engine is running. Operating the DVD for When the DVD is playing without the extended periods of time with the operation screen being shown, you may engine OFF can discharge the vehicle use the touch screen to select items from battery. the displayed video. You may also use the . Do not allow the system to get wet. INFINITI controller to select an item from Excessive moisture such as spilled the displayed video. When the operation liquids may cause the system to mal- screen is being shown, use the INFINITI function. controller or touch screen to select an item . While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD SAA2497 from the displayed menus. player does not guarantee complete functionality of all VIDEO-CD formats. Playing a DVD PAUSE: “ ” DISC·AUX button: Select the key to pause the DVD. To resume playing the DVD, use the “PLAY” Display settings Park the vehicle in a safe location for the key. To adjust the front display mode, push the front seat occupants to operate the DVD SETTING button while the DVD is being drive while watching the images. “ ” PLAY: played, select the Others key and then Push the DISC·AUX button on the instru- “ ” “ ” select the Display key. ment panel and turn the display to the DVD Select the key to start playing the To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, mode. DVD, for example, after pausing the DVD. “ tint, color and contrast, select the Display When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed ” STOP: Adjustment key and then select each key. automatically. Select the “ ” key to stop playing the Then you can adjust each item using the The operation screen will be turned on DVD. INFINITI controller. After changes have when the DISC·AUX button located on the been made push the BACK button to save instrument panel is pushed while a DVD is the setting.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO): / Next/Previous Chapter: Some menus specific to each disc will be “ ” “ ” Select the or key to skip the shown. For details, see the instructions on chapter(s) of the disc forward/backward. the disc. The chapters will advance/go back the number of times this key is selected. Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR): The scene with the specified title will be / Commercial Skip: displayed each time the “+” side or “−” This function is only for DVD-VIDEO, DVD- side is selected. VR. Select the “ ” or “ ” key to skip Group Search (VIDEO CD): forward or backwards by the set amount as A scene in the specified group will be defined in the DVD Settings menu. displayed each time the “+” side or “−” Top Menu: SAA2498 side is selected. When the “Top Menu” key is selected in Example 10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,CD- the screen while a DVD is being played, the DA, DVD-VR): DVD settings top menu specific to each disc will be Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the “ ” displayed. For details, see the instructions Select the Settings key to adjust the number entry screen. Input the number to on the disc. following settings. be searched and select the “OK” key. The Key (DVD-VIDEO): specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track will Keys for the DVD menu operation are be played. displayed. Select No. (VIDEO-CD): : Move the cursor to select a DVD menu. Select the “Select No.” key to open the Enter: Enter the selected menu. number entry screen. Input the number to Move: Change the display location by moving the be searched and select the “OK” key. The operation key. specified scene will be played. Back: Return to the previous screen. Angle (DVD-VIDEO): Hide: Hide the operation key. If the DVD contains different angles (such

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67 as moving images), the current image DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD): angle can be switched to another one. Select the “DVD Language” key to open the Select the “Angle” key. The angle will number entry screen. Input the number change each time the “+” side or “−” side corresponding to the preferred language is selected. and select the “OK” key. The DVD top menu Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO): language will be changed to the one specified. When this item is turned on, an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen Display: if the scene can be seen from a different To adjust the image quality of the screen, angle. select the preferred adjustment items. Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO): Audio: DVD menus are automatically configured Select the preferred language for audio. SAA2963 and the contents will be played directly when the “Menu Skip” key is turned on. Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR): Note that some discs may not be played Select the preferred language for subtitles. USB INPUT OPERATION directly even if this item is turned on. Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, DVD- Audio main operation CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO): VR): Open the console lid and connect a USB Select the “CM Skip” key. Choose the Select from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or memory. Then, push the DISC·AUX button setting time from 15, 30 or 60 seconds by “Cinema” modes. repeatedly to switch to the USB memory “ ” “−” selecting the + side or side. Title List (DVD-VR): mode. DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR): Select the preferred title from the list. If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing, pushing the DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto- Play Mode: ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the USB matically adjusts the soundtrack volume Select the preferred play mode. memory. level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers. PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR): Select the “PG” or “PL” mode.

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Audio file operation

PLAY: When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the system off and the USB memory inserted, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and a USB memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the cen- ter display changes to the USB memory mode.

SAA2500 SAA2501 Next/Previous File and Fast Forward/ Models with navigation system Rewind: File selection (models with naviga- When the or button is pushed for tion system) more than 1.5 seconds while a USB When there are both audio and movie files memory is being played, the USB memory in the USB memory, the mode select will play while forwarding or rewinding. screen is displayed. Select the preferred When the button is released, the USB contents to play. memory will return to normal play speed. When there is only one type of file, the When the or button is pushed for audio or movie operation screen is dis- less than 1.5 seconds while the USB played and starts to play. memory is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the If a video file restricts the number of USB memory will be played. playbacks, a pop-up screen will appear to confirm it is ok to play. Answer yes or no as The INFINITI controller can also be used to requested by the display. SAA2611 select tracks when the USB memory is being played. Models without navigation system Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69 Folder selection: . Album Title To change to another folder in the USB . Artist memory, turn the folder selector or choose a folder displayed on the screen using the INFINITI controller.

RANDOM (RDM), REPEAT (RPT): When the RDM·RPT button is pushed while the USB memory is played, the play pattern can be change as follows. To change the play mode, push the RPT button repeatedly and the mode will change as follows. SAA2502 Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat ? All Random ? 1 Folder Random Menu (models with navigation system): ? Normal There are some options available during playback. Select one of the following Text (models without navigation system): options that are displayed on the screen When the “Text” key is selected on the if necessary. Refer to the following infor- screen using the INFINITI controller and mation for each item. then the ENTER button is pushed while a . Movie Playback USB memory is being played, the music information listed below will be displayed Switch to the movie playback mode. on the screen. This item is displayed only when a USB memory contains movie files. . Folder title . Folder List/Track List . File title Displays the folder or track list. The . Song title “Movie Playback” key is also displayed in this list screen, and enables switch-

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ing to the movie playback mode. mode. . Play Mode Operation keys: Select the preferred play mode. To operate the USB memory, select the desired key displayed on the operation screen using the INFINITI controller.

Pause Select the “ ” key to pause the movie file. To resume playing the movie file, select the “ ” key.

Play SAA2503 Select the “ ” key to start playing a Movie file operation (models with movie file, for example, after pausing a movie file. navigation system) Park the vehicle in a safe location for the STOP front seat occupants to operate the USB Select the “ ” key to stop playing a memory while watching the images. movie file. PLAY: Skip (Next chapter) When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s) the system off and the USB memory of the disc forward. The chapters will inserted, the system will turn on. advance the number of times the ENTER If another audio source is playing and a button is pushed. USB memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the cen- ter display changes to the USB memory

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71 Input the number to be searched and Skip (Previous chapter) select the “OK” key. “ ” Select the key to skip the chapter(s) The specified folder/file will be played. of the disc backward. The chapters will go . Display back the number of times the “ ” key is To adjust the image quality of the selected. screen, select the preferred adjustment List: items. Select the “List” key on the movie file . DRC operation screen to display the file list. DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) automatically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers. SAA2504 . Audio Example Select the preferred language for audio. Settings: . Subtitle Select the “Settings” key to adjust the Select the preferred language for sub- following settings. title. . . Audio File Playback Display Mode “ ” “ ” “ ” Switch to the audio playback mode. Select the Normal , Wide , Cinema “ ” This item is displayed only when the or Full mode. USB memory contains the audio files. . Play Mode Select the “Normal” or “1 Track Re- peat” play mode. . 10 Key Search Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the number entry screen.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO Regulatory information Bluetooth trademark: ® (models with navigation system) FCC Regulatory information: Bluetooth is a trademark Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth® owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. . CAUTION: To maintain compliance with and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd. Streaming Audio. If you have a compatible FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only ® Bluetooth device with streaming audio the supplied antenna. Unauthorized (A2DP profile), you can set up the wireless antenna, modification, or attachments ® connection between your Bluetooth de- could damage the transmitter and may vice and the in-vehicle audio system. This violate FCC regulations. connection allows you to listen to the . ® Operation is subject to the following audio from the Bluetooth device using two conditions: your vehicle speakers. It also may allow 1) This device may not cause inter- basic control of the device for playing and ference and skipping audio files using the AVRCP Bluetooth® profile. All Bluetooth® Devices 2) This device must accept any inter- do not have the same level of controls for ference, including interference that AVRCP. Please consult the manual for your may cause undesired operation of Bluetooth® Device for more details. the device Once your Bluetooth® device is connected IC Regulatory information: to the in-vehicle audio system, it will . Operation is subject to the following automatically reconnect whenever the de- two conditions: vice is present in the vehicle and you select 1) This device may not cause inter- Bluetooth® Audio from your audio system. ference, and You do not need to manually reconnect for 2) This device must accept any inter- each usage. ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. . This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interfer- ence-Causing Equipment Regulations. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73 SAA3009 SAA2506 SAA2507

Connecting procedure 2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key. 3. A confirmation screen will be dis- played. Select “No”. 1. Push the SETTING button and select the “ ” “Bluetooth” key. Note: Selecting Yes will only connect the hands free phone portion of a Bluetooth® device.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SAA3005 SAA3006 SAA2510

4. Choose a PIN code to use with the 5. The standby message screen will ap- Audio main operation compatible Bluetooth® audio device pear. Operate the compatible Blue- using the number input screen. The tooth® audio device. For the Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button PIN code will need to be entered into connecting procedure of the audio ® the Bluetooth® audio device after step device, see the Bluetooth® audio in- repeatedly to switch to the Bluetooth 5. Select the “OK” key. structions. audio mode. If the system has been turned off while the Bluetooth® audio device was When the connecting is completed, the ® playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL control screen will return to the Bluetooth knob will start the Bluetooth® audio setup display. device. The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward, rewind, randomize and repeat music may be different between devices. Some or all of these functions may not be supported on each device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75 header of the screen.) following items. DISC·AUX button: . Shuffle When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with RANDOM (RDM), REPEAT (RPT): “ ” “ the system off and the Bluetooth® audio Choose Shuffle OFF , Shuffle All To change the play mode, push the ” “ ” device connected, the system will turn on. Tracks and Shuffle Group . RDM·RPT button repeatedly and the mode If another audio source is playing and the . Repeat changes as follows. Bluetooth® audio device is connected, Choose from “Repeat OFF”, “Repeat 1 push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until Normal ? Shuffle All Tracks ? Shuffle Track”, “Repeat All Tracks” and “Repeat the display changes to the Bluetooth® Group ? Repeat 1 Track ? Repeat All Group”. audio mode. Tracks ? Repeat Group ? Normal Operation keys: Next/Previous Track and Fast For- To operate a Bluetooth® audio device, ward/Rewind: select a key displayed on the operation When the or button is pushed for screen using the INFINITI controller. more than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth® ® audio file is being played, the Bluetooth Play audio device will play while forwarding or Select the “ ” key to start playing when rewinding. When the button is released, pausing. Select this key again to pause the the Bluetooth® audio device will return to audio play. normal play speed. When the or button is pushed for Pause less than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth® Select the “ ” key to pause the Blue- audio file is being played, the next track or ® the beginning of the current track on the tooth audio device. Select this key again Bluetooth® audio device will be played. to resume playing. The INFINITI controller can also be used to Play Mode: ® select tracks when the Bluetooth audio The play mode setting display will appear play mode screen is shown on the display. when the “Menu” key is selected. (“Bluetooth audio” will be indicated on the Choose the preferred play mode from the

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Connected Devices: see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System Registered devices are shown on the list. (models with navigation system)” later in Select a Bluetooth® device from the list, this section. the following options will be available. . Select Select “Select” to connect the selected device to the vehicle. If there is a different device currently connected, the selected device will replace the current device. . Edit Rename the selected Bluetooth® device SAA2511 using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See “How to use touch screen Bluetooth® settings (models with navigation system)” ear- To set up the Bluetooth® device system to lier in this section.) the preferred settings, push the SETTING . Delete button and select the “Bluetooth” key. Delete the selected Bluetooth® device. Bluetooth: Edit Bluetooth Info: If this setting is turned off, the connection Change the name broadcasted by this between the Bluetooth® devices and the system over Bluetooth®. Change the PIN in-vehicle Bluetooth® module will be can- code that is entered when connecting a celed. hands free device to this system. Connect Bluetooth: Replace Connected Phone: Connects to the Bluetooth® device. See Replace the Bluetooth® connection with a “Connecting procedure” earlier in this connected Bluetooth® cellular phone. For section. Up to 5 devices can be registered. details about Hands-Free Phone System,

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77 ® * iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., . First generation iPod Classic® (firmware registered in the U.S. and other version 1.1.2 PC) countries. . Second generation iPod Classic® (firm- ware version 2.0 PC) . ® Compatibility First generation iPod touch (firmware version 2.1) The following models are available: . Second generation iPod touch® (firm- Models with navigation system: ware version 2.1.1) . Fifth generation iPod® (version 1.2.3 or . First generation iPod nano® (firmware later) version 1.3.1) . iPod Classic® (version 1.1.1 or later) . Second generation iPod nano® (firm- . First generation iPod touch® (version ware version 1.1.3) SAA2964 2.0.0 or later) . Third generation iPod nano® (firmware . Second generation iPod touch® (firm- version 1.1 PC) ® iPod PLAYER OPERATION ware version 1.2.3 or later) . Third generation iPhone® (firmware ® version 2.1) Connecting iPod® . First generation iPod nano (firmware version 1.3.1 or later) Make sure that the iPod® version is Open the console lid and connect the . Second generation iPod nano® (firm- updated. iPod® cable to the USB connector. If ware version 1.1.3 or later) compatible, the battery of the iPod® is Audio main operation . Third generation iPod nano® (firmware charged while the connection to the Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON vehicle. version 1.1 or later) ® position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button . Fourth generation iPod nano (firmware ® Depending on the version of the iPod®, the repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode. ® version 1.0.2 or later) display on the iPod shows an INFINITI or If the system has been turned off while the Accessory Attached screen when the con- Models without navigation system: iPod® was playing, pushing the ON·OFF ® nection is completed. When the iPod is . Fifth generation iPod® (firmware ver- button will start the iPod®. ® connected to the vehicle, the iPod music sion 1.3) library can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. 4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . Audiobooks PLAY: . Shuffle Songs When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with The following touch-panel buttons shown the system off and the iPod® connected, on the screen are also available: the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the iPod® is con- . : returns to the previous screen. nected, push the DISC·AUX button repeat- . : plays/pauses the music selected. edly until the center display changes to the iPod® mode. Next/Previous Track and Fast For- ward/Rewind: MUSIC BOX (models with naviga- Interface: tion system) The interface for iPod® operation shown on When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is The Music Box hard drive audio system can the vehicle center display is similar to the ® ® playing, the iPod will play while fast store songs from CDs being played. The iPod interface. Use the INFINITI controller system has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage and the ENTER or BACK button to play the forwarding or rewinding. When the button ® capacity. iPod® with your favorite settings. is released, the iPod will return to the normal play speed. The following CDs can be recorded in the The following items can be chosen from the Music Box hard drive audio system. menu list screen. For further information When the or button is pushed for ® . about each item, see the iPod® Owner’s less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod is CDs that contain uncompressed audio playing, the next track or the beginning of files Manual. ® the current track on the iPod will be . Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio . Now Playing played. (Hybrid CD-DA) specification in Super . Playlists The INFINITI controller can also be used to Audio CDs . Artists select tracks when the iPod® is playing. . Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) . Albums specification in CD-Extras . Songs REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): . First session of multisession disc . Podcasts When the RPT button is pushed while a Extreme temperature conditions [below . Genres track is being played, the play pattern can −48F(−208C) and above 1588F(708C)] . Composers be changed as follows: could affect the performance of the hard drive.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79 . NOTE: Individual tracks can be deleted from the hard drive after the CD is recorded. If the hard drive needs to be replaced due . The order of the tracks may not be to a malfunction, all stored music data will changed while recording. be erased.

SAA2513

Recording CDs 1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. For the details of playing CDs, see “Compact Disc (CD) player operation” earlier in this section. 2. Select the “Start REC” key. NOTE: . The system starts playing and record- ing the 1st track on the CD when the “Start REC” key is selected. . The recording process can be stopped at any time. All tracks that were played before the CD was stopped are stored.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . The number of albums reaches the maximum of 500. . The number of tracks reaches the maximum of 3,000. Automatic recording: If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. (See “Music Box settings” later in this section.) Stopping recording: To stop the recording, select the “Stop ” SAA2514 REC key button by touching the screen or SAA2515 using the INFINITI controller. If the title information of the track being If the CD is ejected, the audio system is Playing recorded songs recorded is stored either in the hard drive turned off or the ignition switch is pushed Select the Music Box audio system by or in the CD, the title is automatically to the OFF position, the recording also using one of the following methods. displayed on the screen. For title acquisi- stops. tion from the hard drive, music recognition . Push the audio source switch on the technology and related data are provided steering wheel repeatedly until the by Gracenote®. center display changes to the Music “ If a track is not recorded successfully due Box mode. (See Steering-wheel- ” to skipping sounds, the mark is mounted controls for audio later in displayed behind the track number. this section.) . Push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly The Music Box hard drive cannot perform until the center display changes to the recording under the following conditions. Music Box mode. . There is not enough space in the hard . Give voice commands. (See “INFINITI drive. Voice Recognition system (models with

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81 navigation system)” later in this sec- Songs” from the Music Library menu. When tion.) playing “All Songs”, the knob will change the track instead of the album. The upper Stopping playback: right corner of the main screen will indicate The system stops playing when: if the TUNE knob is changing by track or 1. another mode (radio, CD, DVD, USB album. memory or iPod) is selected. 2. the audio system is turned off. RANDOM (RDM), REPEAT (RPT): 3. the ignition switch is pushed to the When the RPT·RDM button is pushed while LOCK position. a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: Next/Previous Track and Fast For- (Normal) ? 1 Album Repeat ? 1 Track ward/Rewind: Repeat ? 1 Album Random ? All Random SAA2516 When the or button is pushed for ? (Normal) There are some options available by more than 1.5 seconds while a track is Tag Track: being played, the track will play while fast selecting the “Menu” key on the screen Select “Tag Track” key on the screen when forwarding or rewinding. When the button during playback. Select one of the follow- a track is being played. A menu will show is released, the track will return to the ing options that are displayed on the the 5 available playlists. Select one of the normal play speed. screen if necessary. playlists to add the current song to that When the or button is pushed for playlist. If a playlist is not selectable (text Now Playing: less than 1.5 seconds while a track is is grayed out), it means the song already Displays a track list to choose a preferred being played, the next track or the begin- exists in that playlist. track for playback. ning of the current track will be played. Music Library: The INFINITI controller can also be used to There are some options available during select tracks when a track is being played. playback. Select one of the following Play mode selection: options that are displayed on the screen The TUNE/FOLDER knob will skip from if necessary. album to album unless it is playing “All

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . Artists the tracks by the artist. Select tracks Edit Music Information: Play tracks by an artist whose music is from the list to add to the Playlist. Displays the following information about currently being played. The artists are . Edit Songs Order the Music Box hard drive to edit if sorted in alphabetical order. Reorder the tracks in the Playlist by necessary. . Albums selecting a track and specifying the . Edit Information of Current Song Play tracks in each album. The albums order. Edit the “Track”, “Artist” and “Genre” are sorted in alphabetical order. . Edit Name information of the current track using . All Songs Edit the name of the Playlist using the the keypad displayed on the screen. Play tracks from all recorded tracks. The keypad displayed on the screen. (See (See “How to use touch screen (models tracks are sorted in alphabetical order. “How to use INFINITI controller” earlier with navigation system)” earlier in this . Genres in this section.) section.) . Play tracks by a selected genre. Delete Songs Edit the “Mode” information by select- Delete tracks in the Playlist by selecting ing from the list. My Playlists: from the displayed song list. . Edit Information by Album Displays the Playlist and edits the Playlist Edit the displayed name and of a if necessary. Play Mode: Choose the preferred play mode from the selected album and the track informa- Select the “Edit” key. following items. tion in the album. The following items are available . Update Gracenote from USB Device . Normal . Add Current Songs Update the in-vehicle Gracenote Data- . 1 Album Repeat Add a current track to the Playlist. base using a USB memory. Search the . 1 Track Repeat . Add Songs by Album title from a information acquired on the . 1 Playlist Random Internet. Displays a list of albums in alphabetical . 1 Artist Random order. Selecting an album displays all Visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/music-up- . 1 Album Random of the tracks in the album. Select tracks date/ for details. . from the list to add to the Playlist. 1 All Track Random . Transfer Missing Titles to USB . . Add Songs by Artist 1 All Random Transfer the information of an album Displays a list of artists in alphabetical recorded without titles to a USB mem- order. Selecting an artist displays all of ory. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83 Visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/music-up- Delete Songs from Music Box: date/ for details. Deletes the current song, selected songs or . Update Gracenote from HDD albums by choosing from the list, or all Search the title using the database in songs/albums in the Music Box. the hard disk. Recording Quality: Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132 kbps. The default is set to 105 kbps. CDDB Version (models with navigation system): The version of the built-in Gracenote Database is displayed. SAA2517 Gracenote Music Box settings NOTE: . The information contained in the Grace- To set the Music box hard drive to your note Database is not fully guaranteed. preferred settings, select the “Menu” key . during playback, and the “Music Box The service of the Gracenote Database Settings” key with the INFINITI controller, on the Internet may be stopped without and then push the ENTER button. prior notice for maintenance. Music Box Used/Free Space: Information about “Saved Album”, “Saved Track” and “Remaining Time” is displayed. Automatic Recording: End-User License Agreement When this item is turned to ON, the Music USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP- Box hard drive automatically starts record- TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW. ing when a CD is inserted. Gracenote® MusicID Terms of Use

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems This application or device contains soft- any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the categories for any cause that Gracenote ware from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Ser- deems sufficient. No warranty is made that California (“Gracenote”). The software from vers. Gracenote reserves all rights in the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Ser- Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) en- Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, vers are error-free or that functioning of ables this application to perform disc and/ and the Gracenote Servers, including all Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers or file identification and obtain music- ownership rights. Under no circumstances will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not related information, including name, artist, will Gracenote become liable for any obligated to provide you with new en- track, and title information (“Gracenote payment to you for any information that hanced or additional data types or cate- Data”) from online servers or embedded you provide. gories that Gracenote may provide in the “ databases (collectively, Gracenote Ser- You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce future and is free to discontinue its ” vers ) and to perform other functions. You its rights under this Agreement against you services at any time. may use Gracenote Data only by means of directly in its own name. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES the intended End-User functions of this The Gracenote service uses a unique EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT application or device. You agree that you identifier to track queries for statistical LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote purposes. The purpose of a randomly MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTI- Software, and Gracenote Servers for your assigned numeric identifier is to allow the CULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRIN- own personal non-commercial use only. Gracenote service to count queries without GEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or knowing anything about who you are. For THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY transmit the Gracenote Software or any more information, see the web page for the YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACE- service. WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY NOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES The Gracenote Software and each item of OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EX- OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS PRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. REVENUES. IS.” Gracenote makes no representations You agree that your non-exclusive license or warranties, express or implied, regard- Copyright: to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote ing the accuracy of any Gracenote Data Software, and Gracenote Servers will ter- Music recognition technology and related from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote ® minate if you violate these restrictions. If data are provided by Gracenote . Grace- reserves the right to delete data from the your license terminates, you agree to cease note is the industry standard in music Gracenote Servers or to change data recognition technology and related content

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85 delivery. For more information, please visit cleaner or alcohol intended for indus- www.gracenote.com. trial use. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, . A new disc may be rough on the inner Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. and outer edges. Remove the rough Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000- edges by rubbing the inner and outer 2009 Gracenote. This product and service edges with the side of a pen or pencil may practice one or more of the following as illustrated. U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; USB memory #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, . Never touch the terminal portion of the and other patents issued or pending. Some USB memory. services supplied under license from Open . Do not place heavy objects on the USB Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. memory. SAA0451 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade- . Do not store the USB memory in highly marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo CD/DVD/USB MEMORY CARE AND humid locations. “ . and logotype, and the Powered by Grace- CLEANING Do not expose the USB memory to note” logo are trademarks of Gracenote. direct sunlight. CD/DVD . Do not spill any liquids on the USB . Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never memory. touch the surface of the disc. Do not Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual bend the disc. for the details. . Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. . To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. Do not use a conventional record

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 1. Audio source switch next station. 2. Menu control switch (models with . Pushing the menu control switch will navigation system) or audio tuning show the list of preset stations. switch (models without navigation system) XM Satellite Radio: . 3. Back switch Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the 4. Volume control switch preset channel. STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON- . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 TROLS FOR AUDIO seconds will go to the next or previous category. Menu control switch (models with . Pushing the menu control switch will navigation system) or audio tuning show the XM Menu. JVH0049X switch (models without navigation iPod®: Models with navigation system system) . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 While the display is showing a MAP seconds will increase or decrease the (navigation systems only), STATUS or Audio track number. screen, tilt the switch upward or downward . to select a station, track, CD or folder. For Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 most audio sources, tilting the switch up/ seconds will skip to the next or down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a previous index. . different function than tilting up/down for Pushing the menu control switch will less than 1.5 seconds. show the iPod Menu. AM and FM radio: CD: . . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will increase or decrease the seconds will increase or decrease the preset station. track number. . JVH0050X . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds will increase/decrease the Models without navigation system seconds will seek up or down to the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87 folder number (if playing compressed Music Box (models with navigation sys- Audio source switch audio files). tem): Push the audio source switch to change . Pushing the menu control switch will . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 the mode as follows. show the CD Menu. seconds will increase or decrease the . Models with navigation system track number. DVD (models with navigation system): AM ? FM ? SAT ? CD/DVD ? Music . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 Box ? USB/iPod® ? Bluetooth® Audio seconds will increase/decrease the seconds will increase or decrease the . album (folder) number (if playing com- Models without navigation system track number. ? ? ? ® ? pressed audio files). AM FM CD USB/iPod SAT . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 . Pushing the menu control switch will seconds will increase or decrease the ANTENNA show the Music Box Menu. title number. ® Window antenna . Pushing the menu control switch will Bluetooth Audio (models with navigation The antenna pattern is printed inside the select an item from the DVD display. system): rear window. . When the transparent operation menu . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 appears, the switch will control the seconds will increase or decrease the menu. track number. CAUTION USB: BACK switch (models with . Do not place metalized film near the rear . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 navigation system) window glass or attach any metal parts seconds will increase or decrease the Push this switch to go back to the previous to it. This may cause poor reception or track number. screen or cancel the selection if it is not noise. . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 completed. . seconds will increase/decrease the When cleaning the inside of the rear folder number Volume control switches window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. . Pushing the menu control switch will Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch Lightly wipe along the antenna with a show the USB Menu. to increase or decrease the volume. dampened soft cloth.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ® CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM (models with navigation system)

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in your INFINITI, be sure to observe the CAUTION WARNING following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the elec- . Keep the antenna as far away as . Use a phone after stopping your vehicle tronic control modules and electronic con- possible from the electronic control in a safe location. If you have to use a trol system harness. modules. phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may . Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in be given to vehicle operation. WARNING (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harness. Do not route the anten- . If you find yourself unable to devote full . A cellular telephone should not be used na wire next to any harness. attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road for any purpose while driving so full . Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio to a safe location and stop your vehicle attention may be given to vehicle opera- as recommended by the manufacturer. tion. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use before doing so. . Connect the ground wire from the CB of cellular telephones while driving. radio chassis to the body. . If you must make a call while your . For details, consult an INFINITI retailer. vehicle is in motion, the hands-free CAUTION cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Ex- To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a ercise extreme caution at all times so full phone after starting the engine. attention may be given to vehicle opera- tion. Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth® . If a conversation in a moving vehicle Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an ® requires you to take notes, pull off the owner of a compatible Bluetooth enabled road to a safe location and stop your cellular phone, you can set up the wireless vehicle before doing so. connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can make or receive a telephone call with your cellular phone in your pocket.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89 Once a cellular phone is connected to the www.InfinitiUSA.com/bluetooth for a cellular phone may discharge quicker in-vehicle phone module, no phone con- recommended phone list. than usual. necting procedure is required anymore. . You will not be able to use a hands-free . If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Your phone is automatically connected phone under the following conditions: System seems to be malfunctioning, with the in-vehicle phone module when — Your vehicle is outside of the tele- please visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/blue- the ignition switch is pushed to the ON phone service area. tooth for troubleshooting help. position with the registered cellular phone — Your vehicle is in an area where it is . Some cellular phones or other devices turned on and carried in the vehicle. difficult to receive radio waves; such may cause interference or a buzzing You can register up to 5 different Blue- as in a tunnel, in an underground noise to come from the audio system ® tooth cellular phones in the in-vehicle parking garage, behind a tall build- speakers. Storing the device in a phone module. However, you can talk on ing or in a mountainous area. different location may reduce or elim- only one cellular phone at a time. — Your cellular phone is locked in inate the noise. The INFINITI Voice Recognition system order not to be dialed. . Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s supports the phone commands, so dialing . When the radio wave condition is not Manual regarding the telephone pairing a phone number using your voice is ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it procedure specific to your phone, possible. For more details, see “INFINITI may be difficult to hear the other battery charging, cellular phone anten- Voice Recognition system (models with person’s voice during a call. na, etc. ” . navigation system) later in this section; . Immediately after the ignition switch is The antenna display on the monitor will page 4-114. pushed to the ON position, it may be not coincide with the antenna display Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free impossible to receive a call for a short of some cellular phones. Phone System, refer to the following notes. period of time. . Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible to hear the caller’s voice . Set up the wireless connection between . Do not place the cellular phone in an clearlyaswellastominimizeits a compatible cellular phone and the in- area surrounded by metal or far away echoes. vehicle phone module before using the from the in-vehicle phone module to . Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. prevent tone quality degradation and If reception between callers is unclear, adjusting the incoming or outgoing call . Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular wireless connection disruption. volume may improve the clarity. phones may not be recognized by the . While a cellular phone is connected ® in-vehicle phone module. Please visit through the Bluetooth wireless con- nection, the battery power of the 4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REGULATORY INFORMATION Bluetooth trademark: Bluetooth® is a trademark FCC Regulatory information owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., . CAUTION: To maintain compliance with U.S.A. and licensed to Clarion FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only Co., Ltd. the supplied antenna. Unauthorized VOICE COMMANDS antenna, modification, or attachments You can use voice commands to operate could damage the transmitter and may ® violate FCC regulations. various Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem features using the INFINITI Voice . Operation is subject to the following Recognition system. two conditions: “ 1) this device may not cause interfer- For more details, see INFINITI Voice ence and Recognition system (models with naviga- tion system)” later in this section; page 2) this device must accept any inter- 4-114. ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device IC Regulatory information . Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device JVH0047X must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired CONTROL BUTTONS operation of the device. *1 TALK / PHONE SEND button . This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interfer- ence-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91 pleted, the screen will return to the Phone menu display. PHONE SELECTION Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered to the system. To switch to connect another cellular phone, push the button and select the “Connected Phones” key. The registered cellular phones are shown on the list. If you select a cellular phone that is different from the one currently con- nected, the newly selected phone will be connected to the system. SAA2519 SAA2520 VEHICLE PHONEBOOK CONNECTING PROCEDURE 2. When a PIN code appears on the This vehicle has two phonebooks available screen, operate the compatible Blue- for hands-free use. Depending on the 1. Push the button, and select the tooth® cellular phone to enter the PIN “Connect Phone” key. phone, the system may automatically code. download the entire cell phone’s phone- The connecting procedure of the cellu- book into the “Handset Phonebook”. For lar phone varies according to each the details about downloading a phone- cellular phone. See the cellular phone book, see “Phone setting” later in this Owner’s Manual for the details. You can section. If a phonebook does not auto- also visit matically download, the vehicle phone- www.InfinitiUSA.com/bluetooth or call book may be set for up to 1,000 entries. INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department This phonebook allows the recording of a for instructions on pairing INFINITI name to speak while using voice recogni- recommended cellular phones. tion. When the connection process is com-

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SAA2521 SAA2522 SAA2523

1. Push the button and select the 3. Choose the method for entering the 5. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a “Vehicle Phonebook” key. phonebook entry. For this example, name to speak when using the INFINITI “ ” 2. Select the “Add New” key at the top of select Enter Number by Keypad . Voice Recognition system. the screen. 4. Enter the digits and select the “OK” 6. Select the “Store” key and prepare to key. (See “How to use touch screen speak the name after the tone. ” (models with navigation system) ear- 7. When the voicetag is successfully lier in this section.) saved, select the “OK” key to save the phonebook entry. 8. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will show a screen that is ready to call the number. Press the BACK button to return to the Vehicle Phonebook. There are different methods to input a phone number. Select one of the following

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93 options instead of “Enter Number by Key- pad” in step 3. . Copy from Call History The system will show a list of incoming, outgoing or missed calls that were downloaded from the connected cellu- lar phone (depending on the phone’s compatibility). Select one of these entries to save in the vehicle phone- book. . Copy from the Handset The system will show the connected cellular phone’s phonebook that was SAA2620 SAA2523 downloaded (depending on the phone’s compatibility). Select one of Editing the Vehicle Phonebook The following editing items are available: these entries to save in the vehicle . 1. Push the button and select the Entry # phonebook. “Vehicle Phonebook” key. Changes the displayed number of the selected entry. 2. Select the desired entry from the . displayed list. Name Edit the name of the entry using the 3. Select the “Edit” key. keypad displayed on the screen. 4. Select the desired item to change. . Number Edit the phone number using the key- pad displayed on the screen. . Type Select an icon from the icon list. . Voicetag Confirm and store the voicetag. Voice- 4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems tags allow easy dialing using the INFINITI Voice Recognition system. (See “INFINITI Voice Recognition system (models with navigation system)” later in this section.) To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at step 3.

SAA2524 SAA2621

MAKING A CALL 5. Select the “Call” key to start dialing the number. To make a call, follow this procedure. There are different methods to make a call. 1. Push the button on the steering Select one of the following options instead “ ” wheel. The PHONE screen will appear of “Handset Phonebook” in step 2 above. on the display. . Vehicle Phonebook 2. Select the “Handset Phonebook” key Select an entry stored in the Vehicle’s on the “PHONE” menu. Phonebook. 3. Select the desired entry from the list. . Call History 4. Confirm the correct entry by selecting Select an outgoing, incoming or missed for the correct number from the list. call downloaded from your cell phone (depending on your phone’s compat- ibility).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95 . Dial Number . Hold Call Input the phone number manually Put an incoming call on hold. using the keypad displayed on the . Reject Call “ screen. (See How to use touch screen Reject an incoming call. (models with navigation system)” ear- To finish the call, perform one of the lier in this section.) following procedures listed below. 1. Select the “Hang up” key. 2. Push the button on the steering wheel.

SAA2525

RECEIVING A CALL When you hear a phone ring, the display will change to the incoming call mode. To receive a call, perform one of the following procedures listed below. 1. Select the “Answer” key. 2. Push the button on the steering wheel. There are some options available when receiving a call. Select one of the following displayed on the screen. . Answer Accept an incoming call to talk.

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems as voicemail. . Cancel Mute This will appear after “Mute” is se- lected. Mute will be canceled. . Switch Call* Select “Switch Call” to answer another incoming call. By selecting “Hang up”, you can end a call and can speak to a caller who is on hold again. * This function may not be usable, depending on the model of phone. To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or SAA3587 quieter, push the volume control switch (+ SAA2898 or −) on the steering wheel or turn the DURING A CALL volume control knob on the instrument PHONE SETTING There are some options available during a panel while talking on the phone. This To set up the Bluetooth® Hands-Free call. Select one of the following displayed adjustment is also available in the SETTING Phone System to your preferred settings, on the screen if necessary. mode. push the SETTING button on the instrument “ ” . Hang up panel and select the PHONE key. Finish the call. Edit Vehicle Phonebook . Use Handset To edit the vehicle phonebook, use the Transfer the call to the cellular phone. same procedure as described in “Vehicle . Mute phonebook” earlier in this section. Mute your voice to the person. Delete Phonebook . Keypad The vehicle phonebook entries can be Using the touch tone, send digits to the deleted all at the same time or one by one. connected party for using services such

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97 Download Handset Phonebook . Vehicle Ringtone Download the contacts registered in a When this function is activated, a Bluetooth® cellular phone. Availability of specific ringtone that is different from this function depends on each cellular the cellular phone will sound when phone. The memory downloading proce- receiving a call. dure from the cellular phone also varies Auto Download according to each cellular phone. See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. When this item is activated, the phonebook of a hands-free phone is automatically “ ” When Auto Download is active, the downloaded at the same time that the system will automatically re-download the hands-free phone is connected. entries registered in the phone everytime it is paired with the vehicle, even after you When this item is active, the system will delete the entries from your vehicle’s automatically re-download the entries re- Handset Memory. gistered in the connected phone even if you attempt to delete the entries. Volume The following kinds of phone volume can be set. Pushing the button and selecting the “Volume” key can also operate the same settings. . Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call To increase or decrease the volume, select the “Ringtone”, “Incoming Call” or “Outgoing Call” key and adjust it with the INFINITI controller. . Automatic Hold When this function is activated, an incoming phone call is automatically held. 4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “INFINITI Voice Recognition system (models with navigation system)” later in this section; page 4-114.) 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. System fails to interpret the command 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. The system consistently selects the 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Vehicle phonebook” earlier in this section.) wrong voicetag. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99 BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM (models without navigation system)

Once your cellular phone is paired to the tooth® Hands-Free Phone System. WARNING in-vehicle phone module, no phone con- . Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular necting procedure is required. Your phone phones may not be recognized by the . Use a phone after stopping your vehicle is automatically connected with the in- in-vehicle phone module. in a safe location. If you have to use a vehicle phone module when the ignition . You will not be able to use a hands-free “ ” phone while driving, exercise extreme switch is pushed to the ON position with phone under the following conditions: the registered cellular phone turned on caution at all times so full attention may — Your vehicle is outside of the tele- and carried in the vehicle. be given to vehicle operation. phone service area. . If you find yourself unable to devote full You can register up to 5 different Blue- — Your vehicle is in an area where it is ® attention to vehicle operation while tooth cellular phones in the in-vehicle difficult to receive radio waves; such talking on the phone, pull off the road phone module. However, you can talk on as in a tunnel, in an underground to a safe location and stop your vehicle only one cellular phone at a time. parking garage, behind a tall build- before doing so. When a call is active, the audio system and ing or in a mountainous area. microphone (located in the ceiling in front — Your cellular phone is locked in of the rearview mirror) are used for the order not to be dialed. CAUTION handsfree communications. . When the radio wave condition is not If the audio system is being used at the ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a time, the audio mode will mute and will may be difficult to hear the other phone after starting the engine. stay muted until the active call is ended. person’s voice during a call. The INFINITI Voice Recognition system . Immediately after the ignition switch is Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth® supports the phone commands, so dialing pushed to the “ON” position, it may be Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an a phone number using your voice is impossible to receive a call for a short owner of a Bluetooth® enabled cellular possible. period of time. . phone, you can set up the wireless Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Do not place the cellular phone in an connection between your cellular phone Phone System, refer to the following notes. area surrounded by metal or far away and the in-vehicle phone module. With from the in-vehicle phone module to . Set up the wireless connection between Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can prevent tone quality degradation and a cellular phone and the in-vehicle make or receive a telephone call with your wireless connection disruption. phone module before using the Blue- cellular phone in your pocket. 4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . While a cellular phone is connected . This wireless hands free car kit is based IC Regulatory information ® ® through the Bluetooth wireless con- on Bluetooth technology, . Operation is subject to the following nection, the battery power of the — Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz two conditions: (1) this device may not cellular phone may discharge quicker — Output Power: 4,14dBm E.I.R.P cause interference, and (2) this device than usual. — Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, p/ must accept any interference, including . ® If the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone 4DQPSK interference that may cause undesired System seems to be malfunctioning, — Number of Channel: 79 operation of the device. please contact an INFINITI retailer. — This wireless equipment can’tbe . This Class B digital apparatus meets all . Some cellular phones or other devices used for any services related to requirements of the Canadian Interfer- may cause interference or a buzzing safety because there is the possibi- ence-Causing Equipment Regulations. noise to come from the audio system lity of radio interference. Bluetooth trademark: speakers. Storing the device in a ® different location may reduce or elim- Bluetooth is a trademark REGULATORY INFORMATION owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., inate the noise. FCC Regulatory information U.S.A. and licensed to Visteon . Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Corporation. Manual regarding the telephone pairing . CAUTION: To maintain compliance with procedure specific to your phone, FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only battery charging, cellular phone anten- the supplied antenna. Unauthorized na, etc. antenna, modification, or attachments . The antenna display on the monitor will could damage the transmitter and may not coincide with the antenna display violate FCC regulations. of some cellular phones. . Operation is subject to the following . Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet two conditions: as possible to hear the caller’s voice 1) this device may not cause interfer- clearlyaswellastominimizeits ence and echoes. 2) this device must accept any inter- . If reception between callers is unclear, ference, including interference that adjusting the incoming or outgoing call may cause undesired operation of volume may improve the clarity. the device

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101 VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM following: You can also use the Bluetooth® hands- . Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet free phone system with Voice Recognition as possible. Close the windows to System. eliminate the surrounding noises (traf- INFO fic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from . The available voice commands are only recognizing the voice commands cor- applicable to the relevant language set rectly. in the LANGUAGE setting screen. (See . Wait until a tone sounds before speak- “How to use SETTING button” earlier in ing a command. this section.) . Speak a voice command within 5 . If the vehicle is in motion, some seconds after the beep sound. If no commands may not be available so full voice command is given, the system SAA2969 attention may be given to vehicle will ask you for a number. If no further operation. CONTROL BUTTONS command is given, the session ends. . 1. PHONE SEND button Using system Speak in a natural voice without paus- ing between words. Push the button to initiate a VR Initialization: session or answer an incoming call. When the ignition switch is pushed to the You can also use the button to skip ON position, Voice Recognition System is through system feedback and to enter initialized, which may take up to one commands during a call. minute. When completed, the system is 2. PHONE END button ready to accept voice commands. If the Push the button to cancel a VR switch on the steering wheel is pushed session or end a call. before the initialization completes, the system will not accept any command. Before starting: To get the best performance out of the Voice Recognition System, observe the

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems as long as the screen icon is not in the command recognition mode . 4. The system acknowledges the com- mand and announces the next set of available commands. 5. After the tone sounds, speak the phone number. 6. When you have finished speaking the phone number, the system repeats it back and announces the available commands. 7. After system responds, speak “Dial” SAA2970 SAA2574 and the system dials the spoken numbers. Giving voice command: 2. A list of commands appears on the 1. Push and release the switch screen, and the system announces, Operating tips: “ located on the steering wheel. Please say a command after the beep. . Voice commands cannot be accepted Available commands are: Call, Phone- when the icon is . book, Recent Calls, Connect Phone or . If the command is not recognized, the ” Help . system announces, “Please say again”. 3. After the tone sounds and the icon on Repeat the command in a clear voice. the screen changes from to , . Push the switch or the BACK button speak a command. See the “List of once to return to the previous screen. ” voice commands later in this section . If you want to cancel the command, for the voice command list. Speak push the switch. The message “ ” Call for example. “Voice input is canceled” will be INFO announced. If you want to adjust the Voice commands cannot be recognized volume of the system feedback, push the volume control buttons [+] or [−]on Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103 the steering wheel or use the audio time or do not know the appropriate 1. Push the switch. “ ” system volume knob while the system voice command, speak Help .The 2. The system replies “please say a is making an announcement. system announces the available com- command after the beep. Available mands. How to speak commands: commands are: Call, Phonebook, Re- . When you speak numbers, you can ” The Voice Recognition System requires a cent Calls, Connect Phone or Help . speak both “zero” or “oh” for “0”. certain way to speak voice commands. 3. Give your instructions to the system by Speak normally and clearly in the direction Personal vocabulary (voicetags): saying: “Dial John” for example (“John” of the microphone (located in front of the Voice Recognition System is equipped with must have been previously set as a rearview mirror). Every digit of the number the function called “voicetags”, which can voice tag for John’s phone number) or must be spoken individually and in a be associated with the phone number and “Dial One” if John is classified as one in normal manner. The hands-free mode will name in the phonebook. Using the voice the phonebook. work best when the telephone number is tag will automatically generate a speed If the system cannot understand your spoken in blocks of three to five digits. dial to the registered number. command, repeat it according to the After each spoken block is terminated, the See “Phonebook registration” earlier in recommendations mentioned in “How system will repeat the three to five digits this section. to speak commands” earlier in this and wait for you to speak the next digit or section. block of digits required for the telephone You can call the identified number using “ ” 4. If the given name (voice tag) is correct, number. the following command: Dial followed by the voice tag. the phone system will dial the number See “List of voice commands” later in this registered for “John”. section for the appropriate commands that Dialling a name with a voice tag: INFO can be spoken for the hands-free mode It is possible to call up a name via a voice system. tag instead of a number, provided the To end the voice command phase at any stage of the procedure, push the Example: name and number of your correspondent has been previously stored in the phone- switch once in order to activate the cancel In order to initiate a call, speak “Phone- book. command. book”. Dial via a voice tag, according to the Manual command selection: INFO following procedure. Commands can be selected manually. . If you are controlling the telephone While the commands are displayed on the system by voice command for the first

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems screen, select a command by operating the Tune switch, and then push the button. Once a command is manually selected, the voice command function is cancelled. To return to voice command mode, push the button to cancel the current operation, and then perform the first procedure of voice command.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105 List of voice commands: COMMAND ACTION “Call/Dial”“” Dials the specified . “Call/Dial”“Redial” Dials the last number. “Call”“” Dials the specified . “Phonebook”“” Displays the specified in the phonebook. “Phonebook”“List Names” Displays all the names in the phonebook. “Phonebook”“Transfer Entry” Transfers the phonebook data to the system. “Phonebook”“Delete Entry” Deletes the phonebook registered in the system. “Connect Phone”“Software Version” Displays the software version of the system to be connected. “Connect Phone”“Add Phone” Connects a cellular phone to the system. “Connect Phone”“Select Phone” Selects a registered cellular phone. “Connect Phone”“Delete Phone” Deletes a registered cellular phone. “Connect Phone”“Bluetooth Off” Turns the Bluetooth® connection off. “Connect Phone”“Replace Phone” Changes the registered order of the cellular phones. “Connect Phone”“Delete Phone”“All Phones” Deletes all registered cellular phones. “Connect Phone”“Delete Phone”“List Phones” Selects a registered cellular phone and deletes it.

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SAA2575 SAA2576 SAA2577

PAIRING PROCEDURE 3. Speak: “Add Phone”. The system ac- 4. When asked to enter a PIN code to knowledges the command and asks connect a Bluetooth® cellular phone, Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered. you to initiate connecting from the enter the code “1234”. 1. Push the button on the steering phone handset. The code is always “1234” regardless wheel. The system announces the INFO: of the number of phones paired. available commands. The Add Phone command is not avail- The connecting procedure of a cellular “ ” 2. Speak: Connect Phone . The system able when the vehicle is moving. phone varies according to each cellular acknowledges the command and an- phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s nounces the next set of available Manual for more information. commands.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107 book.

SAA2578 SAA2579

5. The system asks the user to speak a PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION name for the phone. When the cellular phone is connected to “ ” Speak: Yes . The system acknowl- the in-vehicle module, the data stored in edges the command and registers the the cellular phone such as phonebook, cellular phone. outgoing call logs, incoming call logs and If the name is too long or too short, the missed call logs is automatically trans- system tells the user, then prompts the ferred and registered to the system. user for a name again. The availability of this function depends on Also, if more than one phone is connected each cellular phone. The copying procedure and the name sounds too much like a also varies according to each cellular name already used, the system tells the phone. See cellular phone Owner’s Manual user, then prompts the user for name for more information. again. Up to 1,000 phone numbers per registered cellular phone can be stored in the phone-

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems edges the command and makes the call. 5. Once the call has ended, press the button on the steering wheel. RECEIVING A CALL When the ring tone is heard, press the button on the steering wheel. Once the call has ended, press the button on the steering wheel. NOTE: To reject a call when the ring tone is heard, SAA2580 SAA2581 press the button on the steering wheel. MAKING A CALL DURING A CALL To make a call, follow the procedures During a call there are several command below. options available. Press the button on 1. Push the button on the steering the steering wheel to mute the receiving wheel. A tone will sound. voice and enter commands. . “ ”— 2. Speak: “Call”. The system acknowl- (digits) Use the Send command to edges the command and announces enter numbers during a call. For exam- the next set of available commands. ple, if directed to dial an extension by an automated system: 3. Speak the registered person’s name. Speak: “Sending one two three four.” The system acknowledges the com- mand and announces the next set of The system acknowledges the com- available commands. mand and sends the tones associated with the numbers. The system then 4. Speak: “Yes”. The system acknowl- ends the VR session and returns to the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109 call. Once the name and location are con- . “Mute on/off”—Use the Mute com- firmed, the system begins the call. mand to mute the user’s voice so the . Number other party cannot hear it. When prompted by the system, speak Use the mute command again to the number to call. unmute the user’s voice. . Redial . “Transfer Handset”—Use the Transfer Use the Redial command to call the last Handset command to transfer the call number of outgoing calls. The system ® from the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone acknowledges the command, repeats System to a cellular phone when the number and begins dialing. If a privacy is desired. The system an- redial number does not exist, the nounces, “Transfer Handset. The call system announces, “There is no num- ” ” is transferred to the handset only. The SAA2582 ber to redial and ends the VR session. system then ends the VR session. . Callback The Transfer Call command can also be PHONE SETTINGS Use the Callback command to call the issued again to return to a hands-free last number in incoming calls. The call through the vehicle. Call system acknowledges the command, . “Help”—The system announces the . (a name) repeats the number and begins dialing. available commands. If there are entries stored in the Phone If an incoming call number does not exist, the system announces, “There is NOTE: Book, a number associated with a name and location can be dialed. See no number to call back” and ends the If the other party ends the call or the “Phone book registration” in this sec- VR session. cellular phone network connection is lost tion to learn how to store entries. When . Help while the Mute feature is on, the Mute prompted by the system, say the name The system announces the available feature may need to be reset to “off.” of the phone book entry to call. commands. The system acknowledges the name. If there are multiple locations associated with the name, the system asks the user to choose the location. 4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . List Names and number. The system then asks if Use the List Names command to hear the user would like to store another the names and locations registered in location for the same name. If the user the phonebook. When the system does not wish to store another location, acknowledges the command, the sys- the system ends the VR session. tem announces all voicetags registered . Delete Entry in the system. Use the Delete Entry command to Playback of the list can be stopped at delete a specific number or all numbers any time by pressing a button on the in the phonebook. The system an- steering wheel. The system ends the VR nounces the names of the phone session. numbers already stored in the system. . Transfer Entry The system then gives the option to delete a specific number or all num- SAA2583 Use the Transfer Entry command to transfer the phonebook data stored in a bers. Once the user chooses to delete a cellular phone to the system. number or all numbers, the system Phonebook asks the user to confirm. The system acknowledges the com- . (a name) . mand and asks the user to initiate a Help Use the name command to seek the transfer from the phone handset. The The system announces the available name and locations registered in the new contact phone number will be commands. phonebook in alphabetical order. When transferred from the cellular phone via the system acknowledges the alphabet a Bluetooth® communication link. the user spoke, the system announces The transfer procedure varies according all registered names and locations to each cellular phone. See the cellular beginning with that alphabet. phone Owner’s Manual for more infor- Playback of the list can be stopped at mation. The system repeats the number any time by pressing a button on the and prompts the user for the next steering wheel. The system ends the VR command. After entering numbers, session. choose “Store.” The system confirms the name, location

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111 . Callback Use the Callback command to dial the last incoming call. . Help The system announces the available commands.

SAA2584 SAA2585

Recent Calls Connect Phone . Incoming . Add Phone Use the Incoming command to make a Use the Pair Phone command to con- call viewing the list of incoming calls. nect a compatible phone to the Blue- ® . Missed tooth Hands-Free Phone System. Use the Missed command to make a When asked to enter a PIN code to ® call viewing the list of missed calls. connect a Bluetooth cellular phone, “ ” . Outgoing enter the code 1234 . “ ” Use the Outgoing command to make a The code is always 1234 regardless call viewing the list of outgoing calls. of the number of phones connected. Up to 5 phones can be connected. If the . Redial user tries to connect a sixth phone, the Use the Redial command to dial the last system announces that the user must outgoing call. first delete one phone or replace an

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems existing phone. If the user tries to listen to the list again. Once the user and you change the priority level of connect a phone that has already been chooses to delete a phone or all Phone C to Level 1, then: connected to the vehicle system, the phones, the system asks the user to Priority Level 1 = Phone C system announces the name that the confirm. Priority Level 2 = Phone B phone is already using. The connecting NOTE: Priority Level 3 = Phone A procedure will then be cancelled. . ® When the user deletes a phone, the Bluetooth On/Off The Add Phone command is not avail- ® associated phone book for that phone will Use the Bluetooth On/Off command able when the vehicle is moving. ® also be deleted. to turn on/off Bluetooth Hands-Free . Select Phone . Phone System. Use the Select Phone command to Replace Phone . Help select a phone of lesser priority when Use the Replace Phone command to The system announces the available two or more phones connected with change the priority level of the active commands. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System phone. are in the vehicle at the same time. The priority level determines which VOICE ADAPTATION MODE phone is active when more than one The system asks the user to name the The Voice Adaptation mode allows up to paired Bluetooth® phone is in the phone and confirm the selection. two users with different dialects to train vehicle. Once the selection is confirmed, the the system to improve recognition accu- selected phone remains active until the The system states the priority level of racy. By repeating a number of commands, ignition switch is turned OFF or a new the active phone and asks for a new the users can create a voice model of their phone is selected. priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5). own voice that is stored in the system. The . Delete Phone If the new priority level is already being system is capable of storing a different Use the Delete Phone command to used for another phone, the two voice adaptation model for each connected delete a specific phone or all phones phones will swap priority levels. phone. from Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone For example, if the current priority System. The system announces the levels are: Training procedure names of the phones already paired Priority Level 1 = Phone A 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably with the system and their priority level. Priority Level 2 = Phone B quiet outdoor location. The system then gives the option to Priority Level 3 = Phone C 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine delete a specific phone, all phones or running, the parking brake on, and the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113 INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system) INFINITI Voice Recognition allows hands- transmission in Park. 11.The system will announce that voice free operation of the Phone, Navigation, adaptation has been completed and 3. Press the button. Information and Audio systems in one of the system is ready. 4. Speak: “Help”. The system acknowl- two modes, Standard Mode or Alternate edges the command and announces The voice adaptation mode will stop if: Command Mode. . the next set of available commands. The button is pressed in voice In Standard Mode, commands that are 5. Speak: "Voice Adaptation". The system adaptation mode. available are always shown on the display acknowledges the command and dis- . The vehicle is driven during voice and announced by the system. You can plays the voice adaptation mode adaptation mode. complete your desired operation by simply screen. . The ignition switch is turned to the OFF following the prompts given by the system. 6. Voice memory A or memory B is or LOCK position. (See “INFINITI Voice Recognition standard selected automatically. If both memory mode” later in this section for details.) locations are already in use, the system For advanced operation, you can use the will prompt you to overwrite one. Alternate Command Mode. (See “INFINITI Follow the instructions provided by Voice Recognition alternate command the system. mode” later in this section for details.) 7. When preparation is complete and you When this mode is active, an expanded list are ready to begin, press the of commands can be spoken after pushing button. the TALK switch, and the voice command menu prompts are turned off. 8. The voice adaptation mode will be Review the expanded command list, which explained. Follow the instructions pro- is available when this mode is active. Note vided by the system. that in this mode the recognition success 9. When training is finished, the system rate may be affected as the number of will tell you an adequate number of available commands and the ways of phrases have been recorded. speaking each command are increased. 10.The system will ask you to say your To switch one mode to another, see each name. Follow the instructions to regis- mode description later in this section. ter your name. To improve the recognition success rate

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems when Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode. Otherwise, it is recommended that Alternate Command Mode be turned off and Standard Mode be used for the best recognition perfor- mance. For the voice commands for the navigation system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual of your vehicle. INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION STAN- DARD MODE SAA2529 SAA2530 The following section is applicable when the Standard Mode is activated. Activating Standard Mode 4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” The Standard Mode enables you to com- key. plete the desired operation by simply When the Alternate Command Mode is active, perform the following steps to 5. The indicator turns off and the Stan- following the prompts that appear on the dard Mode activates. display and also are announced by the switch to the Standard Mode. system. 1. Push the SETTING button on the instru- Displaying user guide ment panel. If you use the INFINITI Voice Recognition 2. Select the “Others” key. system for the first time or you do not 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key. know how to operate it, you can display the User Guide for confirmation. You can confirm how to use voice com- mands by accessing a simplified User Guide, which contains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115 . Let’s Practice Mode that allows practicing by follow- ing the instructions of the system voice. . Using the Address Book Tutorial for entering a destination by using the Address Book. . Finding a Street Address (if so equipped) Tutorial for entering a destination by street address. . Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by SAA2531 voice command operation. SAA2532 . Help on Speaking 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument Getting Started panel. Displays useful tips of speaking for correct command recognition by the Before using the INFINITI Voice Recognition “ ” 2. Select the Others key. system. system for the first time, you can confirm “ ” 3. Select the Voice Recognition key. Note that the Command List feature is only how to use commands by viewing the 4. Select the “User Guide” key. available when Alternate Command Mode Getting Started section of the User Guide. 5. Select a preferred item. is active. 1. Select the “Getting Started” key. You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say 2. You can confirm the page by scrolling “Help”. the screen using the INFINITI controller. Available items: Tutorials on the operation of the INFINITI Voice Recognition system . Getting Started If you choose “Using the Address Book”, Describes the basics of how to operate “Finding a Street Address” or “Placing the INFINITI Voice Recognition system. Calls”, you can view tutorials on how to

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems perform these operations using INFINITI Voice Recognition.

SAA2534 SAA2533

Let’s Practice Useful tips for correct operation This mode helps learn how to use the You can display useful speaking tips to INFINITI Voice Recognition system. help the system recognize your voice 1. Select the “Let’s Practice” key. commands correctly. “ ” 2. After the message screen appears, Select Help on Speaking to start display. push the TALK switch on the steering wheel. 3. Speak the displayed number after the tone. The evaluation screen will be displayed and the result can be con- firmed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117 USING THE SYSTEM . If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan speed is automatically lowered Initialization so that your commands can be recog- When the ignition switch is pushed to the nized more easily. ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initialized, which can take up to one minute. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If the TALK switch is pushed before the initialization completes, the display will show the message: “System not ready.” or a beep sounds.

Before starting SAA3001 To get the best recognition performance from INFINITI Voice Recognition, observe Giving voice commands the following: 1. Push the TALK switch located on . The interior of the vehicle should be as the steering wheel. quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traf- fic noise and vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice com- mands. . Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. . Speak in a natural conversational voice without pausing between words.

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems completed. control buttons [+] or [−]onthe Selecting the “Help” key can display steering switch or use the audio system the detailed information of the each volume knob while the system is command. making an announcement. Operating tips: How to speak numbers: . Say a command after the tone. INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer- tain way to speak numbers when giving . Commands that are available are al- voice commands. Refer to the following ways shown on the display and spoken examples. through voice menu prompts. Com- mands other than those that are dis- General rule played are not accepted. Please follow Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. the prompts given by the system. (For example, if you would like to say 500, SAA2535 . If the command is not recognized, the “five zero zero” can be used, but “five “ ” ” 2. A list of commands appears on the system announces, Please say again . hundred cannot.) screen, and the system announces, Repeat the command in a clear voice. Examples . Push the BACK button once to return to “Would you like to access Phone, . 1-800-662-6200 the previous screen. Navigation, Information, Audio or —“One eight zero zero six six two six ” . To exit the voice recognition system, Help? . two zero zero” 3. After the tone sounds and the icon on push and hold the TALK switch. The “ ” Improving Recognition of Phone numbers the screen changes from to , message, Voice canceled will be You can improve the recognition of phone speak a command. announced. . To skip the voice guidance function and numbers by saying the phone number in Selecting the “Practice” key will start give the command immediately, press three groups of numbers. For example, the practice mode. See “Let’s Practice” the TALK switch to interrupt the when you try to call 800-662-6200, say earlier in this section. “ ” system. Remember to speak after the eight zero zero first, and the system will 4. Continue to follow the voice menu tone. then ask you for the next three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition, the prompts and speak after the tone . If you want to adjust the volume of the system will then ask for the last four digits. sounds until your desired operation is system feedback, push the volume

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119 Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recogni- tion performance. When speaking a house number, speak the number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is included in the house number, it will not be recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you speak “oh” instead of “zero”. Please speak “zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the letter “o (oh)” Send digits using dial tone: . Press the TALK switch during a phone call. . The menu will be launched and you will be provided with the following gui- dance: "Please say the digits to dial". . After guidance, say the digits of the number you want to send. After this, the digits that have been recognized will be read out. . If you press the ENTER button on the steering wheel or on the INFINITI con- troller, the selected digits will be sent.

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Command List Category Command: Command Action Phone Operates the Phone function Navigation Operates the Navigation function Information Displays the vehicle Information function Audio Operates the Audio function. Help Displays User Guide

. Phone Command:

Command Action Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits. Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook. Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone. Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number. Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number. Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number. International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken. Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

. Navigation Command:

Command Action Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book. Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location. Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location. Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121 Command Action Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

. Information Command:

Command Action Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information. Maintenance Displays maintenance information. Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF. Where am I? Displays your current location. . Audio Command:

Command Action AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played. FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played. XM Turns to the XM Satellite band, selecting the channel last played. Music Box Turns on the “Music Box” hard disk drive audio system. CD Starts to play a CD.

. General Commands

Command Action Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Voice command examples To use the INFINITI Voice Recognition function, speaking one command is some- times sufficient, but at other times it is necessary to speak two or more com- mands. As examples, some additional basic operations by voice commands are described here. For navigation system commands, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man- ual.

SAA3001 SAA2535

Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone 2. The system announces, “Would you like number 800-662-6200: to access Phone, Navigation, Informa- ” 1. Push the TALK switch located on tion, Audio or Help? the steering wheel. 3. Speak “Phone”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123 SAA2536 SAA2537 SAA2538

4. Speak “Dial Number”. 5. Speak “800”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the Selecting the “Manual Controls” key next three digits or dial, or say change ” switches the screen to the keypad to number. input the phone number manually. 7. Speak “662”.

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . You can only say a phone number using the 3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using this command. Please use the “International Call” command for all other formats. . If you say “Change Number” during phone number entry, the system will automatically request that you repeat the number using the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the area code first and then follow the prompts. . Do not add a “1” in front of the area code when speaking phone numbers. SAA2539 SAA2540 . If the system does not recognize your 8. The system announces, “Please say the 10.The system announces, “Dial or Change command, please try repeating the last four digits” or say change number. Number?” command using a natural voice. Speak- ing too slow or too loudly may further 9. Speak “6200”. 11.Speak “Dial”. decrease recognition performance. 12.The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200. Note: . You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10 continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 continuous digits), if the area code is not necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is recommended for improved recognition. (See “How to speak num- bers” earlier in this section.)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125 SAA3001 SAA2535 SAA2536

Example 2 - Placing an international call to 2. The system announces, “Would you like 4. Speak “International Call”. the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333: to access Phone, Navigation, Informa- ” 1. Push the TALK switch located on tion, Audio or Help? the steering wheel. 3. Speak “Phone”.

4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION AL- TERNATE COMMAND MODE The following section is applicable when Alternate Command Mode is activated. When Alternate Command Mode is acti- vated, an expanded list of commands can be used after pressing the TALK switch. In this mode, available commands are not fully shown on the display or prompted. Review the expanded command list when this mode is active. See exam- ples of Alternate Command Mode screens. SAA2541 SAA2542 Please note that in this mode the recogni- tion success rate may be affected as the 5. Speak “011811112223333”. 6. Speak “Dial”. number of available commands and ways 7. System makes a call to 011-81-111- of speaking each command are increased. 222-3333. To improve the recognition success rate, Note: try using the Speaker Adaptation Function “ Any digit input format is available in the available in that mode. (See Speaker International Number input process. adaptation function (for Alternate Com- mand Mode)” later in this section.) Other- wise it is recommended that Alternate Command Mode be turned OFF and Stan- dard Mode be used for the best recognition performance.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127 SAA2529 SAA2543 SAA2544

Activating Alternate Command 4. Highlight the “Alternate Command 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument ” Mode Mode key. panel. 5. The confirmation message is displayed 2. Select the “Others” key. When the Standard Mode is active, perform on the screen. Push the “OK” key to the following steps to switch to the 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key. activate the Alternate Command Mode. Alternate Command Mode. 4. Select the “Command List” key. 1. Push the SETTING button on the instru- Displaying command list ment panel. If you are controlling the system by voice 2. Highlight the “Others” key. commands for the first time or do not know 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key. the appropriate voice command, perform the following procedure for displaying the voice command list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).

4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SAA2545 SAA2546

5. Select a category from the list. 6. Select an item. 7. If necessary, scroll the screen using the INFINITI controller to view the entire list. 8. Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129 Command list Phone Commands: Command Action Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number. Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook. Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone. Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number. Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number. Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number. International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken. Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either Vehicle Phonebook or Handset Phonebook. Call Please say “Call” followed by a stored name. Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Navigation Commands: Command Action Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book. Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location. Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location. Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book. Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination. Previous Start Point Sets a route to a previous starting point. Delete Destination Deletes a destination.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131 Information Commands: Command Action Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information. Maintenance Displays maintenance information. Tire Pressure (if so equipped) Displays tire pressure information Where am I? Displays your current location. Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF. Weather Information Displays weather information. Weather Map Displays a weather map.

4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Audio Commands: Command Action Music Box Turns on the “Music Box” hard disk drive audio system. CD Starts to play a CD. FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played. AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played. XM Turns to the XM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played. USB Turns on the USB memory. Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth® audio player.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133 Help Commands: Command Action Command List Navigation Commands Displays the navigation command list. Phone Commands Displays the phone command list. Audio Commands Displays the audio command list. Information Commands Displays the information command list. Help Commands Displays the help command list. User Guide Displays the User Guide. Speaker Adaptation The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons.

4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems General Commands: Command Action Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135 4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using . Voice Recognition Settings the INFINITI controller and push the Describes the available voice recogni- ENTER button. tion settings. 5. Highlight an item using the INFINITI . Adapting the System to Your Voice controller and push the ENTER button. Tutorial adapting the system to your Available items: voice. . Getting Started USING THE SYSTEM Describe the basics of how to operate the INFINITI Voice Recognition system. Initialization . Let’s Practice When the ignition switch is pushed to the Mode that allows practicing by follow- ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is ing the instructions of the system voice. initialized, which may take up to one SAA2547 minute. When completed, the system is . Using the Address Book ready to accept voice commands. If the ’ Displaying user guide Refer to Navigation System Owner s TALK switch is pushed before the Manual. You can confirm how to use voice com- initialization completes the display will . Finding a Street Address (if so mands by accessing a simplified User show the message: “System not ready.” equipped) Guide, which contains basic instructions or a beep sounds. ’ and tutorials for several voice commands. Refer to Navigation System Owner s Manual. Before starting 1. Push the INFO button on the instrument . Placing Calls To get the best performance from INFINITI panel. Tutorial for making a phone call by Voice Recognition, observe the following. 2. Select the “Others” key using the voice command operation. . Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet INFINITI controller and push the ENTER . Help on Speaking as possible. Close the windows to button. Displays useful tips for how to correctly eliminate the surrounding noises (traf- 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key speak commands in order for them to fic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), using the INFINITI controller and push be properly recognized by the system. which may prevent the system from the ENTER button. recognizing the voice commands cor- rectly. 4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . When the air conditioner is in the AUTO mode, the fan speed decreases auto- matically for easy recognition. . Wait until a tone sounds before speak- ing a command. . Speak in a natural voice without paus- ing between words.

SAA3001 SAA2548

Giving voice command 2. A list of commands appears on the screen, and the system announces, 1. Push and release the TALK switch “Please say a command”. located on the steering wheel. 3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to , speak a command. Operating tips: . Voice commands cannot be accepted when the icon is . . The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting the menu control switch on the steering wheel. . If the command is not recognized, the system announces, “Please say again”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137 Repeat the command in a clear voice. Phone numbers the digits that have been recognized . Push the BACK button once to return to Speak phone numbers according to the will be read out. the previous screen. following examples: . If you press the ENTER button on the . steering wheel or on the INFINITI con- If you want to cancel the command, . 1-800-662-6200 troller, the selected digits will be sent. push and hold the TALK switch for —“Dial one eight zero zero six six two “ 1 second. The message Voice can- six two zero zero.” celed” will be announced. Note 1: For the best voice recognition . To skip the voice guidance function and phone dialing results, say phone numbers give the command immediately, press as single digits. the TALK switch to interrupt the “ system. Remember to speak after the Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as five ” tone. five five six thousands . . If you want to adjust the volume of the Note 3: When speaking a house number, system feedback, push the volume speak the number “0” as “zero”. If the control switch (+ or −) on the steering letter “o (Oh)” is included in the house wheel or use the audio system volume number, it will not be recognized as the knob while the system is making an number “0 (zero)” even if you speak “oh” announcement. instead of “zero”. Please speak “zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the letter How to speak numbers: “o (oh)”. INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer- tain way to speak numbers when giving Send digits using dial tone: voice commands. Refer to the following . Press the TALK switch during a examples. phone call. . General rule The menu will be launched and you will be provided with the following gui- Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. dance: "Please say the digits to dial". (For example, if you would like to say 500, . After guidance, say the digits of the “five zero zero” can be used, but “five number you want to send. After this, hundred” cannot.

4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.

SAA2549 SAA2550

Speaker adaptation function (for 4. Select the user whose voice is memor- Alternate Command Mode) ized by the system. 5. Select the “Start Speaker Adaptation The voice recognition system has a func- Learning” key. tion to learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition performance. The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons. Having the system learn the user’s voice: 1. Push the SETTING button on the instru- ment panel and select the “Others” key. 2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139 “None” to “Stored”.

SAA2551 SAA2552

6. Select a category to be learned by the 8. The system requests that you repeat a system from the following list. command after a tone. . Phone Commands 9. After the tone sounds and the icon on . Navigation Commands the screen changes from to , . Information Commands speak the command that the system . Audio Commands requested. . Help Commands 10.When the system has recognized the The voice commands in the category voice command, the voice of the user is are displayed. learned. 7. Select a voice command and then push Push the switch or BACK button to the ENTER button. return to the previous screen. The voice recognition system starts. If the system has learned the command correctly, the voice command status on the right side of the command turns from

4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Minimize voice feedback (for Alter- nate Command Mode) To minimize the voice feedback from the system, perform the following steps. 1. Push the SETTING button on the instru- ment panel. 2. Select the “Others” key. 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key. 4. Select the “Minimize Voice Feedback” key. 5. The setting is turned to ON and the SAA2553 voice guidance will now be reduced when using the Voice Recognition Speaker Adaptation function settings: system. Edit User Name Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen. Delete Voice Data Resets the user’s voice that the voice recognition system has learned. Continuous Learning When this item is turned to ON, you can have the system learn the voice commands in succession, without selecting com- mands one by one.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-141 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the 1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section. system fails to interpret the command correctly. 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level. 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on. NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized. 4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place. The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone the phonebook. System (models with navigation system)” earlier in this section; page 4-89.) 2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

4-142 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving...... 5-3 Snow mode ...... 5-20 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)...... 5-3 Eco mode ...... 5-20 Three-way catalyst...... 5-3 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 5-4 Departure Prevention (LDP) system (if Avoiding collision and rollover...... 5-6 so equipped)...... 5-22 Off-road recovery...... 5-7 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system...... 5-23 Rapid air pressure loss ...... 5-7 Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system...... 5-26 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...... 5-8 Lane camera unit maintenance ...... 5-31 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/Blind Spot Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving TM safety precautions...... 5-8 Intervention (BSI) system (if so equipped)...... 5-31 Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-9 BSW system operation...... 5-33 Operating range for engine start function...... 5-10 BSI system operation...... 5-36 Push-button ignition switch operation ...... 5-10 BSW/BSI driving situations...... 5-39 Steering lock (if so equipped)...... 5-11 BSW/BSI malfunction...... 5-44 Push-button ignition switch positions...... 5-11 System maintenance...... 5-44 Emergency engine shut off ...... 5-12 Cruise control...... 5-45 Intelligent Key battery discharge ...... 5-12 Precautions on cruise control...... 5-45 Before starting the engine ...... 5-13 Cruise control operations...... 5-45 Starting the engine...... 5-13 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (if Driving the vehicle...... 5-14 so equipped)...... 5-47 Automatic transmission...... 5-14 Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ...... 5-48 Parking brake...... 5-18 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode...... 5-48 INFINITI drive mode selector...... 5-19 Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distance Standard mode ...... 5-19 control mode ...... 5-49 Sport mode ...... 5-19 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Brake assist...... 5-94 mode operation...... 5-50 Brake assist...... 5-94 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Preview function (Intelligent Cruise Control control mode...... 5-65 system equipped models)...... 5-94 Preview function (for Intelligent Cruise Control Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)...... 5-96 system equipped models) ...... 5-69 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ...... 5-98 Distance Control Assist (DCA) system (if Active trace control (if so equipped)...... 5-98 so equipped) ...... 5-69 Rise-up and build-up ...... 5-99 Precautions on Distance Control Brake force distribution ...... 5-99 Assist system...... 5-70 Hill Start Assist system...... 5-100 Distance Control Assist operation...... 5-71 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system (if Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system (if so equipped)...... 5-100 so equipped) ...... 5-82 Cold weather driving ...... 5-101 Precautions on FCW system...... 5-83 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-101 Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system (if so equipped) ...... 5-86 Antifreeze ...... 5-101 Precautions on IBA system ...... 5-87 Battery...... 5-101 Break-in schedule...... 5-90 Draining of coolant water...... 5-101 Increasing fuel economy...... 5-90 Tire equipment ...... 5-101 Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if Special winter equipment ...... 5-102 so equipped) ...... 5-90 Driving on snow or ice...... 5-102 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-92 Engine block heater (if so equipped)...... 5-102 Power steering...... 5-93 Active noise control...... 5-103 Brake system...... 5-93 Braking precautions ...... 5-93 Parking brake break-in ...... 5-93 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) . If electrical wiring or other cable con- WARNING nections must pass to a trailer through WARNING the seal on the trunk lid or the body, . Do not leave children or adults who follow the manufacturer’s recommenda- would normally require the support of . Do not breathe exhaust gases; they tion to prevent carbon monoxide entry others alone in your vehicle. Pets should contain colorless and odorless carbon into the vehicle. not be left alone either. They could monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- . The exhaust system and body should be accidentally injure themselves or others ous. It can cause unconsciousness or inspected by a qualified mechanic when- through inadvertent operation of the death. ever: vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, — temperatures in a closed vehicle could . If you suspect that exhaust fumes are The vehicle is raised for service. quickly become high enough to cause entering the vehicle, drive with all — You suspect that exhaust fumes are severe or possibly fatal injuries to windows fully open, and have the entering into the passenger com- people or animals. vehicle inspected immediately. partment. . Do not run the engine in closed spaces . Closely supervise children when they are — You notice a change in the sound of such as a garage. around cars to prevent them from play- the exhaust system. ing and becoming locked in the trunk . Do not park the vehicle with the engine — You have had an accident involving where they could be seriously injured. running for any extended length of time. damage to the exhaust system, Keep the car locked, with the rear . Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, underbody, or rear of the vehicle. seatback and trunk lid securely latched otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn ’ when not in use, and prevent children s into the passenger compartment. If you access to car keys. must drive with the trunk lid open, THREE-WAY CATALYST follow these precautions: The three-way catalyst is an emission 1) Open all the windows. control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way 2) Set the air recirculation to off catalyst are burned at high temperatures to and the fan control to high to help reduce pollutants. circulate the air.

Starting and driving 5-3 . Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel stop and check your tires as soon as WARNING level. Running out of fuel could cause possible, and inflate them to the proper the engine to misfire, damaging the pressure. Driving on a significantly under- . The exhaust gas and the exhaust system three-way catalyst. inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and are very hot. Keep people, animals or can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also . Do not race the engine while warming it flammable materials away from the reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, up. exhaust system components. and may affect the vehicle’s handling and . Do not push or tow your vehicle to start . Do not stop or park the vehicle over stopping ability. the engine. flammable materials such as dry grass, Please note that the TPMS is not a waste paper or rags. They may ignite and substitute for proper tire maintenance, cause a fire. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- anditisthedriver’s responsibility to TEM (TPMS) maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level Each tire, including the spare (if provided), to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire should be checked monthly when cold and CAUTION pressure telltale. inflated to the inflation pressure recom- . Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a from leaded gasoline seriously reduce vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate the three-way catalyst’s ability to help label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different when the system is not operating properly. reduce exhaust pollutants. size than the size indicated on the vehicle The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- placard or tire inflation pressure label, you bined with the low tire pressure telltale. . Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions should determine the proper tire inflation When the system detects a malfunction, in the ignition, fuel injection, or elec- pressure for those tires.) the telltale will flash for approximately one trical systems can cause overrich fuel minute and then remain continuously As an added safety feature, your vehicle flow into the three-way catalyst, causing illuminated. This sequence will continue has been equipped with a Tire Pressure it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of as the malfunction exists. When the mal- a low tire pressure telltale when one or performance or other unusual operating function indicator is illuminated, the sys- more of your tires is significantly under- conditions are detected. Have the vehicle tem may not be able to detect or signal low inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire inspected promptly by an INFINITI retai- tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- ler. pressure telltale illuminates, you should 5-4 Starting and driving tions may occur for a variety of reasons, . The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning “TIRE PRESSURE information” in the “4. including the installation of replacement or appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal Monitor, climate, audio, phone and alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that display when the low tire pressure voice recognition systems” section. prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- warning light is illuminated and low For additional information, see “Low tire erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tire pressure is detected. The CHECK pressure warning light” in the “2. Instru- telltale after replacing one or more tires or TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when ments and controls” section and “Tire wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the the low tire pressure warning light Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ” in replacement or alternate tires and wheels turns off. the “6. In case of emergency” section. allow the TPMS to continue to function The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning properly. does not appear if the tire pressure WARNING Additional information warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. . . If the low tire pressure warning light The TPMS does not monitor the tire . Tire pressure rises and falls depending illuminates or LOW PRESSURE informa- pressure of the spare tire. on the heat caused by the vehicle’s tion is displayed on the monitor screen . The TPMS will activate only when the operation and the outside temperature. while driving, avoid sudden steering vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 Low outside temperature can lower the maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may temperature of the air inside the tire vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe notdetectasuddendropintire which can cause a lower tire inflation location and stop the vehicle as soon as pressure (for example a flat tire while pressure. This may cause the low tire possible. Driving with under-inflated driving). pressure warning light to illuminate. If tires may permanently damage the tires . The low tire pressure warning light does the warning light illuminates in low and increase the likelihood of tire fail- not automatically turn off when the tire ambient temperature, check the tire ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur pressure is adjusted. After the tire is pressure for all four tires. and may lead to an accident and could inflated to the recommended pressure, . You can also check the pressure of all the vehicle must be driven at speeds result in serious personal injury. Check tires (except the spare tire) on the the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the display screen. The order of the tire TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure the tire pressure to the recommended pressure figures displayed on the COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge screen does not correspond with the to check the tire pressure. and Loading Information label to turn actual order of the tire position. See the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If

Starting and driving 5-5 the light still illuminates while driving chains or the wheels are buried in snow. ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire . Do not place metalized film or any metal may be flat. If you have a flat tire, parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. NOTE: replace it with a spare tire as soon as This may cause poor reception of the Changes or modifications not expressly possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “6. In signals from the tire pressure sensors, approved by the party responsible for case of emergency” section for changing and the TPMS will not function properly. compliance could void the user’s authority a flat tire.) to operate the equipment. . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel Some devices and transmitters may tem- For Canada: is replaced, the TPMS will not function porarily interfere with the operation of the and the low tire pressure warning light TPMS and cause the low tire pressure This device complies with RSS-210 of will flash for approximately 1 minute. warning light to illuminate. Some exam- Industry Canada. Operation is subject to The light will remain on after 1 minute. ples are: the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as . Facilities or electric devices using simi- (2) this device must accept any interfer- possible for tire replacement and/or lar radio frequencies are near the ence, including interference that may system resetting. vehicle. cause undesired operation of the device. . Replacing tires with those not originally . If a transmitter set to similar frequen- specified by INFINITI could affect the cies is being used in or near the AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL- proper operation of the TPMS. vehicle. OVER . Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol . If a computer (or similar equipment) or tire sealant into the tires, as this may a DC/AC converter is being used in or cause a malfunction of the tire pressure near the vehicle. WARNING sensors. FCC Notice: Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and For USA: prudent manner may result in loss of control This device complies with Part 15 of the or an accident. CAUTION FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device Be alert and drive defensively at all times. . The TPMS may not function properly may not cause harmful interference, and Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces- when the wheels are equipped with tire (2) this device must accept any interfer- sive speed, high speed cornering, or

5-6 Starting and driving sudden steering maneuvers, because OFF-ROAD RECOVERY driving lane. . these driving practices could cause you to If driving the right side or left side wheels If you decide that it is not safe to lose control of your vehicle. As with any may unintentionally leave the road surface. return the vehicle to the road surface vehicle, a loss of control could result in a Maintain control of the vehicle by following based on vehicle, road or traffic collision with other vehicles or objects, or the procedure below. Please note that this conditions, gradually slow the vehi- cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if procedure is only a general guide. The cle to a stop in a safe place off the the loss of control causes the vehicle to vehicle must be driven as appropriate road. slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, based on the conditions of the vehicle, RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS and avoid driving when tired. Never drive road and traffic. when under the influence of alcohol or Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can drugs (including prescription or over-the- 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged counter drugs which may cause drowsi- 2. Do not apply the brakes. due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air ness). Always wear your seat belt as 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering pressure loss can also be caused by outlined in the “Seat belts” in the “1. wheel with both hands and try to hold a driving on under-inflated tires. — Safety Seats, seat belts and supple- straight course. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the mental restraint system” section of this 4. When appropriate, slowly release the handling and stability of the vehicle, manual, and also instruct your passengers accelerator pedal to gradually slow the especially at highway speeds. to do so. vehicle. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the maintaining the correct air pressure and collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, vehicle to follow the road while the visually inspect the tires for wear and an unbelted or improperly belted person is vehicle speed is reduced. Do not damage. See “Wheels and tires” in the “8. significantly more likely to be injured or attempt to drive the vehicle back onto Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of killed than a person properly wearing a the road surface until vehicle speed is this manual. seat belt. reduced. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn “blows-out” while driving maintain control the steering wheel until both tires of the vehicle by following the procedure return to the road surface. When all below. Please note that this procedure is tires are on the road surface, steer the only a general guide. The vehicle must be vehicle to stay in the appropriate driven as appropriate based on the condi-

Starting and driving 5-7 tions of the vehicle, road and traffic. 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu- local laws vary on what is considered to ally stop the vehicle. be legally intoxicated, the fact is that WARNING 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers alcohol affects all people differently and and either contact a roadside emer- most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. The following actions can increase the gency service to change the tire or see “ ” “ ’ chance of losing control of the vehicle if Changing a flat tire in the 6. In case Remember, drinking and driving don t mix! ” ’ there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. of emergency section of this Owner s And that is true for drugs, too (over-the- Losing control of the vehicle may cause a Manual. counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). ’ collision and result in personal injury. Don t drive if your ability to operate your DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or . The vehicle generally moves or pulls in DRIVING some other physical condition. the direction of the flat tire. INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL DRIVE . Do not rapidly apply the brakes. WARNING . (AWD) DRIVING SAFETY PRECAU- Do not rapidly release the accelerator TIONS pedal. Never drive under the influence of alcohol or . Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and im- WARNING 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. pairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being . 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering Do not drive beyond the performance involved in an accident injuring yourself and capability of the tires, even with Intelli- wheel with both hands and try to hold a others. Additionally, if you are injured in an straight course. gent AWD engaged. Accelerating quickly, accident, alcohol can increase the severity sharp steering maneuvers or sudden 3. When appropriate, slowly release the of the injury. braking may cause loss of control. accelerator pedal to gradually slow the . Always use tires of the same type, size, vehicle. INFINITI is committed to safe driving. brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe However, you must choose not to drive radial), and tread pattern on all four location off the road and away from under the influence of alcohol. Every year wheels. Install tire chains on the rear traffic if possible. thousands of people are injured or killed in wheels when driving on slippery roads alcohol-related accidents. Although the and drive carefully. 5-8 Starting and driving PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

. This vehicle is not designed for offroad excessively. (rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy WARNING or muddy roads that tires may get stuck in. Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an . For AWD equipped vehicles, do not emergency. (The engine will stop when the attempt to raise two wheels off the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive ground and shift the transmission to times or the ignition switch is pushed and any D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position with held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine the engine running. Doing so may result stops while the vehicle is being driven, this in drivetrain damage or unexpected could lead to a crash and serious injury. vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal Before operating the push-button ignition injury. switch, be sure to move the selector lever . Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped to the P (Park) position. vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer, (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unex- pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. . When a wheel is off the ground due to an unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel Starting and driving 5-9 Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine. . The trunk area is not included in the operating range but the Intelligent Key may function. . If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, inside the glove box or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function. . If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function. SSD0659 SSD1021

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH START FUNCTION OPERATION The Intelligent Key can only be used for When the ignition switch is pushed without starting the engine when the Intelligent depressing the brake pedal, the ignition Key is within the specified operating range. switch position will change as follows: When the Intelligent Key battery is almost . Push center once to change to ACC. discharged or strong radio waves are . Push center two times to change to ON. present near the operating location, the . Push center three times to change to ’ Intelligent Key system s operating range OFF. (No position illuminates.) becomes narrower and may not function . Push center four times to return to ACC. properly. . Open or close any door to return to If the Intelligent Key is within the operating LOCK during the OFF position. range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent

5-10 Starting and driving If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, STEERING LOCK (if so equipped) ACC (Accessories) the push-button ignition switch cannot be In order for the steering wheel to be This position activates electrical acces- turned from the LOCK position. locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a sories such as the radio, when the engine Some indicators and warnings for opera- right or left turn from the straight up is not running. tion are displayed on the dot matrix liquid position. ON (Normal operating position) crystal display between the speedometer To lock the steering wheel, push the “ and tachometer. (See Dot matrix liquid ignition switch to the OFF position. To This position turns on the ignition system ” “ crystal display in the 2. Instruments and unlock the steering wheel, push the and electrical accessories. controls” section.) ignition switch. If the steering lock release OFF The ignition lock is designed so that the malfunction indicator appears on the dot The engine can be turned off in this ignition switch position cannot be switched matrix liquid crystal display, push the position. to LOCK until the selector lever is moved to push-button ignition switch again while the P (Park) position. lightly turning the steering wheel right The ignition lock is designed so that the When the ignition switch cannot be pushed and left. (See “Dot matrix liquid crystal ignition switch cannot be switched to the toward the LOCK position, proceed as display” in the “2. Instruments and con- LOCK position until the selector lever is follows: trols” section.) moved to the P (Park) position. 1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH position. POSITIONS CAUTION 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. The ignition switch position LOCK (Normal parking position) Do not leave the vehicle with the push- indicator will not illuminate. The ignition switch can only be locked in button ignition switch in ACC or ON posi- tions when the engine is not running for an 3. Open the door. The ignition switch will this position. extended period. This can discharge the change to the LOCK position. The ignition switch will be unlocked when battery. The selector lever can be moved from the P it is pushed to the ACC position while (Park) position if the ignition switch is in carrying the Intelligent Key. the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.

Starting and driving 5-11 EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF 4. Push the ignition switch while depres- To shut off the engine in an emergency sing the brake pedal within 10 seconds situation while driving perform the follow- after the chime sounds. The engine will ing procedure: start. . Rapidly push the push-button ignition After step 3 is performed, when the switch 3 consecutive times, or ignition switch is pushed without depres- sing the brake pedal, the ignition switch . Push and hold the push-button ignition position will change to ACC. switch for more than 2 seconds. NOTE: . When the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position or the engine is started by the above procedures, the SSD0860 Intelligent Key battery discharge indi- cator appears on the dot matrix liquid INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS- crystal display even if the Intelligent CHARGE Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent If the battery of the Intelligent Key is Key battery discharge indicator, touch discharged, or environmental conditions the ignition switch with the Intelligent interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, Key again. start the engine according to the following . procedure: If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery 1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) as soon as possible. (See “Intelligent position. Key battery replacement” in the “8. 2. Firmly apply the foot brake. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- 3. Touch the ignition switch with the tion.) Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

5-12 Starting and driving BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake. . Make sure the area around the vehicle the ignition switch to OFF. After is clear. 2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) cranking the engine, release the . Check fluid levels such as engine oil, or N (Neutral) position. (P is recom- accelerator pedal. Crank the engine coolant, brake fluid and window mended.) with your foot off the accelerator washer fluid as frequently as possible, The starter is designed not to operate pedal by depressing the brake pedal or at least whenever you refuel. unless the selector lever is in either of and pushing the push-button igni- . Check that all windows and lights are the above positions. tion switch to start the engine. If the clean. 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON engine starts, but fails to run, repeat . Visually inspect tires for their appear- position. Depress the brake pedal and the above procedure. ance and condition. Also check tires for push the ignition switch to start the proper inflation. engine. CAUTION . Lock all doors. To start the engine immediately, push . Position seat and adjust head re- and release the ignition switch while Do not operate the starter for more than 15 straints. depressing the brake pedal with the seconds at a time. If the engine does not . Adjust inside and outside mirrors. ignition switch in any position. start, push the ignition switch to OFF and . Fasten seat belts and ask all passen- . If the engine is very hard to start in wait 10 seconds before cranking again, gers to do likewise. extremely cold weather or when otherwise the starter could be damaged. . Check the operation of warning lights restarting, depress the accelerator when the ignition switch is pushed to pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to 4. Warm-up the ON position. (See “Warning/indica- the floor) and while holding, crank Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 tor lights and audible reminders” in the the engine. Release the accelerator seconds after starting. Do not race the “2. Instruments and controls” section.) pedal when the engine starts. engine while warming it up. Drive at . If the engine is very hard to start moderate speed for a short distance because it is flooded, depress the first, especially in cold weather. In cold accelerator pedal all the way to the weather, keep the engine running for a floor and hold it. Push the ignition minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before switch to the ON position to start shutting it off. Starting and stopping cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 the engine over a short period of time seconds, stop cranking by pushing may make the vehicle more difficult to Starting and driving 5-13 DRIVING THE VEHICLE

start. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and push the selector lever button to When racing the engine up to 4,000 The automatic transmission in your vehicle shift into a driving gear. rpm (VK56VD engine) or 4,500 rpm is electronically controlled by a transmis- (VQ37VHR engine) or more under no sion control module to produce maximum 2. Release the parking brake and foot load condition, the engine will enter the efficiency and smooth operation. brake, then gradually start the vehicle fuel cut mode. in motion. Shown on the following pages are the 5. To stop the engine, shift the selector recommended operating procedures for lever to the P (Park) position and push this transmission. Follow these procedures WARNING the ignition switch to the OFF position. for maximum vehicle performance and In preparation for the next engine start, driving enjoyment. . Do not depress the accelerator pedal the engine may have a slightly delayed Starting the vehicle while shifting from P (Park) or N shutoff after pushing the ignition (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or switch to the OFF position, depending After starting the engine, fully depress the manual shift mode. Always depress the on the driving conditions (VK56VD foot brake pedal and push the selector brake pedal until shifting is completed. engine models). lever button before shifting the selector Failure to do so could cause you to lose lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D control and have an accident. (Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Be . Cold engine idle speed is high, so use sure the vehicle is fully stopped before caution when shifting into a forward or attempting to shift the selector lever. reverse gear before the engine has This automatic transmission model is warmed up. designed so that the foot brake pedal . Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) must be depressed before shifting from P while vehicle is moving forward. Never (Park) to any drive position while the shift to P (Park) or D (Drive) while vehicle ignition switch position is ON. is moving rearward. Failure to do so The selector lever cannot be moved out of could cause you to lose control and have the P (Park) position and into any of the an accident. other gear positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. 5-14 Starting and driving CAUTION WARNING

. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill Apply the parking brake if the selector lever grade, do not hold the vehicle by is in any position while the engine is not depressing the accelerator pedal. The running. Failure to do so could cause the foot brake should be used for this vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away purpose. and result in serious personal injury or . Do not downshift abruptly on slippery property damage. roads. This may cause a loss of control. . Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. CAUTION Doing so can cause a loss of engine SSD0973 braking which may result in a collision, Selector lever Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped serious personal injury or death. In To move the selector lever, and the transmission is in the P (Park) addition, coasting with the transmission position. in the N (Neutral) position may cause : Push the button while depressing the brake pedal, serious damage to the transmission. : Push the button, P (Park) position: : Just move the selector lever. Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Shifting Make sure the vehicle is completely After starting the engine, fully depress the stopped. The brake pedal must be de- brake pedal and shift the selector lever pressed and the selector lever button from P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D pushed in to move the selector lever from (Drive) or Manual shift mode position. the N (Neutral) position or any drive Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R position to the P (Park) position. Apply (Reverse). All other positions can be the parking brake. When parking on a hill, selected without pushing the button. apply the parking brake first, then move

Starting and driving 5-15 the selector lever to the P (Park) position. side paddle shifter (−) *B (if so equipped). The transmission shifts to the lower range. CAUTION When canceling the manual shift mode, return the selector lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to the Use this position only when the vehicle is normal driving mode. completely stopped. When you pull the paddle shifter while in the D (Drive) position, the transmission will R (Reverse): shift to the upper or lower range tempora- Use this position to back up. Always be rily. The transmission will automatically sure the vehicle is completely stopped return to the D (Drive) position after a short before selecting the R (Reverse) position. period of time. If you want to return to the The brake pedal must be depressed and SSD1099 D (Drive) position manually, pull and hold the selector lever button pushed in to the paddle shifter for about 1.5 seconds. move the selector lever from the P (Park) Paddle shifters (if so equipped) In the manual shift mode, the shift range is position, the N (Neutral) position or any Manual shift mode drive position to the R (Reverse) position. displayed on the position indicator in the When the selector lever is in the manual meter. N (Neutral): shift gate, the transmission is ready for the Shift ranges up or down one by one as Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be follows: gaged. The engine can be started in this selected manually by moving the selector ? ? ? ? ? ? lever up or down, or pulling the right-side M M M M M M M7 position. You may shift to the N (Neutral) 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / position and restart a stalled engine while or left-side paddle shifter (if so equipped). M the vehicle is moving. When shifting up, move the selector lever 7 (7th): D (Drive): to the + (up) side or pull the right-side Use these positions for all normal forward paddle shifter (+) *A (if so equipped). The driving at highway speeds. Use this position for all normal forward transmission shifts to the higher range. M M driving. 6 (6th) and 5 (5th): When shifting down, move the selector Use this position when driving up long − lever to the (down) side or pull the left- slopes, or for engine braking when driving

5-16 Starting and driving down long slopes. gear before the vehicle comes to a and repair if necessary. M M M stop. When accelerating again, it is 4 (4th), 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd): necessary to shift up to the desired Use these positions for hill climbing or range. engine braking on downhill grades. — M1 (1st): Accelerator downshift In D (Drive) position — Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep For passing or hill climbing, fully depress snow, or for maximum engine braking on the accelerator pedal to the floor. This steep downhill grades. shifts the transmission down into the lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed. . Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower Fail-safe than 7th gear. This reduces fuel econ- When the fail-safe operation occurs, note omy. that the transmission will be locked in any . Moving the selector lever rapidly to the of the forward gears according to the same side twice will shift the ranges in condition. succession. If the vehicle is driven under extreme . In the manual shift mode, the transmis- conditions, such as excessive wheel spin- sion may not shift to the selected gear. ning and subsequent hard braking, the This helps maintain driving perfor- fail-safe system may be activated. This will mance and reduces the chance of occur even if all electrical circuits are vehicle damage or loss of control. functioning properly. In this case, push When this situation occurs, the Auto- the ignition switch to the OFF position and matic Transmission (AT) position indi- wait for 3 seconds. Then push the ignition cator light (on the dot matrix liquid switch back to the ON position. The vehicle crystal display) will blink and the should return to its normal operating chime will sound. condition. If it does not return to its . In the manual shift mode, the transmis- normal operating condition, have an sion automatically shifts down to 1st INFINITI retailer check the transmission Starting and driving 5-17 PARKING BRAKE

4. Push down the shift lock *B as illustrated. WARNING 5. Push the selector lever button *C and . move the selector lever to N (Neutral) Be sure the parking brake is fully position *D while holding down the released before driving. Failure to do so shift lock. can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. Push the ignition switch to the ON position . to unlock the steering wheel (if so Do not release the parking brake from equipped). Now the vehicle may be moved outside the vehicle. to the desired location. . Do not use the gear shift in place of the For models with a steering wheel lock parking brake. When parking, be sure mechanism: If the battery is discharged the parking brake is fully engaged. SSD0974 completely, the steering wheel cannot be . Do not leave children unattended in a unlocked. Do not move the vehicle with the vehicle. They could release the parking Shift lock release steering wheel locked. brake and cause an accident. If the battery charge is low or discharged, If the lever cannot be moved out of P the selector lever may not be moved from (Park), have an INFINITI retailer check the the P (Park) position even with the brake automatic transmission system as soon as pedal depressed and the selector lever possible. button pushed. To move the selector lever, perform the following procedure: 1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Remove the shift lock cover *A using a suitable tool.

5-18 Starting and driving INFINITI DRIVE MODE SELECTOR

STANDARD MODE Recommended for normal driving. Turn the drivemodeselectswitchtothe position. “STANDARD” appears in the vehicle information display for 2 seconds. SPORT MODE Adjusts the engine and transmission points to enhance performance. If the vehicle is equipped with 4-Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system, the SPORT mode adjusts this system’s settings to provide faster steering ratios. If the vehicle is SPA2331 SSD1024 equipped with the active trace control Drive mode select switch system, the amount of brake control To apply: Fully depress the parking brake Four driving modes can be selected by provided by active trace control is reduced. pedal *1 . using the drive mode selector switch, (See “4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system” To release: STANDARD, SPORT, ECO and SNOW. later in this section or “Vehicle Dynamic 1. Firmly apply the foot brake *2 . NOTE: Control (VDC) system” later in this section.) 2. Depress the parking brake pedal *1 . When the drive mode select switch Turn the drive mode select switch to the and the parking brake will be released. selects a mode, the mode may not SPORT position. “SPORT” appears in the 3. Before driving, be sure the brake switch quickly. This is not a malfunc- vehicle information display for 2 seconds. tion. warning light goes out. NOTE: . Select the STANDARD mode for normal driving. In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be reduced.

Starting and driving 5-19 SNOW MODE color of the ECO drive indicator light Used on snowy roads or slippery areas. changes to orange. For ECO pedal system “ ” When the SNOW mode is activated, engine equipped models see ECO pedal system output is controlled to avoid wheel spin. later in this section. Turn the SNOW mode off for normal The ECO drive indicator light will not driving. Turn the drive mode select switch illuminate in the following cases: to the SNOW position. “SNOW” appears in . When the selector lever is in the R the vehicle information display for 2 (Reverse) position. seconds. . When the vehicle speed is below 3 MPH ECO MODE (4.8 km/h) or over 90 MPH (144 km/h). . When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) Adjusts engine and transmission points to system is operated. enhance fuel economy. SSD1041 NOTE: ECO pedal system (if so equipped) When the ECO drive indicator illuminates in Selecting this drive mode will not neces- Helps assist the driver to improve fuel green, the accelerator reaction force is sarily improve fuel economy as many economy by increasing the reaction force normal. When the ECO drive indicator light driving factors influence its effectiveness. of the accelerator pedal. When the ECO drive indicator light is blinking or turns is blinking or turns orange, the ECO pedal Operation orange, the ECO pedal system increases system increases the reaction force of the Turn the drive mode select switch to the the reaction force of the accelerator pedal. accelerator pedal. ECO position. “ECO” appears in the vehicle The ECO pedal system may not vary information display for 2 seconds and the accelerator reaction force under the follow- ECO drive indicator light illuminates on the ing conditions: instrument panel. . When the selector lever is in the N When the accelerator pedal is depressed (Neutral) or R (Reverse) position. within the range of economy drive, the ECO . When Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) is drive indicator light illuminates in green. being operated. When the accelerator pedal is depressed If the ECO pedal system malfunctions, it above the range of economy drive, the

5-20 Starting and driving will cancel automatically. The ECO pedal Setting ECO pedal reaction force: system will not vary the reaction force of 1. Push the SETTING *1 button and high- the accelerator pedal. light the ECO DRIVE key on the display When the drive mode select switch is using the INFINITI controller. Then push rotated from the ECO mode to another the ENTER *2 button. mode (STANDARD, SPORT or SNOW) while 2. Highlight the ECO pedal key and push the ECO pedal system is operating, the ECO the ENTER *2 button. pedal system continues to operate until the pedal is released. If the accelerator pedal is depressed quickly, the ECO pedal system will not increase the reaction force of the accelera- tion pedal. The ECO pedal system is not SSD0939 designed to prevent the vehicle from accelerating. Adjusting the ECO pedal system reaction force: The ECO pedal system reaction force can be adjusted. The reaction force setting will be maintained until the setting is changed even if the engine is turned off.

SSD1001

Starting and driving 5-21 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM/LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP) SYSTEM (if so equipped) The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys- tem/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) sys- tem will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and above, and when it is traveling close to either the left or the right of a traveling lane. Each system functions as follows: . Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system — warns the driver by a warning light and chime that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane. . Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system SSD1025 SSD0937 — warns the driver by a warning light 3. To set the reaction force of the ECO and chime, and helps assist the driver pedal system, highlight “Standard” or to return the vehicle to the center “Soft”. direction of the traveling lane by applying brake control to the left or 4. To turn off the ECO pedal system, right wheels individually (for a short highlight the OFF key, select ON and period of time). push the ENTER *2 button. When the ECO pedal system is tuned off, the accelerator will operate normally.

SSD0672 Lane departure warning light (orange)

5-22 Starting and driving . The LDW and LDP systems monitor the lane below approximately 45 MPH or if it On roads where there are sharp curves. markers on the traveling lane using the cannot detect lane markers. . On roads where there are sharply camera unit *1 located above the inside contrasting objects, such as shadows, . If the LDW system malfunctions, it will mirror. When the camera unit detects that snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines cancel automatically, and the lane de- the vehicle is traveling close to either the remaining after road repairs. (The LDW parture warning light (orange) will illu- left or the right of the traveling lane, the system could detect these items as minate. lane departure warning light on the instru- lane markers.) . ment panel blinks in orange and a warning If the lane departure warning light . On roads where the traveling lane chime sounds. When the LDP system is on, (orange) illuminates, pull off the road merges or separates. it will automatically apply the brakes for a to a safe location and stop the vehicle. . When the vehicle’s traveling direction short period of time, using the function of Turn the engine off and restart the does not align with the lane marker. engine. If the lane departure warning the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. . light (orange) continues to illuminate, When traveling close to the vehicle in LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) have the system checked by an INFINITI front of you, which obstructs the lane SYSTEM retailer. camera unit detection range. . When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the . Excessive noise will interfere with the Precautions on LDW system windshield in front of the lane camera warning chime sound, and the chime unit. may not be heard. WARNING . When the headlights are not bright due The system may not function properly to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not . This system is only a warning device to under the following conditions: adjusted properly. inform the driver of a potential unin- . When strong light enters the lane . On roads where there are multiple tended lane departure. It will not steer camera unit. (For example, the light parallel lane markers; lane markers the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It directly shines on the front of the that are faded or not painted clearly; is the driver’s responsibility to stay vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) yellow painted lane markers; non-stan- alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in . dard lane markers; or lane markers When a sudden change in brightness the traveling lane, and be in control of covered with water, dirt, snow, etc. occurs. (For example, when the vehicle the vehicle at all times. enters or exits a tunnel or under a . On roads where the discontinued lane . bridge.) The system will not operate at speeds markers are still detectable.

Starting and driving 5-23 under the following conditions. . When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.) . When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h). . When the Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) system activates an audible warning or brake control. SSD0672 After the above conditions have finished SIC4335 Lane departure warning light (orange) and the necessary operating conditions are Warning systems switch satisfied, the LDW functions will resume. LDW system operation The warning systems switch is used to turn on and off the LDW system when it is The LDW system provides a lane departure activated using the settings menu on the warning function when the vehicle is driven center display. See “How to enable/disable at speeds of approximately 45 MPH (70 the LDW system using the settings menu” km/h) and above. When the vehicle later in this section. approaches either the left or the right side When the warning systems switch is turned of the traveling lane, a warning chime will off, the indicator *1 on the switch is off. sound and the lane departure warning light The indicator will also be off if the LDW, the (orange) on the instrument panel will blink Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and the Forward to alert the driver. Collision Warning (FCW) systems are deac- The warning function will stop when the tivated. vehicle returns inside of the lane markers. For the BSW and FCW systems, see “Blind The LDW system is not designed to warn Spot Warning (BSW) system/Blind Spot

5-24 Starting and driving InterventionTM (BSI) system” later in this How to enable/disable the LDW section and “Forward Collision Warning system using the settings menu (FCW) system” later in this section. Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system. 1. Push the SETTING *1 button and high- light the “Driver Assistance” key on the display using the INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER *2 button. 2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warn- ings” key, and push the ENTER *2 button.

SSD0939 With navigation system

SSD1001

Starting and driving 5-25 warning light (orange) will stop flashing. . When the LDP system is operating, avoid LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION excessive or sudden steering maneu- (LDP) SYSTEM vers. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle. Precautions on LDP system . The LDP system will not operate at speeds below approximately 45 MPH WARNING (70 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers. . The LDP system will not steer the vehicle . The LDP system may not function or prevent loss of control. It is the properly under the following conditions, driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive and do not use the LDP system: safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling — During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, JVS0080X lane, and be in control of vehicle at all wind, etc.). times. 3. Highlight the “Lane Departure Warning” — When driving on slippery roads, . key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (dis- The LDP system is primarily intended for such as on ice or snow, etc. use on well-developed freeways or high- abled) and push the ENTER *2 button. — ways. It may not detect the lane markers When driving on winding or uneven Temporary disabled status at high in certain roads, weather or driving roads. temperature conditions. — When there is a lane closure due to If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight . Using the LDP system under some road repairs. under high temperature conditions (over conditions of road, lane marker or — When driving in a makeshift lane. approximately 1048F(408C) and then weather, or when you change lanes — started, the LDW system may be deacti- without using the lane change signal When driving on roads where the vated automatically. The lane departure could lead to an unexpected system lane width is too narrow. warning light (orange) will flash. operation. In such conditions, you need — When driving with a tire that is not ’ When the interior temperature is reduced, to correct the vehicle s direction with within normal tire conditions (for the LDW system will resume operating your steering operation to avoid acci- example, tire wear, low tire pres- automatically and the lane departure dents. sure, installation of spare tire, tire

5-26 Starting and driving . chains, non-standard wheels). ered with water, dirt, snow, etc. When a sudden change in brightness . On roads where discontinued lane occurs. (For example, when the vehicle — When the vehicle is equipped with markers are still detectable. enters or exits a tunnel or under a nonoriginal brake parts or suspen- . On roads where there are sharp curves. bridge.) sion parts. . On roads where there are sharply While the LDP system is operating, you . If the LDP system malfunctions, it will contrasting objects, such as shadows, may hear a sound of brake operation. This cancel automatically. The lane departure snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines is normal and indicates that the LDP warning light (orange) on the instrument remaining after road repairs. (The LDP system is operating properly. panel will illuminate. system could detect these items as . If the lane departure warning light lane markers.) (orange) illuminates, pull off the road . On roads where the traveling lane to a safe location and stop the vehicle. merges or separates. Turn the engine off and restart the . When the vehicle’s traveling direction engine. If the warning light (orange) does not align with the lane marker. continues to illuminate, have the LDP . When traveling close to the vehicle in system checked by an INFINITI retailer. front of you, which obstructs the lane . Excessive noise will interfere with the camera unit detection range. warning chime sound, and the chime . When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the may not be heard. windshield in front of the lane camera unit. The functions of the LDP system (warning . When the headlights are not bright due and brake control assist) may or may not to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not operate properly under the following con- adjusted properly. ditions: . When strong light enters the lane . On roads where there are multiple camera unit. (For example, the light parallel lane markers; lane markers directly shines on the front of the that are faded or not painted clearly; vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) yellow painted lane markers; non-stan- dard lane markers; lane markers cov-

Starting and driving 5-27 the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane. The warning and assist functions will stop when the vehicle returns to a position inside of the lane marker.

SSD0672 SSD0938 LDP ON indicator light (green)/ Warning Dynamic driver assistance switch light (orange) The LDP system turns on when the dynamic LDP system operation driver assistance switch on the steering wheel is pushed when the “Lane Departure The LDP system provides a lane departure Prevention” is enabled in the settings warning and brake control assistance when menu on the center display. The LDP ON the vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi- indicator light (green) on the instrument mately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and above. panel illuminates when the LDP system is When the vehicle approaches either the left turned on. or the right side of the traveling lane, a warning chime will sound and the lane departure warning light (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the LDP system will automa- tically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return

5-28 Starting and driving How to enable/disable the LDP system using the settings menu Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDP system. 1. Push the SETTING *1 button and high- light the “Driver Assistance” key on the display using the INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER *2 button. 2. Highlight the “Dynamic Assistance Set- tings” key,andpushtheENTER*2 button.

SSD0939 SSD1002 With navigation system 3. Highlight the “Lane Departure Preven- tion” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) and push the ENTER *2 button. For the BSI and DCA systems, see“Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/Blind Spot InterventionTM (BSI) system” later in this section and “Distance Control Assist (DCA) system” later in this section. Automatic deactivation Condition A: The warning and assist functions of the SSD1001 LDP system are not designed to work under the following conditions: Starting and driving 5-29 . When you operate the lane change . When the hazard warning flashers are approximately 1048F (408C)) and then the signal and change the traveling lanes operated. LDP system is turned on, the LDP system in the direction of the signal. (The LDP . When driving on a curve at high speed. may be deactivated automatically. The lane system will be deactivated for approxi- After the above conditions have finished departure warning light (orange) will blink. mately 2 seconds after the lane change and the necessary operating conditions are Action to take: signal is turned off.) satisfied, the LDP brake control assist When the above conditions no longer exist, . When the vehicle speed lowers to less function will resume. turn off the LDP system. Push the dynamic than approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h). Condition C: driver assistance switch again to turn the . When the BSI system activates an LDP system back on. audible warning or brake control. Under the following conditions, a beep will sound and the LDP system will be canceled After the above conditions have finished automatically. The LDP ON indicator light and the necessary operating conditions are will blink in green, and the LDP system satisfied, the warning and assist functions cannot be activated: will resume. . When the VDC system (except TCS Condition B: function) or ABS operates. The assist function of the LDP system is not . When the VDC system is turned off. designed to work under the following . When the drive mode select switch is conditions (warning is still functional): turned to the SNOW mode. . When the brake pedal is depressed. Action to take: . When the steering wheel is turned as When the above conditions no longer exist, far as necessary for the vehicle to turn off the LDP system. Push the dynamic change lanes. driver assistance switch again to turn the . When the accelerator pedal is de- LDP system back on. pressed while the brake control assist is provided. Temporary disabled status at high tem- perature: . When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) approach warning occurs. If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over

5-30 Starting and driving BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) SYSTEM/ BLIND SPOT INTERVENTIONTM (BSI) SYSTEM (if so equipped) The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Blind era unit’s capability of detecting the Spot Intervention (BSI) systems can help lane markers. alert the driver of other vehicles in . Do not strike or damage the areas adjacent lanes when changing lanes. around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, contact an INFINITI retailer.

SSD0453

LANE CAMERA UNIT MAINTENANCE The lane camera unit *1 for the LDW/LDP system is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW/ LDP systems and prevent a system mal- function, be sure to observe the following: . Always keep the windshield clean. . Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit. . Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the cam-

Starting and driving 5-31 BSW/BSI indicator light will flash. The BSI system operates above approxi- mately 37 MPH (60 km/h). If the system detects a vehicle in the detection zone and your vehicle is approaching the lane marker, the BSI system provides an audi- ble warning (three times), flashes the BSW/BSI indicator light and slightly ap- plies the brakes for a short period of time on one side to help return the vehicle back to the traveling lane. The BSI system provides an audible warning and turns on or flashes the BSW/BSI indicator light even SSD1027 SSD1030 if the BSW system is off. Detection zone The BSW system uses radar sensors *1 The radar sensors can detect vehicles on installed near the rear bumper to detect either side of your vehicle within the WARNING other vehicles beside your vehicle in an detection zone shown as illustrated. This adjacent lane. In addition to the radar detection zone starts from the outside . The BSW and BSI systems are not a sensors, the BSI system uses a camera *2 mirror of your vehicle and extends approxi- replacement for proper driving procedure installed behind the windshield to monitor mately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear and are not designed to prevent contact the lane markers of your traveling lane. bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) with vehicles or objects. When changing sideways. lanes, always use the side and rear The BSW system operates above approxi- mirrors and turn and look in the direc- mately 20 MPH (32 km/h). If the radar tion you will move to ensure it is safe to sensors detects vehicles in the detection change lanes. Never rely solely on the zone, the BSW/BSI indicator light illumi- BSW or BSI system. nates. If the driver then activates the turn . Using the BSI system under some road, signal, a chime will sound twice and the lane marker or weather conditions could lead to improper system operation. Al- 5-32 Starting and driving ways rely on your own steering and lights is adjusted automatically depending braking operation to avoid accidents. on the brightness of the ambient light. . The BSW and BSI systems may not A chime sounds if the radar sensors have provide a warning or brake control for already detected vehicles when the driver vehicles that pass through the detection activates the turn signal. If a vehicle comes zone quickly. into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the BSW/BSI indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. (See “BSW/BSI driving situations” later in this section.)

SSD1028 BSW/BSI indicator light BSW SYSTEM OPERATION If the radar sensors detect vehicles in the detection zone, the BSW/BSI indicator light located inside the outside mirrors illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the BSW/BSI indicator light flashes and a chime sounds twice. The indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicles leave the detection zone. The BSW/BSI indicator lights illuminate for a few seconds when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. The brightness of the BSW/BSI indicator

Starting and driving 5-33 Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier in this section and “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system” later in this sec- tion.

SIC4335 SSD0939 Warning systems switch With navigation system The warning systems switch is used to turn on and off the BSW system when it is activated using the settings menu on the center display. See “How to enable/disable the BSW system using the settings menu” later in this section. When the warning systems switch is turned off, the indicator *1 on the switch is off. The indicator will also be off if the BSW, the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) systems are deactivated. “ For the LDW and FCW systems, see Lane SSD1001 Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane

5-34 Starting and driving How to enable/disable the BSW system using the settings menu Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system. 1. Push the SETTING *1 button and high- light the “Driver Assistance” key on the display using the INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER *2 button. 2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warn- ings” key, and push the ENTER *2 button.

JVS0080X SSD1028 BSW/BSI indicator light 3. Highlight the “Blind Spot Warning” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) and push the ENTER *2 button.

SSD1029 BSI ON indicator light (green) Starting and driving 5-35 NOTE: . Warning and brake control will only be activated if the BSW/BSI indicator light is already illuminated when your vehi- cle approaches a lane marker. If an- other vehicle comes into the detection zone after your vehicle has crossed a lane marker, no warning or brake control will be activated. (See “BSW/ BSI driving situations” later in this section.) . The BSI system is typically activated SSD0938 earlier than the Lane Departure Preven- SSD0939 tion (LDP) system when your vehicle is Dynamic driver assistance switch approaching a lane marker. With navigation system BSI SYSTEM OPERATION The BSI system turns on when the dynamic If the radar sensors detect vehicles in the driver assistance switch on the steering detection zone, the BSW/BSI indicator wheel is pushed when the “Blind Spot light located inside the outside mirrors Intervention” is enabled in the settings illuminates. If your vehicle is approaching menu on the center display. The BSI ON a lane marker, the BSW/BSI indicator light indicator light (green) on the instrument flashes and an audible warning will sound panel illuminates when the BSI system is three times. Then the system applies the turned on. brakes on one side of the vehicle for a The BSI system provides an audible warn- short period of time to help return the ing and flashes the indicator light when vehicle back to the center of the lane. BSI BSI is activated even if the BSW system is operates regardless of turn signal usage. off. SSD1001

5-36 Starting and driving How to enable/disable the BSI — During bad weather (e.g. rain, fog, system using the settings menu snow, wind, etc.) Perform the following steps to enable or — When driving on slippery roads, disable the BSI system. such as on ice or snow, etc. * 1. Push the SETTING 1 button and high- — When driving on winding or uneven “ ” light the Driver Assistance key on the roads. display using the INFINITI controller. — Then push the ENTER *2 button. When there is a lane closure due to road repairs. 2. Highlight the “Dynamic Assistance Set- tings” key,andpushtheENTER*2 — When driving in a makeshift lane. button. — When driving on roads where the SSD1002 lane width is too narrow. — When driving with a tire that is not “ ” 3. Highlight the Blind Spot Intervention within normal tire conditions (e.g. key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (dis- tire wear, low tire pressure, installa- abled) and push the ENTER *2 button. tion of spare tire, tire chains, non- For the LDP and DCA systems, see “Lane standard wheels). Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier — When the vehicle is equipped with in this section and “Distance Control Assist non-original brake parts or suspen- (DCA) system” later in this section. sion parts. . Excessive noise (e.g. audio system vo- WARNING lume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be . Do not use the BSI system under the heard. following conditions because the system may not function properly. . The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSI/BSW when

Starting and driving 5-37 certain objects are present such as: radar sensors may not detect vehicles — On roads where the traveling lane — Pedestrians, bicycles, animals in an adjacent lane. When driving in a merges or separates. — Several types of vehicles such as narrow lane, the radar sensors may — When the vehicle’s traveling direc- motorcycles detect vehicles driving two lanes away. tion does not align with the lane . — Oncoming vehicles The radar sensors are designed to markers. ignore most stationary objects, how- — — Vehicles remaining in the detection When traveling close to the vehicle ever objects such as guardrails, walls, zone when you accelerate from a in front of you, which obstructs the foliage and parked vehicles may occa- stop lane camera unit detection range. sionally be detected. This is a normal (See “BSW/BSI driving situations” — When rain, snow or dirt adheres to later in this section) operating condition. the windshield in front of a lane . — A vehicle merging into an adjacent The camera may not detect lane mar- camera unit. lane at a speed approximately the kers in the following situations and the — When the headlights are not bright same as your vehicle BSI system may not operate properly. due to dirt on the lens or if aiming is (See “BSW/BSI driving situations” — On roads where there are multiple not adjusted properly. later in this section) parallel lane markers; lane markers — When strong light enters a lane — A vehicle approaching rapidly from that are faded or not painted clearly; camera unit. (e.g. light directly behind. yellow painted lane markers; non- shines on the front of the vehicle (See “BSW/BSI driving situations” standard lane markers; lane mar- at sunrise or sunset.) kers covered with water, dirt, snow, later in this section) — When a sudden change in bright- etc. — A vehicle which your vehicle over- ness occurs. (e.g. when the vehicle — takes rapidly. On roads where discontinued lane enters or exits a tunnel or under a (See “BSW/BSI driving situations” markers are still detectable. bridge.) later in this section) — On roads where there are sharp . Severe weather or road spray condi- curves. tions may reduce the ability of the — On roads where there are sharply radar to detect other vehicles. contrasting objects, such as sha- . The radar sensors detection zone is dows, snow, water, wheel ruts, designed based on a standard lane seams or lines remaining after road width. When driving in a wider lane, the repairs.

5-38 Starting and driving SSD1026 SSD1031 SSD1044

BSW/BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS If the driver activates the turn signal, then If the BSI system is on and your vehicle is the BSW/BSI indicator light flashes and a approaching a lane marker, the BSW/BSI Another vehicle approaching from chime will sound twice. indicator light flashes and a chime will sound three times. Then the BSI system behind NOTE: The BSW/BSI indicator light illuminates if a slightly applies the brakes on one side to If the driver activates the turn signal vehicle enters the detection zone from help return the vehicle back to the center of before a vehicle enters the detection zone, behind in an adjacent lane. the driving lane. the BSW/BSI indicator light will flash but However, if the overtaking vehicle is no chime will sound when the other traveling much faster than your vehicle, vehicle is detected. the indicator light may not illuminate before the detected vehicle is beside your vehicle. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Starting and driving 5-39 SSD1032 SSD1033 SSD1034

NOTE: Overtaking other vehicles If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, If you accelerate from a stop with a vehicle The BSW/BSI indicator light illuminates if then the BSW/BSI indicator light flashes in the detection zone, the other vehicle you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle and a chime will sound twice. may not be detected. stays in the detection zone for approxi- mately 3 seconds. The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

5-40 Starting and driving SSD1093 SSD1036

If the BSI system is on and your vehicle NOTE: approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the BSW/ When overtaking several vehicles in a row, BSI indicator light flashes and a chime will the vehicles after the first vehicle may not sound three times. Then, the BSI system be detected if they are traveling close slightly applies the brakes on one side to together. help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane.

Starting and driving 5-41 SSD1037 SSD1038 SSD1094

Entering from the side If the driver activates the turn signal, then If the BSI system is on and your vehicle the BSW/BSI indicator light flashes and a approaches the lane marker while another The BSW/BSI indicator light illuminates if a chime will sound twice. vehicle is in the detection zone, the BSW/ vehicle enters the detection zone from BSI indicator light flashes and a chime will NOTE: either side. sound three times. Then, the BSI system NOTE: If the driver activates the turn signal slightly applies the brakes on one side to before a vehicle enters the detection zone, help return the vehicle back to the center of The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle the BSW/BSI indicator light will flash but the driving lane. which is traveling at about the same speed no chime will sound when another vehicle as your vehicle when it enters the detec- is detected. tion zone.

5-42 Starting and driving — When steering quickly (orange) will blink. The BSW and BSI — When the ICC, DCA, FCW or IBA systems are not available until the warnings sound. conditions no longer exist. — When the hazard warning flashers — When the camera detects that the are operated. interior temperature is high (over 8 8 — When driving on a curve at a high approximately 104 F (40 C)). speed. — When radar blockage is detected. The radar sensors may be blocked by BSW/BSI temporarily not available temporary ambient conditions such as . Under the following conditions, the BSI splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked system will be turned off automatically, condition may also be caused by objects a beep will sound and the BSI ON such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the indicator light (green) will blink. The SSD1040 radar sensors. BSW system is still available, but the Action to take: BSI system will not be available until NOTE: the conditions no longer exist. When the above conditions no longer exist, . The BSI system will not operate if your the BSW system will resume automatically. — When the VDC system (except TCS vehicle is on a lane marker when For the BSI system, turn it off and turn it on function) or ABS operates. another vehicle enters the detection again. If the BSW/BSI warning light (or- — zone. In this case only the BSW system When the VDC system is turned off. ange) continues to blink even after the BSI operates. — When the drive mode select switch system is turned on again, stop the vehicle . BSI braking will not operate or will stop is turned to the SNOW mode. in a safe location and turn the engine off. operating and only a warning chime Action to take: Check for and remove objects obscuring will sound under the following condi- Turn off the BSI system and turn it on again the radar sensors on the rear bumper, and tions. when the above conditions no longer exist. restart the engine. — When the brake pedal is depressed. . Under the following conditions, the If the warning light (orange) continues to — When the accelerator pedal is de- BSW and BSI systems will be turned blink, have the BSW/BSI systems checked pressed while brake control assist off automatically, a beep will sound by an INFINITI retailer. is provided. and the BSW/BSI system warning light

Starting and driving 5-43 BSW/BSI MALFUNCTION *2 that is used by the LDW/LDP system When the BSW/BSI systems malfunction, located in front of the inside mirror. they will be turned off automatically, a For maintenance of the camera, see “Lane beep will sound and the BSW/BSI system Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane warning light (orange) will illuminate. Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier in this section. Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the Radio frequency statement engine off and restart the engine. This device complies with part 15 of the If the warning light (orange) continues to FCC Rules and RSS-310 of Industry Canada. illuminate, have the BSW/BSI systems Operation is subject to the following two checked by an INFINITI retailer. conditions:

SSD1027 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 2. This device must accept any interfer- . The two radar sensor units *1 for the ence received, including interference BSW and BSI systems are located near that may cause undesired operation. the rear bumper. Always keep the area Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz — near the radar sensors clean. Do not 24.25GHz attach stickers (including transparent Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m material), install accessories or apply peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3 additional paint near the radar sensors. m Do not strike or damage the area The manufacturer is not responsible for around the radar sensors. Consult an any radio or TV interference caused by INFINITI retailer if the area around the unauthorized modifications to this equip- radar sensors is damaged due to a ment. Such modifications could void the collision. user’s authority to operate the equipment. . The BSI system uses the same camera

5-44 Starting and driving CRUISE CONTROL

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL . in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in . If the cruise control system malfunc- speed tions, it will cancel automatically. The . on winding or hilly roads SET indicator on the dot matrix crystal . on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.) display will then blink to warn the . driver. in very windy areas . If the engine coolant temperature be- Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle comes excessively high, the cruise control and result in an accident. control system will be canceled auto- matically. . If the SET indicator blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by your INFINITI SSD0941 retailer. 1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch . The SET indicator may sometimes blink when the cruise control main switch is 2. SET/COAST switch turned ON while pushing the RESUME/ 3. CANCEL switch ACCELERATE, SET/COAST or CANCEL 4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch switch. To properly set the cruise CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS control system, perform the steps below in the order indicated. The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accel- WARNING erator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the Do not use the cruise control when driving MAIN switch on. The CRUISE indicator will under the following conditions: come on. . when it is not possible to keep the To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle at a set speed vehicle to the desired speed, push the Starting and driving 5-45 SET/COAST switch and release it. (The cruising speed, the cruise control will . Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. CRUISE SET indicator will come on in the disengage. Turn the MAIN switch off Release the switch when the vehicle instrument panel.) Take your foot off the once and then turn it on again. slows down to the desired speed. accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will main- . The cruise control will automatically . Push, then quickly release the SET/ tain the set speed. cancel if the vehicle slows more than COAST switch. Each time you do this, . To pass another vehicle, depress the 7 MPH (12 km/h) below the set speed. the set speed will decrease by about 1 accelerator pedal. When you release . If you move the selector lever to N MPH (1.6 km/h). the pedal, the vehicle will return to the (Neutral) position, the cruise control To resume the preset speed, push and previously set speed. will be canceled. release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. . The vehicle may not maintain the set To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one The vehicle will resume the last set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this of the following methods: cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). happens, drive without the cruise con- . Depress the accelerator pedal. When trol. the vehicle attains the desired speed, To cancel the preset speed, follow any of push and release the SET/COAST these methods: switch. 1. Push the CANCEL button. The SET . Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELER- indicator will go out. ATE switch. When the vehicle attains 2. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator the speed you desire, release the will go out. switch. . Push, then quickly release the RESUME/ 3. Move the selector lever to the N ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do (Neutral) position. The SET indicator this, the set speed will increase by will go out. about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). 4. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the To reset at a slower cruising speed, use CRUISE indicator and SET indicator will one of the following methods: go out. . Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the . If you depress the brake pedal while vehicle attains the desired speed, push pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE or the SET/COAST switch and release it. SET/COAST switch and reset at the

5-46 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) SYSTEM (if so equipped) The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system maintains a selected distance from the road and traffic conditions. vehicle in front of you within the speed . In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise range of 0 to 90 MPH (0 to 144 km/h) up to control mode, a warning chime will not the set speed. The set speed can be sound to warn you if you are too close to selected by the driver between 20 to 90 the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention MPH (32 to 144 km/h). to the distance between your vehicle and The ICC function can be set to one of two the vehicle ahead of you or a collision cruise control modes: could occur. . Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed. . Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- trol mode: For cruising at a preset speed.

WARNING

. Always drive carefully and attentively when using either cruise control mode. Read and understand the Owner’s Man- ual thoroughly before using the cruise control. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use cruise control except in appropriate Starting and driving 5-47 speed) cruise control switch” later in this section. SELECTING THE VEHICLE-TO-VEHI- CLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode *1 , quickly push and release the MAIN switch *A . VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) SSD0976 system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front 1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control seconds. of you according to that vehicle’s speed mode Once a control mode is activated, it cannot (up to the set speed), or at the set speed 2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- be changed to the other cruise control when the road ahead is clear. trol mode mode. To change the mode, push the MAIN With ICC, the driver can maintain the same Push the MAIN switch *A to choose the switch once to turn the system off. Then speed as other vehicles without the con- push the MAIN switch again to turn the cruise control mode between the vehicle- stant need to adjust the set speed as you *1 system back on and select the desired to-vehicle distance control mode and would with a normal cruise control system. the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- cruise control mode. trol mode *2 . Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance Cruise Control system display. control mode *1 , quickly push and release For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control the MAIN switch *A . To choose the mode, see the following description. For conventional (fixed speed) cruise control the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- mode *2 , push and hold the MAIN switch trol mode, see page “Conventional (fixed *A for longer than approximately 1.5 5-48 Starting and driving sary. . Oncoming vehicles in the same lane The detection range of the sensor is . Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead. lane

WARNING WARNING

. This system is only an aid to assist the . As there is a performance limit to the driver and is not a collision warning or distance control function, never rely avoidance device. It is the driver’s solely on the Intelligent Cruise Control responsibility to stay alert, drive safely system. This system does not correct and be in control of the vehicle at all careless, inattentive or absent-minded times. driving, or overcome poor visibility in SSD0943 rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decele- . The system is primarily intended for use rate the vehicle speed by depressing the on straight, dry, open roads with light brake pedal, depending on the distance PRECAUTIONS ON VEHICLE-TO-VE- traffic. It is not advisable to use the to the vehicle ahead and the surround- HICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE system in city traffic or congested areas. ing circumstances in order to maintain a The system is intended to enhance the . This system will not adapt automatically safe distance between vehicles. operation of the vehicle when following a to road conditions. This system should . If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle traveling in the same lane and be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not vehicle decelerates to a standstill within direction. use the system on roads with sharp the limitations of the system. The If the distance sensor *A detects a slower curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or system will cancel once it judges that moving vehicle ahead, the system will in fog. the vehicle has come to a standstill and reduce the vehicle speed so that your sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the The distance sensor will not detect under vehicle from moving, the driver must selected distance. most conditions: depress the brake pedal. The system automatically controls the . Stationary and slow moving vehicles . The system may not detect the vehicle in throttle and applies the brakes (up to . Pedestrians or objects in the roadway front of you in certain road or weather 25% of vehicle braking power) if neces-

Starting and driving 5-49 conditions. To avoid accidents, never use — On repeated uphill and downhill the Intelligent Cruise Control system roads under the following conditions: — When traffic conditions make it — On roads where the traffic is heavy difficult to keep a proper distance or there are sharp curves between vehicles because of fre- — On slippery road surfaces such as quent acceleration or deceleration on ice or snow, etc. . In some road or traffic conditions, a — During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, vehicle or object can unexpectedly come etc.) into the sensor detection zone and cause When the windshield wiper is oper- automatic braking. You may need to ated at the high speed (HI) position, control the distance from other vehicles the Intelligent Cruise Control sys- using the accelerator pedal. Always stay SSD0943 tem is automatically canceled. If the alert and avoid using the ICC system vehicle is equipped with a rain when it is not recommended in this sensing auto wiper, the system section. VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE may cancel when the wipers are CONTROL MODE OPERATION set to the AUTO position. Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually — When strong light (for example, at control the proper following distance. The sunrise or sunset) is directly shin- vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode of ing on the front of the vehicle the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system — When rain, snow or dirt adhere to may not be able to maintain the selected the system sensor distance between vehicles (following dis- — On steep downhill roads (the vehi- tance) or selected vehicle speed under cle may go beyond the set vehicle some circumstances. speed and frequent braking may The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control result in overheating the brakes) mode uses a sensor *A located on the front of the vehicle to detect vehicles

5-50 Starting and driving traveling ahead. The sensor generally sensor is covered with dirt or obstructs, the sound a warning chime and blink the detects the signals returned from the system will automatically be canceled. If system display to notify the driver to take reflectors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor is covered with ice, a transpar- necessary action. the sensor cannot detect the reflector on ent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC The system will cancel and a warning the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not system may not detect them. In these chime will sound if the speed is below maintain the selected distance. instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h) and a The following are some conditions in which control mode may not cancel and may not vehicle is not detected ahead. The system the sensor cannot detect the signals: be able to maintain the selected following will also disengage when the vehicle goes distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to . When the reflector of the vehicle ahead above the maximum set speed. check and clean the sensor regularly. is positioned high on the vehicle See “Approach warning” later in this (trailer, etc.) The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control section. mode is designed to maintain a selected . When the reflector on the vehicle ahead The following items are controlled in the distance and reduce the speed to match is missing, damaged or covered vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: the slower vehicle ahead; the system will . When the reflector of the vehicle ahead decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if . When there are no vehicles traveling is covered with dirt, snow and road the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance spray vehicle decelerates to a standstill. How- control mode maintains the speed set . When the snow or road spray from ever, the ICC system can only apply up to by the driver. The set speed range is ’ traveling vehicles reduces the sensor s 25% of the vehicles total braking power. between approximately 20 and 90 MPH visibility This system should only be used when (32 and 144 km/h). . When dense exhaust or other smoke traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to . When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, (black smoke) from vehicles reduces remain fairly constant or when vehicle the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control the sensor’s visibility speeds change gradually. If a vehicle mode adjusts the speed to maintain the . When excessively heavy baggage is moves into the traveling lane ahead or if distance, selected by driver, from the loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decele- vehicle ahead. The adjusting speed your vehicle rates, the distance between vehicles may range is up to the set speed. If the The ICC system is designed to automati- become closer because the ICC system vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the cally check the sensor’s operation within cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly en- vehicle decelerates to a standstill with- the limitations of the system. When the ough. If this occurs, the ICC system will in the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a Starting and driving 5-51 standstill with a warning chime. . When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode accelerates and maintains vehi- cle speed up to the set speed. The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion. SSD0252

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is and sounding the chime. The driver may limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the have to manually control the proper detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance away from vehicle traveling distance detection mode to maintain the ahead. selected distance from the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator

5-52 Starting and driving SSD0253 SSD0254

When driving on some roads, such as control the proper distance away from the When driving on the freeway at a set speed winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or vehicle traveling ahead. and approaching a slower traveling vehicle roads which are under construction, the ahead, the ICC will adjust the speed to ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a maintain the distance, selected by the different lane, or may temporarily not driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the cause the ICC system to decelerate or freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and accelerate the vehicle. maintain the speed up to the set speed. The detection of vehicles may also be Pay attention to the driving operation to affected by vehicle operation (steering maintain control of the vehicle as it maneuver or traveling position in the lane, accelerates to the set speed. etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the The vehicle may not maintain the set speed ICC system may warn you by blinking the on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, system indicator and sounding the chime you will have to manually control the unexpectedly. You will have to manually vehicle speed.

Starting and driving 5-53 4. DISTANCE switch: Changes the vehicle’s following dis- tance: . Long . Middle . Short 5. MAIN switch: Master switch to activate the system

SSD0977 SSD0978

Intelligent cruise control switch Intelligent cruise control system The system is operated by a MAIN switch display and indicators and four control switches, all mounted on The display is located between the speed- the steering wheel. ometer and tachometer. 1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: 1. MAIN switch indicator: Resumes set speed or increases speed Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON. incrementally. 2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator: 2. SET/COAST switch: Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in Sets desired cruise speed, reduces front of you. speed incrementally. 3. Set distance indicator: 3. CANCEL switch: Displays the selected distance between Deactivates the system without erasing vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch. the set speed.

5-54 Starting and driving 4. Indicates your vehicle 5. Set vehicle speed indicator: Indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h. 6. Intelligent Cruise Control system warn- ing light (orange): The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the ICC system.

SSD0979 SSD0980

When the ignition switch is pushed to the Operating vehicle-to-vehicle dis- ON position, the indicators come on as tance control mode illustrated to check for a burned-out bulb, and it turns off when the engine is started. To turn on the cruise control, quickly push and release the MAIN switch *A on. The MAIN switch indicator, set distance indica- tor and set vehicle speed indicator come on and in a standby state for setting.

Starting and driving 5-55 . When the parking brake is applied . When the brakes are operated by the driver

SSD0981 SSD0982

To set cruising speed, accelerate your When the SET/COAST switch is pushed vehicle to the desired speed, push the under the following conditions, the system SET/COAST switch and release it. (Vehicle cannot be set and the ICC indicators will ahead detection indicator, set distance blink for approximately 2 seconds: indicator and set vehicle speed indicator . When traveling below 20 MPH (32 come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set detected speed. . When the selector lever is not in the D or Manual mode . When the windshield wipers are operat- ing at high speed (HI). If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensing auto wiper, the system may cancel when the wipers are set to the AUTO position.

5-56 Starting and driving . When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the MAIN switch again.) For details about the VDC system, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- tem” later in this section. . When ABS or VDC (including the trac- tion control system) is operating . When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight) . SSD0983 When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no When the SET/COAST switch is pushed longer slipping. Push the MAIN switch under the following conditions, the system to turn off the ICC, and reset the ICC cannot be set. system by pushing the MAIN switch A warning chime will sound and the ICC again.) indicators will blink. . When the drive mode select switch is turned to the SNOW mode (To use the ICC system, turn the drive mode select switch to a mode other than the SNOW mode, push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC and reset the ICC switch by pressing the MAIN switch again.) For details about the INFINITI drive mode selector, see “INFINITI drive mode selector” earlier in this section. Starting and driving 5-57 Vehicle detected ahead: When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance. The stoplights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system. SSD0984 When the brake operates, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. 1. System set display with vehicle ahead When a vehicle ahead is detected, the 2. System set display without vehicle brake pedal when deceleration is required to vehicle ahead detection indicator comes ahead maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a on. The ICC system will also display the set System operation vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when speed and selected distance. using the ICC system. Vehicle ahead not detected: WARNING When a vehicle is no longer detected The driver sets the desired vehicle speed ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler- based on the road conditions. The ICC Normally when controlling the distance to a ates your vehicle to resume the previously system maintains the set vehicle speed, vehicle ahead, this system automatically set vehicle speed. The ICC system then similar to standard cruise control, as long accelerates or decelerates your vehicle maintains the set speed. as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. When a vehicle is no longer detected the Depress the accelerator to properly accel- The ICC system displays the set speed. vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. erate your vehicle when acceleration is If a vehicle ahead appears during accel- required for a lane change. Depress the eration to the set vehicle speed or any time 5-58 Starting and driving the ICC system is in operation, the system these methods: controls the distance to that vehicle. . Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle When a vehicle is no longer detected under speed indicator will go out. approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h), the . Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle system will be canceled. speed indicator will go out. . Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the MAIN switch indicator and set vehicle speed indicator will go out. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods: . Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, SSD0985 push and release the SET/COAST switch. When passing another vehicle, the set . Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELER- speed indicator will flash when the vehicle ATE switch. The set vehicle speed will speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle increase by approximately 5 MPH (5 detect indicator will turn off when the area km/h for Canada). ahead of the vehicle is open. When the . pedal is released, the vehicle will return to Push, then quickly release the RESUME/ the previously set speed. ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by Even though your vehicle speed is set in approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for the ICC system, you can depress the Canada). accelerator pedal when it is necessary to To reset at a slower cruising speed, use accelerate your vehicle rapidly. one of the following methods: How to change the set vehicle . Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the speed vehicle attains the desired speed, push To cancel the preset speed, use any of the SET/COAST switch and release it.

Starting and driving 5-59 . Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada). . Push, then quickly release the SET/ COAST switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approxi- mately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Canada). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 20 MPH (32 km/h). SSD0986

How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions. Each time the DISTANCE switch *A is pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again in that sequence.

5-60 Starting and driving and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if: . The chime sounds. . The vehicle ahead detection and set distance indicator blink. The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are: . When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing . When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehi- cles is increasing . When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle The warning chime will not sound when: . Your vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly. . JVS0082M The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system. . The distance to the vehicle ahead will becomes “long”.) change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the Approach warning longer the distance. If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle . If the engine is stopped, the set ahead due to rapid deceleration of that distance becomes “long”. (Each time vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the the engine is started, the initial setting system warns the driver with the chime

Starting and driving 5-61 Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected . When driving into a strong light (i.e., by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or sunlight) driving position in the lane) or traffic or . When distance measurement becomes vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle impaired due to adhesion of dirt or is being driven with some damage). obstruction to the sensor Automatic cancellation . When a wheel slips A chime sounds under the following con- ditions and the control is automatically canceled. . When the vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h) SSD0284A . When the system judges the vehicle is at standstill NOTE: . When the selector lever is not in the D The approach warning chime may sound or Manual mode and the system display may blink when . When the windshield wipers are operat- the ICC sensor detects some reflectors *A ing at high speed (HI). If the vehicle is which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes equipped with a rain sensing auto- or on the side of the road. This may cause wiper, the system may cancel when the the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate wipers are set to the AUTO position. the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect . these reflectors when the vehicle is driven When the parking brake is applied on winding roads, hilly roads or when . When the drive mode select switch is entering or exiting a curve. The ICC sensor turned to the SNOW mode may also detect reflectors on narrow roads . When the VDC system is turned off or in road construction zones. In these . When ABS or VDC (including the trac- cases you will have to manually control tion control system) operates the proper distance ahead of your vehicle. 5-62 Starting and driving . When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle Action to take: When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the Intelligent Cruise Control MAIN Switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.

SSD0988 SSD0989

Warning light and display Condition B: When the sensor window is dirty, making it Condition A: impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the Under the following conditions, the Intelli- ICC system is automatically canceled. gent Cruise Control system is automatically canceled. The chime will sound and the The chime sounds and the ICC system system will not be able to be set. warning light (orange) will come on and the “CLEAN SENSOR” indicator will appear. . When the VDC is turned off . When the ABS or VDC (including the Action to take: traction control system) operates If the warning light comes on, park the . When a tire slips vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine off. . When the drive mode select switch is Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth turned to the SNOW mode and then perform the settings again.

Starting and driving 5-63 conditions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer.

SSD0979 SSD0943

Condition C: Sensor maintenance When the ICC system is not operating The sensor for the ICC system *A is located properly, the chime sounds and the ICC below the front bumper. system warning light (orange) will come To keep the ICC system operating properly, on. be sure to observe the following: Action to take: . Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe If the warning light comes on, park the with a soft cloth carefully so as not to vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, damage the sensor. restart the engine, resume driving and set . Do not strike or damage the areas the ICC system again. around the sensor. Do not touch or If it is not possible to set the system or the remove the screw located on the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the sensor. Doing so could cause failure ICC system is malfunctioning. Although or malfunction. If the sensor is da- the vehicle is still driveable under normal maged due to an accident, contact an

5-64 Starting and driving INFINITI retailer. under the following conditions: . Do not attach a sticker (including — when it is not possible to keep the transparent material) or install an vehicle at a set speed accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction. — in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) — CRUISE CONTROL MODE on winding or hilly roads — This mode allows driving at a speed on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) etc.) without keeping your foot on the accel- — in very windy areas erator pedal. . Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. SSD0990 WARNING Conventional (fixed speed) cruise . In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switch control mode, a warning chime does not 1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the pre- Resumes set speed or increases speed sence of the vehicle ahead nor the incrementally. vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. 2. SET/COAST switch: . Pay special attention to the distance Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces between your vehicle and the vehicle speed incrementally. ahead of you or a collision could occur. 3. CANCEL switch: . Always confirm the setting in the In- Deactivates the system without erasing telligent Cruise Control system display. the set speed. . Do not use the conventional (fixed 4. MAIN switch: speed) cruise control mode when driving Master switch to activate the system. Starting and driving 5-65 3. Cruise system warning light: Comes on if there is a malfunction in the cruise control system.

SSD0991 SSD0992

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Operating conventional (fixed control mode display and indica- speed) cruise control mode tors To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) The display is located between the speed- cruise control mode, push and hold the ometer and tachometer. MAIN switch *A for longer than about 1.5 1. MAIN switch indicator: seconds. Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON. When pushing the MAIN switch on, the Intelligent Cruise Control system display 2. Cruise set switch indicator: and the CRUISE indicator are displayed on Displays while the vehicle speed is the dot matrix crystal display. After you controlled by the conventional (fixed hold the MAIN switch on for longer than speed) cruise control mode of the ICC about 1.5 seconds, the Intelligent Cruise system. Control system display goes out. The CRUISE indicator stays lit. You can now

5-66 Starting and driving set your desired cruising speed. Pushing To cancel the preset speed, use any of the the MAIN switch again will turn the system following methods: completely off. 1. Push the CANCEL button. The SET When the Distance Control Assist (DCA) indicator will go out. system is on, the conventional (fixed 2. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator speed) cruise control mode cannot be will go out. turned on even though the MAIN switch is 3. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the pushed and held. CRUISE indicator and SET indicator will To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) go out. cruise control mode, turn off the DCA To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one system. See “Distance Control Assist of the following three methods: (DCA) system” later in this section. 1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When When the ignition switch is pushed to the SSD0993 the vehicle attains the desired speed, OFF position, the system is also automati- push and release the SET/COAST cally turned off. To use the Intelligent To set cruising speed, accelerate your switch. Cruise Control again, quickly push and vehicle to the desired speed, push the release the MAIN switch (vehicle-to-vehicle SET/COAST switch and release it. (The SET 2. Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELER- distance control mode) or push and hold it indicator will come on in the display.) Take ATE set switch. When the vehicle attains (conventional cruise control mode) again to your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your the speed you desire, release the turn it on. vehicle will maintain the set speed. switch. . To pass another vehicle, depress the 3. Push, then quickly release the RE- accelerator pedal. When you release SUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each time CAUTION the pedal, the vehicle will return to the you do this, the set speed will increase previously set speed. by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To avoid accidentally engaging cruise con- . The vehicle may not maintain the set trol, make sure to turn the MAIN switch off To reset at a slower cruising speed, use speed when going up or down steep when not using the Intelligent Cruise Con- one of the following three methods: hills. If this happens, manually main- trol system. 1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the tain vehicle speed. vehicle attains the desired speed, push

Starting and driving 5-67 the SET/COAST switch and release it. . When a tire slips 2. Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. 3. Push, then quickly release the SET/ COAST switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). SSD0979

Automatic cancellation Warning light A chime sounds under the following con- When the system is not operating properly, ditions and the control is automatically the chime sounds and the system warning canceled. light (orange) will come on. . When the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set Action to take: speed If the warning light comes on, park the . When the vehicle speed falls below vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h) restart the engine, resume driving and then perform the setting again. . When the selector lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode If it is not possible to set or the indicator . When the parking brake is applied. stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is . When the VDC operates (including the still driveable under normal conditions, traction control system) have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI 5-68 Starting and driving DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYSTEM (if so equipped) The Distance Control Assist (DCA) system retailer. brakes and moves the accelerator pedal . The DCA system will not apply brake PREVIEW FUNCTION (for Intelligent upward according to the distance from and control while the driver’s foot is on the Cruise Control system equipped the relative speed of the vehicle ahead to accelerator pedal. models) help assist the driver to maintain a following distance. The ICC system with the preview function identifies the need to apply emergency braking by sensing the vehicle ahead in WARNING the same lane and the distance to the vehicle ahead and relative speed from it, it . Always drive carefully and attentively applies the brake pre-pressure before the when using the Distance Control Assist driver depresses the brake pedal and helps system. Read and understand the Own- improve brake response by reducing pedal er’s Manual thoroughly before using the free play. DCA system. To avoid serious injury or For more details, see “Brake assist” later in death, do not rely on the system to this section. prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the Distance Control Assist system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions. . If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill with a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

Starting and driving 5-69 The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead. WARNING

. As there is a performance limit to the WARNING distance control function, never rely solely on the Distance Control Assist . This system is only an aid to assist the system. This system does not correct driver and is not a collision warning or careless, inattentive or absent-minded avoidance device. It is the driver’s driving, or overcome poor visibility in responsibility to stay alert, drive safely rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decele- and be in control of the vehicle at all rate the vehicle speed by depressing the times. brake pedal, depending on the distance . This system will not adapt automatically to the vehicle ahead and the surround- SSD0943 to road conditions. Do not use the ing circumstances in order to maintain a system on roads with sharp curves, or safe distance between vehicles. PRECAUTIONS ON DISTANCE CON- on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog. . The system may not detect the vehicle in TROL ASSIST SYSTEM front of you in certain road or weather The distance sensor will not detect the The system is intended to assist the driver conditions. To avoid accidents, never use following objects: to keep a following distance from the the Distance Control Assist system vehicle ahead traveling in the same lane . Stationary and slow moving vehicles under the following conditions: . and direction. Pedestrians or objects in the roadway — On roads with sharp curves If the distance sensor *A detects a slower . Oncoming vehicles in the same lane — On slippery road surfaces such as moving vehicle ahead, the system will . Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel on ice or snow, etc. reduce the vehicle speed to help assist lane the driver to maintain a following distance. — During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, The system automatically controls the etc.) throttle and applies the brakes (up to — When strong light (for example, at 25% of vehicle braking power) if neces- sunrise or sunset) is directly shin- sary. ing on the front of the vehicle

5-70 Starting and driving — When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the vehicle ahead, the DCA system may not the system sensor operate. The following are some conditions in which — On steep downhill roads (frequent the sensor cannot detect the signals: braking may result in overheating the brakes) . When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is positioned high on the vehicle — On repeated uphill and downhill (trailer, etc.) roads . When the reflector on the vehicle ahead . In some road or traffic conditions, a is missing, damaged or covered vehicle or object can unexpectedly come . When the reflector of the vehicle ahead into the sensor detection zone and cause is covered with dirt, snow and road automatic braking. You may need to spray control the distance from other vehicles SSD0943 . When the snow or road spray from using the accelerator pedal. Always stay traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s alert and avoid using the DCA system DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST OP- visibility when it is not recommended in this ERATION . When dense exhaust or other smoke section. Always pay attention to the operation of (black smoke) from vehicles reduces the vehicle and be ready to manually the sensor’s visibility decelerate to maintain the proper following . When excessively heavy baggage is distance. The Distance Control Assist (DCA) loaded in the rear seat or the luggage system may not be able to decelerate the room of your vehicle vehicle under some circumstances. The DCA system is designed to automati- ’ The DCA system uses a sensor *A located cally check the sensor s operation. When on the front of the vehicle to detect the sensor is covered with dirt or is vehicles traveling ahead. The sensor gen- obstructed, the system will automatically erally detects the signals returned from the be canceled. If the sensor is covered with reflectors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, the sensor cannot detect the reflector on etc., the DCA system may not detect them.

Starting and driving 5-71 In these instances, the Distance Control The DCA system does not control vehicle Assist (DCA) system may not be able to speed or warn you when you approach decelerate the vehicle properly. Be sure to stationary and slow moving vehicles. You check and clean the sensor regularly. must pay attention to vehicle operation to The DCA system is designed to help assist maintain proper distance from vehicles the driver to maintain a following distance ahead. from the vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the DCA system can only apply up to 25% of the vehicles total braking power. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the DCA system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the DCA system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action. See “Approach warning” later in this section. This system only brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance from the vehicle ahead. Acceleration should be operated by the driver.

5-72 Starting and driving SSD0252

The detection zone of the sensor is limited. away from vehicle traveling ahead. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the system to operate. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance

Starting and driving 5-73 SSD0253 SSD0994

When driving on some roads, such as vehicle traveling ahead. Distance Control Assist system winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or display and indicators roads which are under construction, the sensor may detect vehicles in a different The display is located between the speed- lane, or may temporarily not detect a ometer and tachometer. vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause 1. Distance Control Assist (DCA) system the system to work inappropriately. switch indicator: The detection of vehicles may also be Indicates that the dynamic driver assis- affected by vehicle operation (steering tance switch is ON. maneuver or traveling position in the lane, 2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator: etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in system may warn you by blinking the front of you. system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually 3. Distance Control Assist system warning control the proper distance away from the light (orange):

5-74 Starting and driving The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the DCA system. WARNING

When the DCA system is not necessary, be sure to turn off the dynamic driver assis- tance switch. Using the system when it is not necessary may result in an accident.

SSD0995

Operating Distance Control Assist (DCA) system The DCA system turns on when the dynamic driver assistance switch on the steering wheel is pushed when the “Dis- tance Control Assist” is enabled in the settings menu on the center display. The Distance Control Assist (DCA) system in- dicator in the dot matrix liquid crystal display appears when the DCA system is turned on. The system will start to operate after the vehicle speed becomes above approxi- mately 3 MPH (5 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-75 How to enable/disable the DCA system using the settings menu: Perform the following steps to enable or disable the DCA system. 1. Push the SETTING *1 button and high- light the “Driver Assistance” key on the display using the INFINITI controller. Then push the ENTER *2 button. 2. Highlight the “Dynamic Assistance Set- tings” key,andpushtheENTER*2 button.

SSD0939 SSD1002 With navigation system 3. Highlight the “Distance Control Assist” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (dis- abled) and push the ENTER *2 button. For the LDP and BSI systems, see “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier in this section and “Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/Blind Spot InterventionTM (BSI) system” earlier in this section.

SSD1001

5-76 Starting and driving push the dynamic driver assistance switch.) For details about the VDC system, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- tem” later in this section. . When ABS or VDC (including the trac- tion control system) is operating . When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight) When the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode is operating, the DCA system will not operate. (To use the DCA system, SSD0996 turn the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode off, then push the dynamic Under the following conditions, the DCA driver assistance switch.) system will not operate and the DCA For details about the Conventional (fixed system switch indicator light will blink: speed) cruise control mode, see “Intelli- . When the drive mode select switch is gent Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in turned to the SNOW mode (To use the this section. DCA system, turn the drive mode select When the engine is turned off, the DCA switch to a mode other than the SNOW system is automatically turned off. mode, then turn on the dynamic driver assistance switch.) For details about the INFINITI drive mode selector, see “INFINITI drive mode selector” in the “5. Starting and driv- ing” section. . When the VDC system is off (To use the DCA system, turn on the VDC, then Starting and driving 5-77 When vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead: . If the driver’sfootisnotonthe accelerator pedal, the system activates the brakes to decelerate smoothly as necessary. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. . If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal, the system moves the accelera- tor pedal upward to assist the driver to release the accelerator pedal. SSD0997 When brake operation by driver is re- quired: 1. System set display with vehicle ahead vehicle suddenly appears in front of you. The system alerts the driver by a warning 2. System set display without vehicle chime and blinking the vehicle ahead ahead Always stay alert when using the DCA system. detection indicator. If the driver’s foot is System operation on the accelerator pedal after the warning, The Distance Control Assist (DCA) system the system moves the accelerator pedal helps assist the driver to keep a following upward to assist the driver to switch to the WARNING distance to the vehicle ahead by braking brake pedal. and moving the accelerator pedal upward The stoplights of the vehicle come on The Distance Control Assist system auto- in the normal driving condition. when braking is performed by the DCA matically decelerates your vehicle to help system. assist the driver to maintain a following When a vehicle is detected ahead: When the brake operates, a noise may be distance from the vehicle ahead. Manually The vehicle ahead detection indicator heard. This is not a malfunction. brake when deceleration is required to comes on. maintain a safe distance upon sudden braking by the vehicle ahead or when a

5-78 Starting and driving . When the driver depresses the accel- . When the vehicles are traveling at the WARNING erator pedal even further while the same speed and the distance between system is moving the accelerator pedal vehicles is not changing . When the vehicle ahead detection in- upward, the DCA system control of the . When the vehicle ahead is traveling dicator light is not illuminated, system accelerator pedal is canceled. faster and the distance between vehi- will not control or warn the driver. . When the driver’s foot is on the accel- cles is increasing . Never place your foot under the brake erator pedal, the brake control by the . When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle pedal. Your foot may be caught when the system is not operated. The warning chime will not sound when system controls the brake. . When the driver’s foot is on the brake your vehicle approaches vehicles that are . Depending on the position of the accel- pedal, neither the brake control nor the parked or moving slowly. erator pedal, the system may not be able alert by the system operates. . to assist the driver to release the When the Intelligent Cruise Control accelerator pedal appropriately. system is set, the DCA system will be cancelled. . If the vehicle ahead comes to a stand- still, the vehicle decelerates to a stand- Approach warning still within the limitations of the system. If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle The system will release brake control ahead due to rapid deceleration of that with a warning chime once it judges the vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the vehicle is at a standstill. To prevent the system warns the driver with the chime vehicle from moving, the driver must and DCA system display. Decelerate by depress the brake pedal. (The system depressing the brake pedal to maintain a will resume control automatically once safe vehicle distance if: the system reaches 3 MPH (5 km/h)). . The chime sounds. . Overriding the system: The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks. The following driver’s operation overrides The warning chime may not sound in some the system operation. cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:

Starting and driving 5-79 Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

SSD0284A SSD0996

NOTE: Automatic cancellation The approach warning chime may sound Condition A: and the system display may blink when * Under the following conditions, the Dis- the sensor detects some reflectors A tance Control Assist system is automati- which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes cally canceled. The chime will sound and or on the side of the road. This may cause the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system the DCA system to operate inappropriately. switch indicator light will blink. The system The sensor may detect these reflectors will not be able to be set. when the vehicle is driven on winding . roads, hilly roads or when entering or When the VDC system is turned off exiting a curve. The sensor may also detect . When the VDC or ABS (including the reflectors on narrow roads or in road traction control system) operates construction zones. In these cases you . When the drive mode select switch is will have to manually control the proper turned to the SNOW mode distance ahead of your vehicle. 5-80 Starting and driving . When driving into a strong light (i.e., sunlight) Action to take: When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off with the dynamic driver assistance switch. Turn the DCA system back on to use the system.

SSD0998 SSD0999

Condition B: Condition C: When the sensor window is dirty, making it When the DCA system is not operating impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the properly, the chime sounds and the system DCA system is automatically canceled. warning light (“CRUISE” orange) will come The chime sounds and the system warning on. light (orange) will come on and the “CLEAN Action to take: ” SENSOR indicator will appear. If the warning light comes on, park the Action to take: vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, If the warning light comes on, park the restart the engine, and turn on the DCA vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine off. system again. Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth If it is not possible to set the system or the and then perform the settings again. indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal

Starting and driving 5-81 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM (if so equipped) The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) sys- conditions, have the vehicle checked at an tem will warn the driver by the vehicle INFINITI retailer. ahead detection indicator light and chime Sensor maintenance when your vehicle is getting close to the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane. How to handle the sensor: The sensor for the DCA system is common The FCW system will function when your with Intelligent Cruise Control and is vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi- located below the front bumper. mately 10 MPH (15 km/h) and above. To handle the sensor, see “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in this section.

SSD0943

SSD0749 Vehicle ahead detection indicator light

5-82 Starting and driving The FCW system uses the distance sensor — When the sensor gets dirty and it is — When snow or road spray from *A located below the front bumper to impossible to detect the distance traveling vehicles is splashed. measure the distance to the vehicle ahead. from the vehicle ahead. When the system judges that your vehicle — When dense exhaust or other smoke is getting close to the vehicle ahead in the — When driving into a strong light (black smoke) from vehicles reduces travel lane, the vehicle ahead detection (i.e., sunlight) the visibility of the sensor. indicator light on the instrument panel . The sensor generally detects the signals — When excessively heavy baggage is blinks and a warning chime sounds. returned from the reflectors on a vehicle loaded in the rear seat or the PRECAUTIONS ON FCW SYSTEM ahead. Therefore, the system may not luggage room of your vehicle. function properly under the following — When abruptly accelerating or de- conditions: celerating. WARNING — When the reflectors of the vehicle — On a steep downhill slope or on ahead are positioned high or close roads with sharp curves. . The FCW system is intended to warn you to each other (including a small before a collision but will not avoid a vehicle such as motorcycles). — When there is a highly reflective collision. It is the driver’s responsibility object near the vehicle ahead (i.e., — When the sensor gets dirty or it is to stay alert, drive safely and be in being very close to another vehicle, impossible to detect the distance control of the vehicle at all times. signboard, etc.) from the vehicle ahead. . As there is a performance limit, the . Depending on certain road conditions — When the reflectors on the vehicle system may not provide a warning in (curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle ahead are missing, damaged or certain conditions. conditions (steering position or vehicle covered. . The system will not detect the following position), or the preceding vehicle’s objects: — When the reflectors of the vehicle conditions (position in lane, etc.), the — Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in ahead are covered with dirt, snow or system may not function properly. The the roadway road spray. system may detect highly reflective — objects such as reflectors, signs, white — Oncoming vehicles in the same lane When visibility is low (such as rain, fog, snow, etc.). markers, and other stationary objects on . The system will not detect another the road or near the traveling lane and vehicle under the following conditions: provide unnecessary warning.

Starting and driving 5-83 . The system may not function in offset conditions. . The system may not function when the distance to the vehicle ahead is extre- mely close. . The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent plastic bag, etc., the system may not detect them. In these instances the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly. SSD1000 SIC4335 . Excessive noise will interfere with the Warning systems switch If the IBA OFF indicator light *A illuminates warning chime sound, and the chime with a beep sound, pull off the road to a FCW system operation may not be heard. safe location, stop the vehicle and turn the The FCW system will function at speeds of . A sudden appearance of a vehicle in engine off. Check to see if the sensor approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) and front (i.e., it abruptly cuts in) may not be window is dirty. If the sensor window is above. detected and the system may not warn dirty, clean it with a soft cloth and restart The warning systems switch is used to turn the driver soon enough. the engine. If the sensor window is not on and off the FCW system when it is . dirty, restart the engine. If the IBA OFF The system will be cancelled automati- activated using the settings menu on the indicator light continues to illuminate even cally with a beep sound and the IBA OFF center display. See “How to enable/disable if the IBA system is turned on with the IBA indicator light will illuminate under the the FCW system using the settings menu” OFF switch *B , have the system checked following conditions: later in this section. — by an INFINITI retailer. When the sensor window is dirty When the warning systems switch is turned To turn on the IBA system, see “Intelligent — off, the indicator *1 on the switch is off. When the system malfunctions Brake Assist (IBA) system” later in this The indicator will also be off if the FCW, the section.

5-84 Starting and driving Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and the How to enable/disable the FCW Blind Spot Warning (BSW) systems are system using the settings menu deactivated. Perform the following steps to enable or For the LDW and BSW systems, see “Lane disable the FCW system. Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane 1. Push the SETTING *1 button and high- Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier light the “Driver Assistance” key on the in this section and “Blind Spot Warning display using the INFINITI controller. (BSW) system/Blind Spot InterventionTM Then push the ENTER *2 button. (BSI) system” earlier in this section. 2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warn- ings” key, and push the ENTER *2 button.

SSD0939 With navigation system

SSD1001

Starting and driving 5-85 INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) SYSTEM (if so equipped) The Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system warns the driver by a warning light and chime when there is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane and the driver must take avoidance action immediately. The system helps reduce the rear-end collision speed by applying the brakes when the system judges that the collision cannot be prevented. The IBA system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi- mately 10 MPH (15 km/h) and above, and when your vehicle is driven at speeds JVS0080X approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) faster SSD0943 than the vehicle ahead. 3. Highlight the “Forward Collision Warn- ing” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) and push the ENTER *2 button. For the sensor maintenance, see “Intelli- gent Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in this section.

SSD0749 Vehicle ahead detection indicator light

5-86 Starting and driving The IBA system uses a distance sensor *A the roadway road spray. located below the front bumper to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead. When — Oncoming vehicles in the same lane — When visibility is low (such as rain, fog, snow, etc.). the system judges that your vehicle is . The system will not detect another getting close to the vehicle ahead in the vehicle under the following conditions: — When snow or road spray from traveling lane, the vehicle ahead detection — When the sensor gets dirty and it is traveling vehicles is splashed. indicator light on the instrument panel impossible to detect the distance — blinks and a warning chime sounds. When dense exhaust or other smoke from the vehicle ahead. (black smoke) from vehicles reduces The IBA system will be turned on/off by — the visibility of the sensor. pushing the IBA OFF switch. The IBA OFF When driving into a strong light — indicator light display will illuminate when (i.e., sunlight) When excessively heavy baggage is the system is turned off. . The sensor generally detects the signals loaded in the rear seat or the returned from the reflectors on a vehicle luggage room of your vehicle. PRECAUTIONS ON IBA SYSTEM ahead. Therefore, the system may not — When abruptly accelerating or de- function properly under the following celerating. conditions: WARNING — On a steep downhill slope or on — When the reflectors of the vehicle roads with sharp curves. . The IBA system is not a collision ahead are positioned high or close — avoidance system. It is the driver’s to each other (including a small When there is a highly reflective responsibility to stay alert, drive safely vehicle such as motorcycles). object near the vehicle ahead (i.e., and be in control of the vehicle at all being very close to another vehicle, — When the sensor gets dirty and it is times. signboard, etc.) impossible to detect the distance . . As there is a performance limit, the from the vehicle ahead. Depending on certain road conditions system may not provide a warning or (curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle — When the reflectors on the vehicle braking in certain conditions. conditions (steering position or vehicle ahead are missing, damaged or position), or the preceding vehicle’s . The system will not detect the following covered. conditions (position in lane, etc.), the objects: — When the reflectors of the vehicle system may not function properly. The — Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in ahead are covered with dirt, snow or system may detect highly reflective

Starting and driving 5-87 objects such as reflectors, signs, white or translucent plastic bag, etc., the markers, and other stationary objects on system may not detect them. In these the road or near the traveling lane and instances the system may not be able to provide unnecessary warning. warn the driver properly. Be sure to . The system may not function in offset check and clean the sensor regularly. conditions. . Excessive noise will interfere with the . The system may not function when the warning chime sound, and the chime distance to the vehicle ahead is extre- may not be heard. mely close. . Never place your foot under the brake pedal when the IBA system turns on. Your foot may be caught when the system controls the brake. SSD0782 . A sudden appearance of a vehicle in Reflectors on the road front (i.e., it abruptly cuts in) may not be detected and the system may not warn WARNING the driver soon enough. . The system will be cancelled automati- . The system may detect highly reflective cally with a beep sound and the IBA objects such as reflectors, signs, white warning light will illuminate under the markers and other stationary objects on following conditions: the road or near the traveling lane. — When the sensor window is dirty In extreme conditions, detection of these — When the system malfunctions objects may cause the system to func- tion. If the IBA OFF indicator light illuminates . The system is designed to automatically with a beep sound, pull off the road to a check the sensor’s functionality. If the safe location, stop the vehicle and turn the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent engine off. Check to see if the sensor

5-88 Starting and driving window is dirty. If the sensor window is illuminate. When the IBA OFF switch is dirty, clean it with a soft cloth and restart pushed again, the system will turn on and the engine. If the sensor window is not the IBA OFF indicator light will turn off. dirty, restart the engine. If the IBA OFF The IBA system will remain in the last ON indicator light continues to illuminate even or OFF state it was left in until it is if the IBA system is turned on, have the manually changed by pressing the IBA system checked by an INFINITI retailer. OFF switch. Illumination of the IBA OFF indicator light without the warning chime sound is an indication that the IBA system is tempora- rily unavailable. It will occur under the following conditions: SSD1000 . When driving into a strong light (for example, sunlight) IBA system operation The IBA OFF indicator light will turn off The IBA system will function when your when the system returns to its normal vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi- operating conditions. mately 10 MPH (15 km/h) or above, and For the sensor maintenance, see “Intelli- when the vehicle’s speed is approximately gent Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in 10 MPH (15 km/h) faster than that of the this section. vehicle ahead. To turn the system off/on, push and hold the IBA OFF switch *B for more than 1 second after starting the engine. When the IBA OFF indicator light *A on the instru- ment panel turns off and the IBA OFF switch is pushed, the system will turn off and the IBA OFF indicator light will

Starting and driving 5-89 BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped) . Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Main- CAUTION tain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. . During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), Drive at moderate speeds on the high- follow these recommendations to obtain way. maximum engine performance and ensure . Avoid unnecessary stopping and brak- the future reliability and economy of your ing. Keep a safe distance behind other new vehicle. vehicles. . Select a gear range suitable to road Failure to follow these recommendations conditions. may result in shortened engine life and . reduced engine performance. Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine idling. . . Avoid driving for long periods at con- Keep your engine tuned up. stant speed, either fast or slow. Do not . Follow the recommended periodic main- run the engine over 4,000 rpm. tenance schedule. . Do not accelerate at full throttle in any . Keep the tires inflated at the correct gear. pressure. Improper tire pressure will . Avoid quick starts. increase wear and waste fuel. . . Avoid hard braking as much as possi- Make sure the front wheels are properly ble. aligned. Improper alignment will cause premature tire wear and lower fuel SSD0336 economy. . Climate control operation lowers fuel The AWD warning light is located in the economy. Use the air conditioner only meter. when necessary. The AWD warning light comes on when the . When cruising at highway speeds, it is ignition switch is pushed to the ON more economical to use the air condi- position. It turns off soon after the engine tioner and leave the windows closed to is started. reduce drag.

5-90 Starting and driving If any malfunction occurs in the Intelligent ground and shift the transmission to the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle AWD system while the engine is running, any drive or reverse position with the speed and have your vehicle checked by the warning light will come on. engine running. Doing so may result in an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible. The warning light may blink rapidly (about drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle . If the warning light remains on after the twice per second) while trying to free a movement which could result in serious above operation, have your vehicle stuck vehicle due to high power train oil vehicle damage or personal injury. checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon temperature. The driving mode may change . Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped as possible. to two-wheel drive. If the warning light vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such . The power train may be damaged if you blinks rapidly during operation, stop the as the dynamometers used by some vehicle with the engine idling in a safe continue driving with the warning light states for emissions testing) or similar blinking. place immediately. Then if the light goes equipment even if the other two wheels off after a while, you can continue driving. are raised off the ground. Make sure that A large difference between the diameters you inform the test facility personnel of front and rear wheels will make the that your vehicle is equipped with AWD warning light blink slowly (about once per before it is placed on a dynamometer. two seconds). Pull off the road in a safe Using the wrong test equipment may area, and idle the engine. Check that all result in drivetrain damage or unex- tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is pected vehicle movement which could correct and tires are not worn. result in serious vehicle damage or If the warning light is blinking after the personal injury. above operation, have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible. CAUTION

WARNING . Do not operate the engine on a free roller when any of the wheels are raised. . For AWD equipped vehicles, do not . If the warning light comes on while attempt to raise two wheels off the driving there may be a malfunction in

Starting and driving 5-91 PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. . HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: *1 Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. . HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: *2 SD1006MA Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the . Safe parking procedures require that curb. WARNING both the parking brake be applied and . HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO the transmission placed into P (Park). CURB: *3 . Do not stop or park the vehicle over Failure to do so could cause the vehicle Turn the wheels toward the side of flammable materials such as dry grass, to move unexpectedly or roll away and the road so the vehicle will move waste paper or rags. They may ignite and result in an accident. away from the center of the road if it cause a fire. moves. . Make sure the automatic transmission . Never leave the engine running while the selector lever has been pushed as far 4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF vehicle is unattended. forward as it can go and cannot be position. . Do not leave children unattended inside moved without depressing the foot the vehicle. They could unknowingly brake pedal. activate switches or controls. Unat- tended children could become involved 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. in serious accidents.

5-92 Starting and driving POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS vehicle at high speeds until the brakes WARNING The brake system has two separate hy- function correctly. draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN If the engine is not running or is turned off you will still have braking at two wheels. while driving, the power assist for the Break in the parking brake shoes whenever steering will not work. Steering will be Vacuum assisted brakes the stopping effect of the parking brake is harder to operate. The brake booster aids braking by using weakened or whenever the parking brake engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, The power assisted steering uses a hy- can stop the vehicle by depressing the in order to assure the best braking draulic pump, driven by the engine, to brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- performance. assist steering. sure on the brake pedal will be required to This procedure is described in the vehicle If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, stop the vehicle and the stopping distance service manual and can be performed by you will still have control of the vehicle. will be longer. an INFINITI retailer. However, much greater steering effort is When the brake pedal is depressed slowly Using the brakes needed, especially in sharp turns and at and firmly, you may hear a clicking noise low speeds. and feel a slight pulsation. This is normal Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal and indicates that the Brake Assist System while driving. This will cause overheating is operating. of the brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster and reduce gas mileage. Wet brakes To help save the brakes and to prevent the When the vehicle is washed or driven brakes from overheating, reduce speed through water, the brakes may get wet. and downshift to a lower gear before going As a result, your braking distance will be down a slope or long grade. Overheated longer and the vehicle may pull to one side brakes may reduce braking performance during braking. and could result in loss of vehicle control. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the

Starting and driving 5-93 BRAKE ASSIST

BRAKE ASSIST . This system will not operate when the vehicle is moving at approximately 20 WARNING When the force applied to the brake pedal MPH (32 km/h) or less. exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is . . While driving on a slippery surface, be activated generating greater braking force The pre-pressure function ceases when careful when braking, accelerating or than a conventional brake booster even the following conditions are met: downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel- with light pedal force. 1) When the driver depresses the erating could cause the wheels to skid accelerator pedal or the brake and result in an accident. pedal. . If the engine is not running or is turned WARNING 2) If the driver does not operate the off while driving, the power assist for accelerator or brake pedal within the brakes will not work. Braking will be The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist approximately 1 second. harder. braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (Intelligent Cruise Control system equipped models) When the Preview Function identifies the need to apply emergency braking by sensing a vehicle ahead in the same lane and the distance and relative speed from it, it applies the brake pre-pressure before the driver depresses the brake pedal and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal free play.

5-94 Starting and driving all times. — Vehicle position in the lane may . As there is a performance limit to the cause the sensor to temporarily not Preview Function, never rely solely on detect a vehicle in the same lane or thissystem.Thissystemdoesnot may detect objects or vehicles in correct careless inattentive or absent- other lanes. minded driving, or overcome poor visi- . When the Preview Function operates, the bility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. brake pedal may move slightly and may Reduce vehicle speed by depressing the make a small noise. This is not a system brake pedal, in order to maintain a safe malfunction. distance between vehicles. . The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather SSD0338 conditions. The Preview Function may not operate properly under the following . The sensor will not detect: conditions. The vehicle is still driveable 1) Pedestrians or objects in the road- under normal conditions and the Brake way Assist will operate. 2) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane — When rain, snow or dirt adhere to 3) Motorcycles traveling offset in the the system sensor travel lane as illustrated — When strong light (for example, at sunrise or sunset) is directly shin- WARNING ing on the front of the vehicle — Winding or hilly roads may cause . This system is only an aid to assist the sensor to temporarily not detect braking operation and is not a collision a vehicle in the same lane or may warning or avoidance device. It is the detect objects or vehicles in other ’ driver s responsibility to stay alert, drive lanes. safely and be in control of the vehicle at

Starting and driving 5-95 How to handle the sensor ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) The sensor for the Preview Function is common with Intelligent Cruise Control and WARNING is located below the front bumper. To keep the Preview Function operating . The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a properly, be sure to observe the following: sophisticated device, but it cannot pre- . Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe vent accidents resulting from careless or with a soft cloth carefully so as not to dangerous driving techniques. It can damage the sensor. help maintain vehicle control during . Do not strike or damage the areas braking on slippery surfaces. Remember around the sensor. Do not touch or that stopping distances on slippery remove the screw located on the surfaces will be longer than on normal SSD0471 sensor. Doing so could cause failure surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis- or malfunction. If the sensor is da- tances may also be longer on rough, Warning light and display maged due to an accident, contact an gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a When the Preview Function is not operating INFINITI retailer. safe distance from the vehicle in front of properly, a chime sounds and the system . Do not attach a sticker (including you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible warning light (orange) will come on. transparent material) or install an for safety. Action to take: accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction. . Tire type and condition may also affect If the warning light comes on, park the braking effectiveness. vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, — When replacing tires, install the restart the engine and resume driving. specified size of tires on all four If the indicator stays on, it may indicate wheels. that the Preview Function is malfunction- — ing (the brake is operative). Although the When installing a spare tire, make Vehicle is still driveable under normal sure that it is the proper size and conditions, have the vehicle checked at type as specified on the Tire and “ an INFINITI retailer. Loading Information label. See Tire 5-96 Starting and driving and loading information label” in Normal operation the “9. Technical and consumer WARNING The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 information” section of this manual. MPH (5 to 10 km/h). Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may — When the ABS senses that one or more For detailed information, see result in increased stopping distances. “Wheels and tires” in the “8. Main- wheels are close to locking up, the actuator tenance and do-it-yourself” section rapidly applies and releases hydraulic of this manual. Self-test feature pressure. This action is similar to pumping The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec- the brakes very quickly. You may feel a The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con- tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a trols the brakes so the wheels do not lock computer. The computer has a built-in noise from under the hood or feel a during hard braking or when braking on diagnostic feature that tests the system vibration from the actuator when it is slippery surfaces. The system detects the each time you start the engine and move operating. This is normal and indicates rotation speed at each wheel and varies the vehicle at a low speed in forward or that the ABS is operating properly. How- the brake fluid pressure to prevent each reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may ever, the pulsation may indicate that road wheel from locking and sliding. By pre- hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsa- conditions are hazardous and extra care is venting each wheel from locking, the tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and required while driving. system helps the driver maintain steering does not indicate a malfunction. If the control and helps to minimize swerving computer senses a malfunction, it switches and spinning on slippery surfaces. the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. Using the system The brake system then operates normally, Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. but without anti-lock assistance. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady If the ABS warning light illuminates during pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The the self-test or while driving, have the ABS will operate to prevent the wheels vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer. from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

Starting and driving 5-97 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system flashes so note the following: force distribution, and the VDC warning uses various sensors to monitor driver . light will not flash. The VDC system is inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain The road may be slippery or the system automatically reset to on when the ignition driving conditions, the VDC system helps may determine some action is required switch is placed in the off position then to perform the following functions. to help keep the vehicle on the steered path. back to the on position. . Controls brake pressure to reduce . You may feel a pulsation in the brake See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn- wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel pedal and hear a noise or vibration ing light” in the “2. Instruments and so power is transferred to a non from under the hood. This is normal controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic slipping drive wheel on the same axle. and indicates that the VDC system is Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “2. . Controls brake pressure and engine working properly. Instruments and controls” section. output to reduce drive wheel slip based . Adjust your speed and driving to the The computer has a built-in diagnostic on vehicle speed (traction control func- road conditions. feature that tests the system each time you tion). See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn- start the engine and move the vehicle . Controls brake pressure at individual ing light” in the “2. Instruments and forward or in reverse at a slow speed. wheels and engine output to help the controls” section. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a driver maintain control of the vehicle in “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the the following conditions: If a malfunction occurs in the system, the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an — VDC warning light illuminates in the understeer (vehicle tends to not indication of a malfunction. follow the steered path despite instrument panel. The VDC system auto- increased steering input) matically turns off. ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL (if so — oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the equipped) to certain road or driving condi- VDC system. The VDC off indicator This system senses driving based on the tions). illuminates to indicate the VDC system is driver’s steering and acceleration/braking The VDC system can help the driver to off. When the VDC switch is used to turn off patterns, and controls brake pressure at maintain control of the vehicle, but it the system, the VDC system still operates individual wheels and engine output to cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by help smooth vehicle response. all driving situations. transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning light flashes if When the drive mode selector switch is set When the VDC system operates, the VDC “ ” this occurs. All other VDC functions are off, to the SPORT mode, the amount of brake warning light in the instrument panel except for rise-up and build-up and brake control provided by active trace control is 5-98 Starting and driving reduced. . The active trace control (if so equipped), erly and the VDC warning light may When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off rise-up and build-up and brake force illuminate. Do not drive on these types the VDC system, the active trace control distribution systems may not be effec- of roads. system is also turned off. tive depending on the driving condition. . When driving on an unstable surface If the active trace control is not functioning Always drive carefully and attentively. such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or properly, the IBA OFF indicator light illumi- . Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. ramp, the VDC warning light may nates in the instrument panel. If suspension parts such as shock illuminate. This is not a malfunction. absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer Restart the engine after driving onto a RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP bars, bushings and wheels are not stable surface. The system gradually adjusts braking INFINITI recommended for your vehicle . If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI power during normal braking to help or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC recommended ones are used, the VDC provide an enhanced brake feel. system may not operate properly. This system may not operate properly and BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION could adversely affect vehicle handling the VDC warning light may illumi- performance, and the VDC warning light nate. During braking while driving through turns, may illuminate. the system optimizes the distribution of . The VDC system is not a substitute for . If brake related parts such as brake force to each of the four wheels depending winter tires or tire chains on a snow pads, rotors and calipers are not INFINITI on the radius of the turn. covered road. recommended or are extremely deterio- rated, the VDC system may not operate WARNING properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate. . The VDC system is designed to help the . If engine control related parts are not driver maintain stability but does not INFINITI recommended or are extremely prevent accidents due to abrupt steering deteriorated, the VDC warning light operation at high speeds or by careless may illuminate. or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce . When driving on extremely inclined vehicle speed and be especially careful surfaces such as higher banked corners, when driving and cornering on slippery the VDC system may not operate prop- surfaces and always drive carefully.

Starting and driving 5-99 HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM 4 WHEEL ACTIVE STEER (4WAS) SYSTEM (if so equipped) The 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system is The hill start assist system automatically an electronically controlled four-wheel WARNING keeps the brakes applied to help prevent steering system. the vehicle from rolling backwards in the . Never rely solely on the hill start assist time it takes the driver to release the brake Depending on the vehicle speed and system to prevent the vehicle from pedal and apply the accelerator when the steering angle, the angles of the front moving backward on a hill. Always drive vehicle is stopped on a hill. and rear wheels are adjusted by the 4WAS system to help improve driving perfor- carefully and attentively. Depress the The hill start assist system will operate mance. brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped automatically under the following condi- on a steep hill. Be especially careful tions: If a malfunction occurs in the system, the when stopped on a hill on frozen or 4WAS function will stop but the ordinary . The transmission is shifted to a forward muddy roads. Failure to prevent the two-wheel steering system will operate or reverse gear. vehicle from rolling backwards may normally. The “4WAS” warning light will . The vehicle is stopped completely on a result in a loss of control of the vehicle illuminate. If the light illuminates while you hill by applying the brake. and possible serious injury or death. are driving, contact an INFINITI retailer for . The hill start assist system is not The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. repair. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to designed to hold the vehicle at a The steering wheel may be slightly turned roll back and the hill start assist system standstill on a hill. Depress the brake even when driving on a straight road due to will stop operating completely. pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a a protection mechanism for the 4WAS steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the The hill start assist system will not operate system. This is not a malfunction. The vehicle to roll backwards and may result when the transmission is shifted to the N steering wheel will return to the normal in a collision or serious personal injury. (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat position after the protection mechanism . The hill start assist system may not and level road. deactivates. prevent the vehicle from rolling back- The protection mechanism activates under wards on a hill under all load or road the following conditions: conditions. Always be prepared to de- . The steering wheel is operated forcibly press the brake pedal to prevent the when it is hard to operate or the tires vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to are blocked by obstacles. do so may result in a collision or serious . personal injury. The steering wheel is continuously operated when the vehicle is parked 5-100 Starting and driving COLD WEATHER DRIVING

or being driven at extremely low speed. FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER . The steering wheel is forcibly turned To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply If the vehicle is to be left outside without beyond its operation limits. deicer through the key hole. If the lock antifreeze, drain the cooling system, in- . The battery voltage is reduced. becomes frozen, heat the key before cluding the engine block. Refill before Repeated steering maneuvers that may inserting it into the key hole or use the operating the vehicle. For details, see activate the protection mechanism will Intelligent Key system. “Engine cooling system” in the “8. Main- ” damage the 4WAS system. ANTIFREEZE tenance and do-it-yourself section. In the winter when it is anticipated that the TIRE EQUIPMENT WARNING outside temperature will drop below 328F SUMMER tires have a tread designed to (08C), check antifreeze to assure proper provide superior performance on dry pave- The 4WAS system, although a sophisticated winter protection. For additional informa- ment. However, the performance of these device, cannot prevent accidents resulting tion, see “Engine cooling system” in the tires will be substantially reduced in snowy from careless or dangerous driving tech- “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- and icy conditions. If you operate your niques. Ultimately the responsibility for tion. vehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITI safety of self and others rests in the hands BATTERY recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or of the driver. Therefore only through atten- ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. tive and careful driving methods can the If the battery is not fully charged during Consult an INFINITI retailer for the tire 4WAS system be fully appreciated and extremely cold weather conditions, the type, size, speed rating and availability safety optimized. battery fluid may freeze and damage the information. battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, For additional traction on icy roads, the battery should be checked regularly. studded tires may be used. However, some For additional information, see “Battery” in U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohi- the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” bit their use. Check local, state and section. provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Starting and driving 5-101 Skid and traction capabilities of studded DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE . Do not use the cruise control on slippery snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be roads. poorer than that of non-studded snow . tires. WARNING Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of Tire chains may be used. For details, see . Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain), the exhaust pipe and from around your “Tire chains” in the “8. Maintenance and very cold snow or ice can be slick and vehicle. do-it-yourself” section of this manual. very hard to drive on. The vehicle will For all-wheel drive have much less traction or “grip” under ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so these conditions. Try to avoid driving on If you install snow tires, they must also be equipped) wet ice until the road is salted or the same size, brand, construction and sanded. Engine block heaters are used to assist in tread pattern on all four wheels. cold temperature starting. . Whatever the condition, drive with cau- SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT tion. Accelerate and slow down with The engine block heater should be used 8 It is recommended that the following items care. If accelerating or downshifting too when the outside temperature is 20 F − 8 be carried in the vehicle during winter: fast, the drive wheels will lose even ( 7 C) or lower. . A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to more traction. To use the engine block heater . remove ice and snow from the windows Allow more stopping distance under 1. Turn the engine off. and wiper blades. these conditions. Braking should be 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine . started sooner than on dry pavement. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under block heater cord. the jack to give it firm support. . Allow greater following distances on 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a . A shovel to dig the vehicle out of slippery roads. grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension snowdrifts. . Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). cord. . Extra window washer fluid to refill the These may appear on an otherwise clear 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground reservoir tank. road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet. not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours,

5-102 Starting and driving ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL

depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

WARNING

. Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2- pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection. . Disconnect and properly store the en- gine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury. SAA3004 . Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10A. This system uses microphones *1 located NOTE: Plug the extension cord into a Ground inside the vehicle to detect engine boom- To operate the active noise control system Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded ing sound. The system then automatically properly: 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper produces a muted engine booming sound extension cord or a grounded outlet can through the speakers *2 and woofer *3 (if . Do not cover the speakers or woofer. result in a fire or electrical shock and so equipped) to reduce engine booming . Do not cover the microphones. cause serious personal injury. sound.

Starting and driving 5-103 . Do not change or modify speakers including the woofer and any audio related parts such as the amplifier. . Do not make any modification including sound deadening or modifications around the microphones or speakers.

5-104 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program ...... 6-2 Push starting ...... 6-10 Emergency engine shut off ...... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats...... 6-11 Flat tire...... 6-2 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 6-2 Towing recommended by INFINITI...... 6-13 Changing a flat tire ...... 6-3 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)..... 6-15 Jump starting...... 6-8 ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

In the event of a roadside emergency, To shut off the engine in an emergency TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- Roadside Assistance Service is available to situation, while driving perform the follow- TEM (TPMS) you. Please refer to your Warranty Informa- ing procedure: This vehicle is equipped with the Tire tion Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside . Rapidly push the push-button ignition Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It Assistance Information Booklet (Canada) switch 3 consecutive times, or monitors tire pressure of all tires except for details. . Push and hold the push-button ignition the spare. When the low tire pressure switch for more than 2 seconds. warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, see “Warning/indicator lights and audible re- minders” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Mon- itoring System (TPMS) ” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates or LOW PRESSURE informa- tion is displayed on the monitor screen while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce

6-2 In case of emergency vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe . Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol location and stop the vehicle as soon as tire sealant into the tires, as this may WARNING possible. Driving with under-inflated cause a malfunction of the tire pressure tires may permanently damage the tires sensors. . Make sure the parking brake is securely and increase the likelihood of tire fail- applied and the automatic transmission into P (Park). ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur CHANGING A FLAT TIRE and may lead to an accident and could . Never change tires when the vehicle is result in serious personal injury. Check If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc- on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust tions below. hazardous. the tire pressure to the recommended Stopping the vehicle . Never change tires if oncoming traffic is COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road close to your vehicle. Wait for profes- and Loading Information label to turn and away from traffic. sional road assistance. the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire 3. Park on a level surface and apply the may be flat. If you have a flat tire, parking brake. Move the selector lever replace it with a spare tire as soon as to the P (Park) position. possible. 4. Turn off the engine. . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, is replaced, the TPMS will not function and to signal professional road assis- and the low tire pressure warning light tance personnel that you need assis- will flash for approximately 1 minute. tance. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as 6. Have all passengers get out of the possible for tire replacement and/or vehicle and stand in a safe place, away system resetting. from traffic and clear of the vehicle. . Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

In case of emergency 6-3 MCE0001A SCE0882

Blocking wheels Getting the spare tire and tools Place suitable blocks *1 at both the front Raise the trunk floor cover *1 using the and back of the wheel diagonally opposite tab *A . the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from Remove jacking tools located inside the moving when it is jacked up. trunk as illustrated. Remove the cap *2 holding the spare tire. WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury. SCE0881

6-4 In case of emergency Jacking up the vehicle and remov- Carefully read the caution label attached to ing the damaged tire the jack body and the following instruc- tions. WARNING

. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. . Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting CE1089-A only your vehicle during a tire change. Jack-up point . Use the correct jack-up points. Never use 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up any other part of the vehicle for jack point as illustrated so the top of the support. jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the . Never jack up the vehicle more than two notches in the front or the rear as necessary. shown. Also fit the groove of the jack . Never use blocks on or under the jack. head between the notches as shown. . Do not start or run the engine while The jack should be used on level firm vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause ground. the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differ- entials. . Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

In case of emergency 6-5 SCE0504 SCE0661

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns Installing the spare tire by turning counterclockwise with the The T-type spare tire is designed for wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the emergency use. (See specific instructions wheel nuts until the tire is off the under the heading “Wheels and tires” in ground. the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” 3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire section.) clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface securely hold the jack lever and rod between the wheel and hub. with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and remove the tire. tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence as illustrated (*1 , *2 , *3 , *4 , *5 ) until they are tight.

6-6 In case of emergency 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire is recommended that wheel nuts be touches the ground. Then, with the tightened to specifications at each wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel lubrication interval. nuts securely in the sequence as . Adjust tire pressure to the COLD illustrated. Lower the vehicle comple- pressure. tely. COLD pressure: After the vehicle has been parked WARNING for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). . Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tigh- tened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to COLD tire pressures are shown on become loose or come off. This could the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center cause an accident. SCE0883 pillar. . Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking to become loose. equipment in the vehicle. 6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk . Retighten the wheel nuts when the floor carpeting over the damaged tire. vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, 7. Close the trunk. etc.). WARNING . As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque . Always make sure that the spare tire and with a torque wrench. jacking equipment are properly secured Wheel nut tightening torque: after use. Such items can become 80 ft-lb (108 N·m) dangerous projectiles in an accident or The wheel nuts must be kept tigh- sudden stop. tened to specification at all times. It In case of emergency 6-7 JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, . The T-type spare tire and small size the instructions and precautions below . Whenever working on or near a battery, spare tire are designed for emergency must be followed. always wear suitable eye protectors (for use. See specific instructions under the example, goggles or industrial safety heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8. spectacles) and remove rings, metal Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. WARNING bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. . If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail- If done incorrectly, jump starting can . Do not attempt to jump start a frozen able. Please see your Warranty Information lead to a battery explosion, resulting in battery. It could explode and cause Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card severe injury or death. It could also serious injury. for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or damage your vehicle. . Your vehicle has an automatic engine Warranty Information Booklet (Canada). . Explosive hydrogen gas is always pre- cooling fan. It could come on at any time. sent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep Keep hands and other objects away from all sparks and flames away from the it. battery. . Do not allow battery fluid to come into If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail- contact with eyes, skin, clothing or able. Please see your Warranty Information painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card corrosive sulphuric acid solution which for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or can cause severe burns. If the fluid Warranty Information Booklet (Canada). should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. . Keep the battery out of the reach of children. . The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

6-8 In case of emergency WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle *A , position the two vehicles (*A and *B ) to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. SCE0886 2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector VK56VD engine lever to the P (Park) position. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly wrung out moist cloth *C to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated (*1 ? *2 ? *3 ? *4 ). For models with a steering wheel lock mechanism: If the battery is discon- nected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and cannot be turned. SCE0884 Supply power using jumper cables before pushing the ignition switch VQ37VHR engine In case of emergency 6-9 PUSH STARTING

Do not attempt to start the engine by and disengaging the steering lock. 7. After starting your engine, carefully pushing. disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable (*4 ? *3 ? *2 ? CAUTION *1 ). CAUTION 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). . Always connect positive (+) to positive Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to . Automatic transmission models cannot (+) and negative (−) to body ground (as cover the vent holes as it may be be push-started or tow-started. Attempt- illustrated) − not to the battery. contaminated with corrosive acid. ing to do so may cause transmission . Make sure the jumper cables do not 9. Put the battery cover on. damage. touch moving parts in the engine com- . Three way catalyst equipped models partment and that clamps do not contact should not be started by pushing since any other metal. the three way catalyst may be damaged. . 5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle Never try to start the vehicle by towing *A and let it run for a few minutes. it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide 6. Keep the engine speed of the booster with the tow vehicle. vehicle *A at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail- jump started *B . able. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card CAUTION for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Informa- Do not keep the starter motor engaged for tion Booklet (Canada). more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before trying again.

6-10 In case of emergency IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

speed. CAUTION 3. If engine overheating is caused by WARNING climbing a long hill on a hot day, run . Do not continue to drive if your vehicle the engine at a fast idle (approximately Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, overheats. Doing so could cause engine 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge jewelry or clothing to come into contact damage or a vehicle fire. indication returns to normal. with, or get caught in, engine belts or the . engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan To avoid the danger of being scalded, 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen can start at any time. never remove the radiator cap while the for steam or coolant escaping from the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap radiator before opening the hood. (If is removed, pressurized hot water will steam or coolant is escaping, turn off 7. After the engine cools down, check the spurt out, possibly causing serious the engine.) Do not open the hood coolant level in the reservoir tank with injury. further until no steam or coolant can be the engine running. Add coolant to the . Do not open the hood if steam is coming seen. reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the nearest INFINITI out. 5. Open the engine hood. retailer. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail- an extremely high temperature gauge WARNING able. Please see your Warranty Information reading), or if you feel a lack of engine Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take If steam or water is coming from the engine, for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or the following steps: stand clear to prevent getting burned. Warranty & Roadside Assistance Informa- 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, tion Booklet (Canada). apply the parking brake and move the 6. Visually check drive belts for damage or selector lever to the P (Park) position. looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and Do not stop the engine. radiator should not leak water. If cool- 2. Turn off the climate control. Open all ant is leaking or the cooling fan does the windows, move the heater or air not run, stop the engine. conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high

In case of emergency 6-11 TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro- vincial in Canada) and local regulations for used. towing must be followed. Incorrect towing . Always attach safety chains before tow- equipment could damage your vehicle. ing. Towing instructions are available from an INFINITI retailer. Local service operators are For information about towing your vehicle familiar with the applicable laws and behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see procedures for towing. To assure proper “Flat towing” in the “9. Technical and towing and to prevent accidental damage consumer information” section of this to your vehicle, INFINITI recommends that manual. you have a service operator tow your If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail- vehicle. It is advisable to have the service able. Please see your Warranty Information operator carefully read the following pre- Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card cautions. for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Informa- WARNING tion Booklet (Canada).

. Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. . Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

. When towing, make sure that the trans- mission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be

6-12 In case of emergency tion. This may damage the steering lock mechanism.

SCE0788 Two-wheel drive models TOWING RECOMMENDED BY INFINITI Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models and expensive damage to the transmis- INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be sion. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the with the front wheels raised, always use ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed towing dollies under the rear wheels. truck as illustrated. . When towing rear wheel drive models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: Push the ignition CAUTION switch to the ACC or ON position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight- . Never tow automatic transmission mod- ahead position with a rope or similar els with the rear wheels on the ground device. For models with a steering wheel or four wheels on the ground (forward or lock mechanism: Never secure the steer- backward), as this may cause serious ing wheel by selecting the LOCK posi- In case of emergency 6-13 SCE0488 All-wheel drive models Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow Intelligent AWD models with any SCE0885 of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.

6-14 In case of emergency VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck Rear: Rocking a stuck vehicle vehicle) Do not use the tie down hook *2 for If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, towing or vehicle recovery. etc., use the following procedure: WARNING 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control CAUTION (VDC) system. . Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. 2. Make sure the area in front and behind . Do not spin your tires at high speed. This . Tow chains or cables must be attached the vehicle is clear of obstructions. could cause them to explode and result only to the vehicle recovery hooks or 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle main structural members of the vehicle. clear an area around the front tires. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be could also overheat and be damaged. 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and damaged. backward. . Pulling a stuck vehicle Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free . Shift back and forth between R a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, (reverse) and D (drive). . etc., use a tow strap or other device Never tow a vehicle using the vehicle tie . Apply the accelerator as little as designed specifically for vehicle recovery. downs or recovery hooks. possible to maintain the rocking Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc- . Always pull the cable straight out from motion. tions for the recovery device. the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the . Release the accelerator pedal before vehicle at an angle. shifting between R and D. Front: . Pulling devices should be routed so they . Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH 1. Remove the cover with a suitable tool. do not touch any part of the suspension, (55 km/h). 2. Securely install the vehicle recovery steering, brake or cooling systems. 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a hook *1 stored with jacking tools as . Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas few tries, contact a professional towing illustrated. Attach the tow strap to the straps are not recommended for use in service to remove the vehicle. recovery hook. vehicle towing or recovery. Make sure that the hook is properly secured in the original place after use.

In case of emergency 6-15 MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency 7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ...... 7-2 Cleaning interior ...... 7-4 Washing...... 7-2 Air fresheners...... 7-5 Waxing...... 7-2 Moonroof sunshade...... 7-5 Removing spots...... 7-3 Floor mats ...... 7-5 Underbody ...... 7-3 Seat belts...... 7-6 Glass...... 7-3 Corrosion protection...... 7-7 Wheels...... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to Chrome parts ...... 7-4 vehicle corrosion ...... 7-7 Tire dressing ...... 7-4 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion ...... 7-7 To protect your vehicle from corrosion ...... 7-7 CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of WASHING must be taken when removing caked-on your vehicle, it is important to take proper Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge dirt or other foreign substances so the care of it. and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle paint surface is not scratched or da- To protect the paint surface, wash your thoroughly using a mild soap, a special maged. vehicle as soon as you can: vehicle soap or general purpose dishwash- . after a rainfall to prevent possible ing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean damage from acid rain (never hot) water. water. . after driving on coastal roads Inside flanges, seams and folds on the . when contaminants such as soot, bird CAUTION doors, hatches and hood are particularly droppings, tree sap, metal particles or vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly bugs get on the paint surface . Do not use car washes that use acid in cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in . when dust or mud builds up on the the detergent. Some car washes, espe- the lower edge of the door are open. Spray surface cially brushless ones, use some acid for water under the body and in the wheel Whenever possible, store or park your cleaning. The acid may react with some wells to loosen the dirt and wash away vehicle inside a garage or in a covered plastic vehicle components, causing road salt. area. them to crack. This could affect their When it is necessary to park outside, park appearance, and also could cause them Avoid leaving water spots on the paint in a shady area or protect the vehicle with not to function properly. Always check surface by using a damp chamois to dry a body cover. with your car wash to confirm that acid the vehicle. is not used. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface WAXING . Do not wash the vehicle with strong when putting on or removing the body Regular waxing protects the paint surface household soap, strong chemical deter- cover. and helps retain new vehicle appearance. gents, gasoline or solvents. Polishing is recommended to remove built- . Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- up wax residue and to avoid a weathered light or while the vehicle body is hot, as appearance before reapplying wax. the surface may become water-spotted. An INFINITI retailer can assist you in . Avoid using tight-napped or rough choosing the proper product. cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

7-2 Appearance and care . Wax your vehicle only after a thorough GLASS . INFINITI recommends that the road washing. Follow the instructions sup- Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and wheels be waxed to protect against plied with the wax. dust film from the glass surfaces. It is road salt in areas where it is used . Do not use a wax containing any normal for glass to become coated with a during winter. abrasives, cutting compounds or clea- film after the vehicle is parked in the hot ners that may damage the vehicle sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will CAUTION finish. easily remove this film. Machine compound or aggressive polish- Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish the wheels. may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. CAUTION REMOVING SPOTS When cleaning the inside of the windows, Aluminum alloy wheels do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant clea- insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible a mild soap solution, especially during ners. They could damage the electrical from the paint surface to avoid lasting winter months in areas where road salt is conductors, radio antenna elements or rear damage or staining. Special cleaning used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not window defroster elements. products are available at an INFINITI removed. retailer or any automotive accessory stores. WHEELS CAUTION UNDERBODY Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle In areas where road salt is used in winter, to maintain their appearance. Follow the directions below to avoid stain- the underbody must be cleaned regularly. . Clean the inner side of the wheels when ing or discoloring the wheels: This will prevent dirt and salt from building the wheel is changed or the underside . Do not use a cleaner that uses strong up and causing the acceleration of corro- of the vehicle is washed. acid or alkali contents to clean the sion on the underbody and suspension. . Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents wheels. Before the winter period and again in the or corrosion. Such damage may cause . spring, the underseal must be checked loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire Do not apply wheel cleaners to the and, if necessary, re-treated. bead. wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as

Appearance and care 7-3 CLEANING INTERIOR

Occasionally remove loose dust from the . Wipe off excess tire dressing using a ambient temperature. interior trim, plastic parts and seats using dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing . a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Rinse the wheel to completely remove is completely removed from the tire Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a the cleaner within 15 minutes after the tread/grooves. cleaner is applied. clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap . Allow the tire dressing to dry as solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft recommended by tire dressing manu- cloth. CHROME PARTS facturer. Regular care and cleaning is required in Clean chrome parts regularly with a non- order to maintain the appearance of the abrasive chrome polish to maintain the leather. finish. Before using any fabric protector, read the TIRE DRESSING manufacturer’s recommendations. Some INFINITI does not recommend the use of fabric protectors contain chemicals that tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a may stain or bleach the seat material. coating to the tires to help reduce dis- Use a cloth dampened only with water, to coloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is clean the meter and gauge lens. applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This com- pound may come off the tire while driving WARNING and stain the vehicle paint. If you choose to use a tire dressing, take Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot the following precautions: steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification . Use a water-based tire dressing. The sensors. This can also affect the operation coating on the tire dissolves more of the air bag system and result in serious easily with an oil-based tire dressing. personal injury. . Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be diffi- cult to remove).

7-4 Appearance and care an interior surface. onto the surface to remove as much CAUTION . Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip dampness as possible and then let air on the vents. These products can cause dry. . Never use benzine, thinner, or any immediate damage and discoloration . Clean oil based stains by patting the similar material. when spilled on interior surfaces. surface with a clean soft cloth dampened . Small dirt particles can be abrasive and Carefully read and follow the manufac- in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth ’ damaging to the leather surfaces and turer s instructions before using air fresh- onto the surface to remove as much should be removed promptly. Do not use eners. dampness as possible and then let air saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, MOONROOF SUNSHADE dry. cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may The moonroof sunshade is made from a damage the leather’s natural finish. suede material. FLOOR MATS . Only use fabric protectors approved by Clean the sunshade material as follows: INFINITI. WARNING . Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on CAUTION meter or gauge lens covers. It may To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision or injury: damage the lens cover. To help prevent damaging the sunshade while cleaning: . NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front AIR FRESHENERS . Do not rub the material with a cloth. position. Most air fresheners use a solvent that Doing so can damage the surface of the . could affect the vehicle interior. If you use material or cause a stain to spread. Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your an air freshener, take the following pre- . Never use benzine, thinner or any similar vehicle model. See your INFINITI retailer cautions: chemical to clean the suede. This may for more information. . Hanging-type air fresheners can cause discolor the sunshade and damage the . permanent discoloration when they surface. Properly position the mats in the floor- well using the floor mat positioning aid. contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place . Clean water based stains by patting the See “Floor mat positioning aid” later in the air freshener in a location that surface with a clean soft cloth dampened this section. allows it to hang free and not contact in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth Appearance and care 7-5 The use of INFINITI floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

SAI0050 SAI0051 Front (example) Bracket positions Floor mat positioning aid The illustration shows the location of the floor mat brackets. This model includes front floor mat brack- ets to act as floor mat positioning aid. SEAT BELTS INFINITI floor mats have been specially The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping designed for your vehicle model. The front them with a sponge dampened in a mild floor mats have grommet holes in them. To soap solution. Allow the belts to dry install, simply position the mat by placing completely before using them. the floor mat bracket through the floor mat See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, grommet hole while centering the mat in seat belts and supplemental restraint the floor pan contour. system” section. Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned.

7-6 Appearance and care CORROSION PROTECTION

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI- Temperature WARNING BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION A temperature increase will accelerate the . The accumulation of moisture-retaining rate of corrosion to those parts which are Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the dirt and debris in body panel sections, not well ventilated. retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemi- cavities, and other areas. cal solvents to clean the seat belts, since . Damage to paint and other protective Air pollution these materials may severely weaken the coatings caused by gravel and stone Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in seat belt webbing. chips or minor traffic accidents. the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU- Road salt will also accelerate the disinte- ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION gration of paint surfaces. Moisture TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on CORROSION the vehicle body underside can accelerate . Wash and wax your vehicle often to corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry keep the vehicle clean. completely inside the vehicle, and should . Always check for minor damage to the be removed for drying to avoid floor panel paint and repair it as soon as possible. corrosion. . Keep drain holes at the bottom of the Relative humidity doors open to avoid water accumula- tion. Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of . high relative humidity, especially those Check the underbody for accumulation areas where the temperatures stay above of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash freezing where atmospheric pollution ex- with water as soon as possible. ists, or where road salt is used.

Appearance and care 7-7 CAUTION

. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner. . Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult an INFINITI retailer.

7-8 Appearance and care 8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirement ...... 8-2 Drive belts ...... 8-21 Scheduled maintenance ...... 8-2 Spark plugs ...... 8-21 General maintenance...... 8-2 Replacing spark plugs ...... 8-22 Where to go for service ...... 8-2 Air cleaner ...... 8-22 General maintenance...... 8-3 Windshield wiper blades...... 8-24 Explanation of maintenance items...... 8-3 Cleaning ...... 8-24 Maintenance precautions...... 8-5 Replacing...... 8-24 Engine compartment check locations ...... 8-7 Brakes ...... 8-25 VK56VD engine ...... 8-7 Self-adjusting brakes...... 8-25 VQ37VHR engine ...... 8-9 Brake pad wear warning ...... 8-25 Engine cooling system...... 8-11 Fuses ...... 8-26 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-12 Engine compartment...... 8-26 Changing engine coolant...... 8-12 Passenger compartment...... 8-28 Engine oil...... 8-13 Intelligent Key battery replacement ...... 8-29 Checking engine oil level...... 8-13 Lights...... 8-31 Changing engine oil and filter ...... 8-13 Headlights ...... 8-31 Automatic transmission fluid ...... 8-16 Exterior and interior lights ...... 8-32 Power steering fluid...... 8-16 Wheels and tires...... 8-34 Brake fluid...... 8-17 Tire pressure ...... 8-34 Brake fluid ...... 8-17 Tire labeling ...... 8-38 Window washer fluid ...... 8-18 Types of tires...... 8-40 Battery ...... 8-19 Tire chains...... 8-41 Jump starting ...... 8-20 Changing wheels and tires...... 8-41 Variable voltage control system ...... 8-20 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT

Your new INFINITI has been designed to GENERAL MAINTENANCE best job to meet the maintenance require- have minimum maintenance requirements — General maintenance includes those items ments on your vehicle in a reliable and with long service intervals to save you both which should be checked during normal economical way. time and money. However, some day-to- day-to-day operation. They are essential for day and regular maintenance is essential proper vehicle operation. It is your respon- to maintain your INFINITI’s fine mechanical sibility to perform these procedures reg- condition, as well as its emission and ularly as prescribed. engine performance. Performing general maintenance checks It is the owner’s responsibility to make requires minimal mechanical skill and only sure that the scheduled maintenance, as a few general automotive tools. well as general maintenance, is performed. These checks or inspections can be done As the vehicle owner, you are the only one by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you who can ensure that your vehicle receives prefer, an INFINITI retailer. the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the For your convenience, both required and systems checked and serviced by an optional scheduled maintenance items are INFINITI retailer. describedandlistedinyour“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”. You must INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe- refer to that guide to ensure that necessary cialists and are kept up to date with the maintenance is performed on your INFINITI latest service information through techni- at regular intervals. cal bulletins, service tips, and in-retailer- ship information systems. They are completely qualified to work on INFINITI vehicles before work begins. You can be confident that an INFINITI retailer’s service department performs the

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself GENERAL MAINTENANCE

During the normal day-to-day operation of is released. cap when the tires are replaced due to the vehicle, general maintenance should wear or age. be performed regularly as prescribed in When driving in areas using road salt or this section. If you detect any unusual other corrosive materials, check lubrication Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to frequently. vehicle should pull to either side while check for the cause or have an INFINITI Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular driving on a straight and level road, or if retailer do it promptly. In addition, you basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, should notify an INFINITI retailer if you lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and there may be a need for wheel alignment. think that repairs are required. other lights are all operating properly and If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at When performing any checks or mainte- installed securely. Also check headlight normal highway speeds, wheel balancing nance work, see “Maintenance precau- aim. may be needed. tions” later in this section. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- For additional information regarding tires, ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE missing, and check for any loose wheel (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) ITEMS nuts. Tighten if necessary. in the INFINITI Warranty Information Book- Additional information on the following Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated let. items with “*” is found later in this every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). If your Windshield: Clean the windshield on a section. vehicle is equipped with different sized regular basis. Check the windshield at Outside the vehicle tires in the front and rear, tires cannot be least every six months for cracks or other rotated. damage. Have a damaged windshield The maintenance items listed here should repaired by a qualified repair facility. be performed from time to time, unless Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge otherwise specified. often and always prior to long distance Windshield wiper blades*: Check for trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Doors and engine hood: Check that all all tires, including the spare, to the doors and the engine hood, operate pressure specified. Check carefully for Inside the vehicle properly. Also ensure that all latches lock damage, cuts or excessive wear. The maintenance items listed here should securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch be checked on a regular basis, such as pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace the TPMS when performing periodic maintenance, sure that the secondary latch keeps the cleaning the vehicle, etc. hood from opening when the primary latch transmitter grommet seal, valve core and Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3 Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. smooth operation and make sure the pedal fraying, wear or damage. It should be between the MAX and MIN does not catch or require uneven effort. Seats: Check seat position controls such as lines. Vehicles operated in high tempera- Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to tures or under severe condition require Automatic transmission P (Park) mechan- ensure they operate smoothly and that all frequent checks of the battery fluid level. ism: On a fairly steep hill, check that your latches lock securely in every position. Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the vehicle is held securely with the selector Check that the head restraints move up brake fluid level is between the MAX and leverintheP(Park)positionwithout and down smoothly and that the locks (if MIN lines on the reservoir. applying any brakes. so equipped) hold securely in all latched Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth positions. level when the engine is cold. operation. If the brake pedal suddenly Steering wheel: Check for changes in the Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt goes down further than normal, the pedal steering conditions, such as excessive free is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take play, hard steering or strange noises. Engine oil level*: Check the level after longer to stop, see an INFINITI retailer Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that parking the vehicle on a level spot and immediately. Keep the floor mat away from all warning lights and chimes are operating turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 the pedal. properly. minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull Windshield defroster: Check that the air pan. the vehicle to one side when applied. comes out of the defroster outlets properly Exhaust system: Make sure there are no Parking brake: Check the parking brake and in sufficient quantity when operating loose supports, cracks or holes. If the operation regularly. The vehicle should be the heater or air conditioner. sound of the exhaust seems unusual or securely held on a fairly steep hill with only Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that there is a smell of exhaust fumes, im- the parking brake applied. If the parking the wipers and washer operate properly mediately have the exhaust system in- brake needs adjusted, see an INFINITI and that the wipers do not streak. spected by an INFINITI retailer. (See retailer. “Precautions when starting and driving” Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat Under the hood and vehicle in the “5. Starting and driving” section for belt system (for example, buckles, an- The maintenance items listed here should exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).) chors, adjuster and retractors) operate be checked periodically (for example, each Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for properly and smoothly, and are installed time you check the engine oil or refuel). fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or main- vehicle has been parked for a while. Water . It is advisable to secure or remove any tenance work on your vehicle, always take dripping from the air conditioner after use loose clothing and remove any jewelry, care to prevent serious accidental injury to is normal. If you should notice any leaks or such as rings, watches, etc. before yourself or damage to the vehicle. The if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the working on your vehicle. cause and have it corrected immediately. following are general precautions which should be closely observed. . Always wear eye protection whenever Power steering fluid level* and lines: you work on your vehicle. Check the level when the fluid is cold, . with the engine off. Check the lines for WARNING Ifyoumustruntheengineinan proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for . Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply exhaust gases to escape. radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, the parking brake securely and block the . leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. wheels to prevent the vehicle from Never get under the vehicle while it is Make sure the hoses have no cracks, moving. Move the selector lever to P supported only by a jack. If it is deformation, rot or loose connections. (Park). necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Underbody: The underbody is frequently . Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF . exposed to corrosive substances such as or LOCK position when performing any Keep smoking materials, flame and those used on icy roads or to control dust. parts replacement or repairs. sparks away from fuel tank and the battery. It is very important to remove these . Never connect or disconnect the battery . substances, otherwise rust will form on or any transistorized component while Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the ignition switch is in the ON position. matic engine cooling fan. It may come on the exhaust system. At the end of winter, at any time without warning, even if the . Never leave the engine or automatic the underbody should be thoroughly ignition key is in the OFF position and transmission related component har- flushed with plain water, being careful to the engine is not running. To avoid nesses disconnected while the ignition clean those areas where mud and dirt may injury, always disconnect the negative switch is in the ON position. accumulate. For additional information, battery cable before working near the see “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appear- . If you must work with the engine fan. ance and care” section. running, keep your hands, clothing, hair . The fuel filter or fuel lines should be and tools away from moving fans, belts Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there serviced by an INFINITI retailer because and any other moving parts. is adequate fluid in the reservoir. the fuel lines are under high pressure Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5 even when the engine is off. doubt about any servicing, we recommend that it be done by an INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

. Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. . Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also available. (See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” sec- tion.) You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

VK56VD ENGINE To remove the engine compartment cover, unhook the clips *1 located as illustrated. Loosen the bolts *A and then pull the cover upward.

SDI2569

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7 1. Battery 2. Fuse/fusible link holder 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Window washer fluid reservoir 6. Power steering fluid reservoir 7. Air cleaner 8. Radiator filler cap 9. Engine coolant reservoir 10. Engine oil dipstick 11. Drive belts 12. Fuse/fusible link holder

SDI2538

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself SDI2551 VQ37VHR ENGINE To remove the engine compartment cover, unhook the clips located as illustrated.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9 1. Battery 2. Fuse/fusible link holder 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Window washer fluid reservoir 6. Power steering fluid reservoir 7. Air cleaner 8. Radiator filler cap 9. Engine coolant reservoir 10. Engine oil dipstick 11. Drive belts 12. Fuse/fusible link holder

SDI2537

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% CAUTION Coolant (green), or the use of non- Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool- distilled water will reduce the life ant (blue) and 50% water to provide year- . When adding or replacing coolant, be expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. round anti-freeze and coolant protection. sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Refer to the INFINITI Service and Main- The anti-freeze solution contains rust and Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva- tenance Guide for more details. corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine lent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti- . Never use any additives in the coolant cooling system additives are not neces- freeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to such as radiator sealer in the cooling sary. provide antifreeze protection to −348F system. This may cause damage to (−378C). If additional freeze protection is electrical equipment such as the motor needed due to weather where you WARNING and inverter, and also to engine and operate your vehicle, add Genuine transmission. . Never remove the radiator cap when the NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant engine is hot. Wait until the engine and (blue) concentrate following the direc- radiator cool down. Serious burns could tions on the container. If an equivalent be caused by high pressure fluid escap- coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long ing from the radiator. See precautions in Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, ’ “If your vehicle overheats” in the “6. In follow the coolant manufacture s instruc- case of emergency” section of this tions to maintain minimum antifreeze − 8 − 8 manual. protection to 34 F( 37 C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other . The radiator is equipped with a pressure than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti- type radiator cap. To prevent engine freeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage, use only a genuine NISSAN damage the engine cooling system. radiator cap. . The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) , including

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11 If the cooling system requires coolant Engine coolant must be disposed of frequently, have it checked by an INFINITI properly. Check your local regulations. retailer. CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT Major cooling system repairs should be performed by an INFINITI retailer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat- ing.

SDI2043 WARNING CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL . Check the coolant level in the reservoir To avoid the danger of being scalded, when the engine is cold. If the coolant never change the coolant when the level is below MIN *2 , open the reservoir engine is hot. tank cap and add coolant up to the MAX *1 . Never remove the radiator cap when the level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check engine is hot. Serious burns could be the coolant level in the radiator when the caused by high pressure fluid escaping engine is cold. If there is insufficient from the radiator. coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator . Avoid direct skin contact with used with coolant up to the filler opening and coolant. If skin contact is made, wash also add it to the reservoir tank up to the thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as MAX level *1 . soon as possible. Tighten the cap securely after adding . Keep coolant out of reach of children and engine coolant. pets.

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ENGINE OIL

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL such damage is not covered by warranty. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER 2. Run the engine until it reaches operat- ing temperature. Vehicle set-up 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and minutes for the oil to drain back into apply the parking brake. the oil pan. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operat- 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. ing temperature. Reinsert it all the way. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 5. Remove the dipstick again and check 15 minutes. SDI2541 the oil level. It should be within the 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a VK56VD engine range *1 . If the oil level is below *2 , suitable floor jack and safety jack remove the oil filler cap and pour stands. recommended oil through the opening. . Place the safety jack stands under Do not overfill *3 . the vehicle jack-up points. 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. . A suitable adapter should be at- It is normal to add some oil between oil tached to the jack stand saddle. maintenance intervals or during the break- 5. Remove the plastic engine undercover. in period, depending on the severity of . Remove the small plastic clip at the operating conditions. center point of the undercover. . Then remove the other bolts that CAUTION hold the undercover in place.

Oil level should be checked regularly. SDI2045 Operating the engine with an insufficient VQ37VHR engine amount of oil can damage the engine, and

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13 CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

SDI2543 SDI2320 VK56VD engine — 2WD models VK56VD engine — AWD models

SDI2335 SDI2047 VQ37VHR engine — 2WD models VQ37VHR engine — AWD models 8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself “ Engine oil and filter engine. Failure to do so could lead to engine See Capacities and recommended ” “ 1. Place a large drain pan under the drain damage. fuel/lubricants in the 9. Technical ” plug. and consumer information section for drain and refill capacity. The drain and 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with 2. Remove the oil filler cap. refill capacity depends on the oil clean engine oil. 3. Remove the drain plug *1 with a temperature and drain time. Use these wrench and completely drain the oil. 7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a specifications for reference only. Al- slight resistance is felt, then tighten ways use the dipstick to determine the additionally more than 2/3 turn. CAUTION proper amount of oil in the engine. Oil filter tightening torque: 10.Start the engine and check for leakage 11 to 15 ft-lb around the drain plug and the oil filter. Be careful not to burn yourself, as the (14.7 to 20.5 N·m) engine oil is hot. Correct as required. 8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with 11.Turn the engine off and wait more than . Waste oil must be disposed of a new washer. Securely tighten the 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the properly. drain plug with a wrench. dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. . Check your local regulations. Drain plug tightening torque: After the operation 4. (Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the 22 to 29 ft-lb 1. Install the engine undercover into engine oil filter change is needed.) (29 to 39 N·m) position as the following steps. Loosen the oil filter *2 with an oil filter Do not use excessive force. a. Pull the center of the small plastic wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning 9. Refill engine with recommended oil and clip out. it by hand. install the oil filler cap securely. b. Hold the engine undercover into 5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting position. surface with a clean rag. CAUTION c. Insert the clip through the under- cover into the hole in the frame, then CAUTION The dipstick must be inserted in place to push the center of the clip in to lock prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole the clip in place. Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket while filling the engine with oil. remaining on the mounting surface of the Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID

When checking or replacement is required, d. Install the other bolts that hold the we recommend an INFINITI retailer for undercover in place. Be careful not servicing. to strip the bolts or over-tighten them. 2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the CAUTION ground. . 3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do not mix with other fluids. . Using automatic transmission fluid other WARNING than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and . Prolonged and repeated contact with automatic transmission durability, and used engine oil may cause skin cancer. may damage the automatic transmis- SDI1765A . Try to avoid direct skin contact with used sion, which is not covered by the INFINITI oil. If skin contact is made, wash new vehicle limited warranty. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner The fluid level should be checked using the as soon as possible. HOT range (*1 : HOT MAX., *2 : HOT MIN.) . Keep used engine oil out of reach of at fluid temperatures of 122 to 1768F (50 children. to 808C) or using the COLD range (*3 : COLD MAX., *4 : COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 32 to 868F(0to308C). If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Re- move the cap and fill through the opening.

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself BRAKE FLUID

For further brake fluid information, see “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubri- CAUTION cants” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. . Do not overfill. . Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. WARNING

. Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability. SDI2025 . Clean the filler cap before removing. . Brake fluid is poisonous and should be BRAKE FLUID stored carefully in marked containers out Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the of the reach of children. fluid is below the MIN line *2 or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or CAUTION equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line *1 . If fluid must be added frequently, the Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. system should be checked by an INFINITI This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, retailer. wash the surface with water.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17 WINDOW WASHER FLUID

opening. into the window washer reservoir tank. Add a washer solvent to the washer for Do not use the window washer reservoir better cleaning. In the winter season, add a tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the and water. manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio. Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of window washer fluid. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent. SDI2544 CAUTION WARNING . Do not substitute engine anti-freeze Antifreeze is poisonous and should be coolant for window washer solution. This stored carefully in marked containers out may result in damage to the paint. of the reach of children. . Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at Fill the window washer fluid reservoir full strength. Some methyl alcohol periodically. Add window washer fluid based washer fluid concentrates may when the low window washer fluid warning permanently stain the grille if spilled appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal while filling the window washer reser- display. voir tank. To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, . Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour water to the manufacturer’srecom- the window washer fluid into the tank mended levels before pouring the fluid 8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself BATTERY

. Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of . When working on or near a battery, baking soda and water. always wear suitable eye protection and . Make certain the terminal connections remove all jewelry. are clean and securely tightened. . Battery posts, terminals and related . If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 accessories contain lead and lead com- days or longer, disconnect the negative pounds. Wash hands after handling. (−) battery terminal cable to prevent . Keep the battery out of the reach of discharging it. children.

WARNING

. Do not expose the battery to flames or DI0137MA electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener- ated by the battery is explosive. Do not Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove allow battery fluid to contact your skin, the battery cover if it is necessary). It eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After should be between the UPPER LEVEL *1 touching a battery or battery cap, do not and LOWER LEVEL *2 lines. touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash If it is necessary to add fluid, add only your hands. If the acid contacts your distilled water to bring the level to the eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush indicator in each filler opening. Do not with water for at least 15 minutes and overfill. seek medical attention. . Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19 VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump CAUTION starting” in the “6. In case of emergency” . section. If the engine does not start by Do not ground accessories directly to the jump starting, the battery may have to be battery terminal. Doing so will bypass replaced. Contact an INFINITI retailer. the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. . Use electrical accessories with the en- gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system mea- SDI1480C sures the amount of electrical discharge 1. Remove the cell plugs *A . from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator. 2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL *1 line. If the side of the battery is not clear, check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell; the condition *1 indicates OK and the conditions *2 needs more to be added. 3. Tighten cell plugs *A . Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS

1. Power steering fluid pump 2. Alternator WARNING 3. Crankshaft pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor Be sure the engine and the ignition switch 5. Drive belt auto-tensioner are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely. WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or CAUTION LOCK position before servicing drive belts. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can SDI2545 damage the spark plugs. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of VK56VD engine unusual wear, cuts, fraying or loosen- ess. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by an INFINITI retailer. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule in your “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”.

SDI2119 VQ37VHR engine

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21 AIR CLEANER

Always replace spark plugs with recom- mended or equivalent ones.

SDI2020

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS If replacement is required, see an INFINITI retailer for servicing. Iridium-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace the iridium- tipped spark plugs as frequently as the SDI2549 conventional type spark plugs since they VK56VD engine will last much longer. Follow the main- tenance schedule in “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”, but do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself nance intervals. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

. Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. . Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury. SDI2546 VQ37VHR engine Remove the retainers *1 as illustrated and pull out the filter element *2 . The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See “INFINITI Ser- vice and Maintenance Guide” for mainte-

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or wind- shield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear SDI2048 water. If your windshield is still not clear 3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the after cleaning the blades and using the REPLACING wiper arm until a click sounds. wiper, replace the blades. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. 4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is Worn windshield wiper blades can damage Before replacing the wiper blades, the in the groove. the windshield and impair driver vision. wiper should be in the fully up position to avoid scratching the engine hood or damaging the wiper arm. To pull up the CAUTION wiper arm, see “Windshield wiper and ” “ washer switch in the 2. Instruments . After wiper blade replacement, return ” and controls section. the wiper arm to its original position; 1. Pull the wiper arm. * otherwise it may be damaged when the 2. Push the release tab A , and then hood is opened. move the wiper blade down the wiper . Make sure the wiper blades contact the arm *1 while pushing the release tab to remove. glass; otherwise the arm may be da-

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself BRAKES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have maged from wind pressure. the brakes checked by an INFINITI retailer. SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjust- ing brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See an INFINITI retailer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in SDI2362 motion. This scraping sound will first occur Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle only when the brake pedal is depressed. *A . This may cause improper windshield After more wear of the brake pad, the washer operation. If the nozzle is clogged, sound will always be heard even if the remove any objects with a needle or small brake pedal is not depressed. Have the pin *B . Be careful not to damage the brakes checked as soon as possible if the nozzle. wear warning sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions,

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25 FUSES occasional brake squeak, squeal or other ENGINE COMPARTMENT noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or CAUTION performance of the brake system. Never use a fuse of a higher or lower Proper brake inspection intervals should amperage rating than that specified on the be followed. For additional information, fuse box cover. This could damage the see the maintenance log section of your electrical system or cause a fire. “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide” for maintenance intervals. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

SDI2584 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position and the headlight switch is turned to OFF. 2. Open the engine hood and remove the cover on the battery and the fuse/ fusible link holder. 3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

SDI2566

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself genuine INFINITI parts.

SDI1754

5. If the fuse is open *A , replace it with a new fuse *B . Spare fuses are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by an INFINITI retailer. The holder *1 also contains the fuses. For checking and/or replacing, see an INFINITI retailer. Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27 SDI2034 SDI2704

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 2. Open the fuse box lid. Extended storage switch (if so 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller equipped) * CAUTION A . To reduce battery drain, the extended 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new storage switch comes from the factory Never use a fuse of a higher or lower fuse. switched off. Prior to delivery of your amperage rating than that specified on the 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the vehicle, the switch is pushed in (switched fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system checked and repaired on) and should always remain on. electrical system or cause a fire. by an INFINITI retailer. Spare fuses are If any electrical equipment does not stored in the fuse box. operate, remove the extended storage If any electrical equipment does not switch and check for an open fuse. operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position and the headlight switch is turned to OFF.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

NOTE: CAUTION If the extended storage switch malfunc- tions or if the fuse is open, it is not Be careful not to allow children to swallow necessary to replace the switch. In this the battery and removed parts. case, remove the extended storage switch and replace it with a new fuse of the same rating. How to remove the extended storage switch: 1. To remove the extended storage switch, be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position. 2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position. 3. Remove the fuse box cover. 4. Pinch the locking tabs *1 found on each side of the storage switch. 5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the fuse box *2 . SDI2294

To replace the battery: 1. Release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key and remove the mechan- ical key. 2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver wrapped with a cloth into the slit of the corner

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29 and twist it to separate the upper part ence received, including interference that from the lower part. may cause undesired operation. 3. Replace the battery with a new one. NOTE: Recommended battery: Changes or modifications not expressly CR2025 or equivalent approved by the party responsible for . Do not touch the internal circuit and compliance could void the user’s authority electric terminals as it could cause a to operate the equipment. malfunction. For Canada: . Hold the battery by the edges. This device complies with RSS-210 of Holding the battery across the con- Industry Canada. Operation is subject to tact points will seriously deplete the the following two conditions: (1) this storage capacity. device may not cause interference, and . SDI1889 Make sure that the + side faces the (2) this device must accept any interfer- bottom of the case. 4. Align the tips of the upper and lower ence, including interference that may parts, and then push them together cause undesired operation of the device. until it is securely closed. 5. Operate the buttons to check its operation. See an INFINITI retailer if you need any assistance for replacement. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer-

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself LIGHTS

1. Front turn signal light 2. Park light 3. Headlight (high- and low-beam) 4. Map light 5. Rear personal light 6. Fog light 7. Side marker light 8. Step light 9. Courtesy light 10. High-mounted stop light 11. Trunk light 12. License plate light 13. Back-up light 14. Rear combination light (rear turn signal/tail/stop/side marker light) HEADLIGHTS Replacing Xenon headlight bulb:

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

SDI2552 When xenon headlights are on, they pro- duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disas- semble. Always have your xenon headlights

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31 replaced at an INFINITI retailer. For addi- EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS tional information, see “Headlight and turn Item Wattage (W) Bulb No. ” “ signal switch in the 2. Instruments and Headlight* controls” section. High/Low beams (xenon) 35 D2S Use the same number and wattage shown Front turn signal light* 21 WY21W in the following chart as originally in- Front fog light* 35 H8 stalled. Park light* 5 W5W Side marker light* 5 W5W If replacement is required, see an INFINITI Rear combination light* retailer. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of back-up 16 W16W the exterior lights in the rain or in a car turn signal 21 WY21W wash. A temperature difference between stop/tail/side marker LED — the inside and the outside of the lens License plate light* 5 W5W causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If Map light 8 — large drops of water collect inside the lens, Rear personal light 8 — contact an INFINITI retailer. Vanity mirror light 2 — Step light* 5 — Trunk light* 3.4 — Courtesy light* LED — High-mounted stop light* LED —

*: See an INFINITI retailer for replacement. NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at an INFINITI retailer for the latest information about parts.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

SDI2550 Map light

SDI1679

SDI2031 Rear personal light Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33 WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” section. Tire inflation pressure Check the pressure of the tires TIRE PRESSURE (including the spare) often and al- Tire Pressure Monitoring System ways prior to long distance trips. The (TPMS) recommended tire pressure specifi- This vehicle is equipped with the Tire cations are shown on the Tire and Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It Loading Information label under the monitors tire pressure of all tires except “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The the spare. When the low tire pressure Tire and Loading Information label is warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the dot affixed to the driver side center pillar. matrix liquid crystal display, one or more Tire pressures should be checked SDI1839 of your tires is significantly under-inflated. regularly because: Vanity mirror light The TPMS will activate only when the . Most tires naturally lose air over vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH time. (25 km/h). Also, this system may not . detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for Tires can lose air suddenly when example a flat tire while driving). driven over potholes or other For more details, see “Low tire pressure objects or if the vehicle strikes a warning light” in the “2. Instruments and curb while parking. controls” section,“Tire Pressure Monitoring The tire pressures should be checked ” “ System (TPMS) in the 5. Starting and when the tires are cold. The tires are driving” section and “Tire Pressure Mon- itoring System (TPMS) ” in the “6. In case considered COLD after the vehicle of emergency” section. has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Incorrect tire pressure, including . Before taking a long trip, or under inflation, may adversely affect whenever you heavily load your tire life and vehicle handling. vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures WARNING are at the specified level. . For additional information regard- . Improperly inflated tires can fail ing tires, refer to “Important Tire suddenly and cause an accident. Safety Information” (US) or “Tire . The Gross Vehicle Weight rating Safety Information” (Canada) in (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S. the Warranty Information Booklet. S./C.M.V.S.S. label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating condi- tions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling character- istics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35 *4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are consid- ered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveabil- ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR. *5 Tire size — see “Tire labeling” later in this section. *6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if so equipped)

SDI2567

Tire and Loading Information label Technical and consumer informa- *1 Seating capacity: The maximum tion” section. number of occupants that can be *3 Original size: The size of the tires seated in the vehicle. originally installed on the vehicle *2 Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle at the factory. loading information” in the “9.

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 3. Remove the gauge. COLD TIRE 4. Read the tire pressure on the SIZE INFLATION gauge stem and compare it to PRESSURE 230 kPa, the specification shown on the P245/50R18 99V FRONT 33 PSI Tire and Loading Information la- ORIGINAL 230 kPa, bel. TIRE 245/40R20 95W 33 PSI 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If 230 kPa, too much air is added, press the P245/50R18 99V 33 PSI core of the valve stem briefly with REAR ORI- GINAL TIRE 230 kPa, the tip of the gauge stem to 245/40R20 95W 33 PSI SDI1949 release pressure. Recheck the 420 kPa, pressure and add or release air T165/80R17 Checking the tire pressure as needed. 60 PSI 420 kPa, 1. Remove the valve stem cap from 6. Install the valve stem cap. SPARE TIRE T165/80D17 60 PSI the tire. 7. Check the pressure of all other 420 kPa, 2. Press the pressure gauge tires, including the spare. T155/80R18 60 PSI squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, re- position the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37 gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. 5. Two-digit number (16): This num- ber is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. 6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can SDI1575 SDI1606 support. You may not find this Example Example information on all tires because it TIRE LABELING *1 Tire size (example: P215/60R16 is not required by law. Federal law requires tire manufac- 94H) 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should turers to place standardized informa- 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is not drive the vehicle faster than tion on the sidewall of all tires. This designed for passenger vehicles. the tire speed rating. information identifies and describes (Not all tires have this informa- the fundamental characteristics of tion.) the tire and also provides the tire 2. Three-digit number (215): This identification number (TIN) for safety number gives the width in milli- standard certification. The TIN can be meters of the tire from sidewall used to identify the tire in case of a edge to sidewall edge. recall. 3. Two-digit number (60): This num- ber, known as the aspect ratio, 8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code permissible inflation pressure. (Optional) *5 Maximum load rating 5. Three-digit code: Date of Manu- This number indicates the maximum facture load in kilograms and pounds that 6. Four numbers represent the week can be carried by the tire. When and year the tire was built. For replacing the tires on the vehicle, example, the numbers 3103 always use a tire that has the same means the 31st week of 2003. If load rating as the factory installed these numbers are missing, then tire. look on the other sidewall of the *6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” SDI1607 tire. Example *3 Tire ply composition and material Indicates whether the tire requires an “ ” *2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) inner tube ( tube type )ornot The number of layers or plies of (“tubeless”). for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX rubber-coated fabric in the tire. XXX XXXX) *7 The word “radial” Tire manufacturers also must indi- “ 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the Depart- cate the materials in the tire, which The word “radial” is shown, if the tire ” ment of Transportation . The sym- include steel, nylon, polyester, and has radial structure. bol can be placed above, below or others. *8 Manufacturer or brand name to the left or right of the Tire * Identification Number. 4 Maximum permissible inflation Manufacturer or brand name is pressure 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s shown. identification mark This number is the greatest amount Other tire-related terminology: of air pressure that should be put in 3. Two-digit code: Tire size In addition to the many terms that the tire. Do not exceed the maximum are defined throughout this section, Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39 Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the the maximum speed rating of the tire. or icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on sidewall that contains a whitewall, . Replacing tires with those not originally all four wheels. bears white lettering or bears manu- specified by INFINITI could affect the facturer, brand and/or model name proper operation of the TPMS. Snow tires molding that is higher or deeper than . For additional information regarding If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to the same molding on the other side- tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety select tires equivalent in size and load wall of the tire, or (2) the outward Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- rating to the original equipment tires. If ” facing sidewall of an asymmetrical mation (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- you do not, it can adversely affect the mation Booklet. safety and handling of your vehicle. tire that has a particular side that Generally, snow tires will have lower speed must always face outward when All season tires ratings than factory equipped tires and mounted on a vehicle. INFINITI specifies all season tires on some may not match the potential maximum TYPES OF TIRES models to provide good performance all vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum year, including snowy and icy road condi- speed rating of the tire. tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL If you install snow tires, they must be the WARNING SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on same size, brand, construction and tread the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better pattern on all four wheels. . When changing or replacing tires, be snow traction than All Season tires and For additional traction on icy roads, sure all four tires are of the same type may be more appropriate in some areas. studded tires may be used. However, some (Example: Summer, All Season or Snow) U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohi- and construction. An INFINITI retailer Summer tires bit their use. Check local, state and may be able to help you with information INFINITI specifies summer tires on some provincial laws before installing studded about tire type, size, speed rating and models to provide superior performance on tires. Skid and traction capabilities of availability. dry roads. Summer tire performance is studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, . Replacement tires may have a lower substantially reduced in snow and ice. may be poorer than that of non-studded speed rating than the factory equipped Summer tires do not have the tire traction snow tires. tires, and may not match the potential rating M&S on the tire sidewall. maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself TIRE CHAINS and performance may be adversely af- Use of tire chains may be prohibited fected. according to location. Check the local laws Tire chains must be installed only on the before installing tire chains. When instal- rear wheels and not on the front wheels. ling tire chains, make sure they are the Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY proper size for the tires on your vehicle and USE ONLY spare tire. are installed according to the chain man- Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving ufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE with tire chains in such conditions can Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used cause damage to the various mechanisms on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle of the vehicle due to some overstress. clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the SAE standard minimum clearances between SDI1662 the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommo- date the use of a winter traction device (tire CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES chains or cables). The minimum clearances Tire rotation are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your INFINITI recommends rotating the vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recom- tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). mended by the tire chain manufacturer to (See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the emergency” section for tire replacing tire chain must be secured or removed to procedures.) prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If As soon as possible, tighten the possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle wheel nuts to the specified torque when using tire chains. In addition, drive at with a torque wrench. a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41 Wheel nut tightening torque: the Warranty Information Booklet. 80 ft-lb (108 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tigh- tened to the specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to the specifica- tion at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

. After rotating the tires, check and SDI1663 adjust the tire pressure. 1. Wear indicator . Retighten the wheel nuts when 2. Wear indicator location mark the vehicle has been driven for Tire wear and damage 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). WARNING . Do not include the T-type spare tire or any other small size spare . Tires should be periodically in- tire in the tire rotation. spected for wear, cracking, bul- . For additional information regard- ging or objects caught in the ing tires, refer to “Important Tire tread. If excessive wear, cracks, Safety Information” (US) or “Tire bulging or deep cuts are found, Safety Information” (Canada) in the tire(s) should be replaced.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself . The original tires have built-in Replacing wheels and tires ence with the brake discs/drums. Such tread wear indicators. When wear When replacing a tire, use the same size, interference can lead to decreased brak- indicators are visible, the tire(s) tread design, speed rating and load carry- ing efficiency and/or early brake pad/ ing capacity as originally equipped. (See shoe wear. See “Wheels and tires” in the should be replaced. “Specifications” in the “9. Technical and “9. Technical and consumer information” . Tires degrade with age and use. consumer information” section for recom- section of this manual for wheel off-set Have tires, including the spare, mended types and sizes of tires and dimensions. over 6 years old checked by a wheels.) . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel qualified technician, because is replaced, the TPMS will not function WARNING and the low tire pressure warning light some tire damage may not be will flash for approximately 1 minute. obvious. Replace the tires as . The use of tires other than those The light will remain on after 1 minute. necessary to prevent tire failure recommended or the mixed use of tires Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or and possible personal injury. of different brands, construction (bias, system resetting. . Improper service of the spare tire bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns . may result in serious personal can adversely affect the ride, braking, Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the injury. If it is necessary to repair handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speed- proper operation of the TPMS. the spare tire, contact an INFINITI ometer calibration, headlight aim and . Do not install a damaged or deformed retailer. bumper height. Some of these effects wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. . For additional information regard- may lead to accidents and could result in Such wheels or tires could have struc- ing tires, refer to “Important Tire serious personal injury. tural damage and could fail without . warning. Safety Information” (US) or “Tire If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels . Safety Information” (Canada) in The use of retread tire is not recom- which have the same off-set dimension. mended. the Warranty Information Booklet. Wheels of a different off-set could cause . For additional information regarding premature tire wear, degrade vehicle tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety handling characteristics and/or interfer- Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43 mation” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- Wheel balance mation Booklet. Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle WARNING handling and tire life. Even with regular . The T-type spare tire should be used for Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) use, wheels can get out of balance. There- fore, they should be balanced as required. emergency use. It should be replaced models with the standard tire at the first Wheel balance service should be per- opportunity to avoid possible tire or formed with the wheels off the vehicle. differential damage. CAUTION Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle . could lead to mechanical damage. Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY . USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid Always use tires of the same type, size, For additional information regarding tires, sharp turns and abrupt braking while brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” driving. radial), and tread pattern on all four (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) . wheels. Failure to do so may result in a in the INFINITI Warranty Information Book- Periodically check spare tire inflation circumference difference between tires let. pressure. Always keep the pressure of on the front and rear axles which will the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at cause excessive tire wear and may Care of wheels 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep damage the transmission, transfer case See “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appear- the pressure of the full size spare tire (if and differential gears. ance and care” section for details about so equipped) at the recommended pres- . ONLY use spare tires specified for the care of the wheels. sure for standard tires, as indicated on Intelligent AWD model. the Tire and Loading Information label. Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY For Tire and Loading Information label If excessive tire wear is found, it is (T-type) spare tire) location, see “Tire and loading informa- recommended that all four tires be re- Observe the following precautions if the T- tion label” in the “9. Technical and placed with tires of the same size, brand, type spare tire must be used, otherwise consumer information”. construction and tread pattern. The tire your vehicle could be damaged or involved . With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare pressure and wheel alignment should also in an accident. tire installed do not drive your vehicle at be checked and corrected as necessary. speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). Contact an INFINITI retailer. . When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY 8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself spare tire should be used on the front wash since it may get caught. wheels and original tire used on the rear wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the two rear original tires. . Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. . Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles. . Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.

CAUTION

. Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle. . Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45 MEMO

8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 9-2 Installing front license plate...... 9-14 Fuel recommendation ...... 9-4 Vehicle loading information...... 9-15 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ...... 9-6 Terms ...... 9-15 Air conditioning system refrigerant and Vehicle load capacity ...... 9-17 lubricant recommendations ...... 9-7 Loading tips...... 9-18 Specifications...... 9-8 Measurement of weights...... 9-18 Engine...... 9-8 Towing a trailer...... 9-19 Wheels and tires ...... 9-9 Flat towing...... 9-19 Dimensions ...... 9-10 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 9-19 When traveling or registering your vehicle in Treadwear...... 9-19 another country...... 9-11 Traction AA, A, B and C...... 9-20 Vehicle identification ...... 9-11 Temperature A, B and C...... 9-20 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate...... 9-11 Emission control system warranty ...... 9-20 Vehicle identification number Reporting safety defects...... 9-21 (chassis number)...... 9-11 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test Engine serial number ...... 9-12 (US only)...... 9-22 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label...... 9-12 Event Data Recorders (EDR)...... 9-23 Emission control information label ...... 9-13 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Tire and loading information label...... 9-13 order information...... 9-23 Air conditioner specification label...... 9-13 In the event of a collision ...... 9-24 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/ LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended specifications US measure Imp measure Liter Fuel 20-1/8 gal 16-3/4 gal 76 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section. Engine oil*2 Drain and refill VQ37VHR 5-1/8 qt 4-3/8 qt 4.9 With oil filter change VK56VD (2WD) 6-3/8 qt 5-1/4 qt 6.0 (AWD) 6-1/2 qt 5-3/8 qt 6.1 . Engine oil with API Certification Mark*1*10 VQ37VHR 4-7/8 qt 4.0 qt 4.6 . Viscosity SAE 5W-30 Without oil filter change VK56VD (2WD) 6.0 qt 5.0 qt 5.7 (AWD) 6-1/8 qt 5-1/8 qt 5.8 Cooling system VQ37VHR 8-7/8 qt 7-3/8 qt 8.4 With reservoir VK56VD 11-1/2 qt 9-5/8 qt 10.9 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent VQ37VHR 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8 Reservoir VK56VD 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8 Automatic transmission fluid ———Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*3 Front: Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Viscosity SAE Differential gear oil ———80W-90*4 Rear: API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90*5 Transfer fluid ———Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*6 Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8. Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*7 Brake fluid Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*8 or equivalent DOT 3 Multi-purpose grease Without limited slip differential ——— NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) With limited slip differential ——— Air conditioning system refrigerant ———HFC-134a (R-134a)*9 NISSAN A/C System Oil ——— Air conditioning system lubricants Type S or exact equivalent Window washer fluid ———Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

9-2 Technical and consumer information *1: INFINITI recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at your INFINITI retailer. *2: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil. *3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty. *4: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 328F(08C). *5: See an INFINITI retailer for service for synthetic oil. *6: Using transfer fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the transfer, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty. *7: DEXRONTM VI type ATF may also be used. *8: Available in mainland USA through an INFINITI retailer. *9: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” later in this section for air conditioner specification label. *10: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section.

Technical and consumer information 9-3 FUEL RECOMMENDATION damage the three-way catalyst. Gasoline containing oxygenates Use unleaded premium gasoline with an . Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and Index) number (Research octane number fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel methanol with or without advertising their 96). system components and is not covered presence. INFINITI does not recommend the If premium gasoline is not available, by the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty. use of fuels of which the oxygenate content unleaded regular gasoline with an octane and the fuel compatibility for your INFINITI cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane Gasoline specifications number 91) may be temporarily used, but ask your service station manager. only under the following precautions: INFINITI recommends using gasoline that If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) . Have the fuel tank filled only partially please take the following precautions as specifications where it is available. Many the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill of the automobile manufacturers devel- up with unleaded premium gasoline as performance problems and/or fuel system oped this specification to improve emis- damage. soon as possible. sion system and vehicle performance. Ask . . Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt your service station manager if the gaso- The fuel should be unleaded and have acceleration. line meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter an octane rating no lower than that However, for maximum vehicle perfor- (WWFC) specifications. recommended for unleaded gasoline. mance, the use of unleaded premium . If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a gasoline is recommended. Reformulated gasoline methanol blend, is used, it should Some fuel suppliers are now producing contain no more than 10% oxygenate. reformulated gasolines. These gasolines (MTBE may, however, be added up to CAUTION are specially designed to reduce vehicle 15%.) emissions. INFINITI supports efforts to- . If a methanol blend is used, it should . Using a fuel other than that specified wards cleaner air and suggests that you contain no more than 5% methanol could adversely affect the emission use reformulated gasoline when available. (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It control system, and may also affect should also contain a suitable amount warranty coverage. of appropriate cosolvents and corro- . Under no circumstances should a leaded sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- gasoline be used, because this will lated with appropriate cosolvents and 9-4 Technical and consumer information corrosion inhibitors, such methanol Aftermarket fuel additives above symptoms are encountered, have blends may cause fuel system damage INFINITI does not recommend the use of your vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer and/or vehicle performance problems. any aftermarket fuel additives (Example: or other competent service facility. At this time, sufficient data is not fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake However, now and then you may notice available to ensure that all methanol valve deposit removers, etc.) which are light spark knock for a short time while blends are suitable for use in INFINITI sold commercially. Many of these additives accelerating or driving up hills. This is no vehicles. intended for gum, varnish or deposit cause for concern, because you get the If any undesirable driveability problems removal may contain active solvent or greatest fuel benefit when there is light such as engine stalling or hard hot starting similar ingredients that can be harmful to spark knock for a short time under heavy are experienced after using oxygenate- the fuel system and engine. engine load. blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low Octane rating tips blend of MTBE. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane CAUTION Take care not to spill gasoline during rating lower than recommended above can . Your vehicle is not designed to run on E- refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cause persistent, heavy spark knock. 85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle not can cause paint damage. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. specifically designed for E-85 fuel can E-85 fuel If you detect a persistent heavy spark damage fuel system components and is E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately knock even when using gasoline of the not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded stated octane rating, or if you hear steady limited warranty. gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a spark knock while holding a steady speed . E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E- on level roads, have an INFINITI retailer fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. 85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. government correct the condition. Failure to correct the . U.S. government regulations require regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing condition is misuse of the vehicle, for ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi- pumps to be identified by a small, square, which INFINITI is not responsible. fied by a small, square, orange and black orange and black label with the common Incorrect ignition timing will result in label with the common abbreviation or abbreviation or the appropriate percentage knocking, after-run or overheating. This in the appropriate percentage for that for that region. turn may cause excessive fuel consumption region. or damage to the engine. If any of the

Technical and consumer information 9-5 Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage. STI0505 Selecting the correct oil filter 1. API certification mark American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi- Your new vehicle is equipped with a high- 2. API service symbol cation or International Lubricant Standar- quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When dization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE- replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its certification and SAE viscosity standard. equivalent for the reason described in COMMENDATION These oils have the API certification mark change intervals. Selecting the correct oil on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should Change intervals It is essential to choose the correct grade, not be used as they could cause engine The oil and oil filter change intervals for quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure damage. your engine are based on the use of the satisfactory engine life and performance, specified quality oils and filters. Oil and see “Capacities and recommended fuel/ Oil additives filter other than the specified quality, or oil lubricants” earlier in this section. INFINITI INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil and filter change intervals longer than recommends the use of an energy conser- additives. The use of an oil additive is not recommended could reduce engine life. ving oil in order to improve fuel economy. necessary when the proper oil type is used Damage to engines caused by improper Select only engine oils that meet the and maintenance intervals are followed. maintenance or use of incorrect oil and

9-6 Technical and consumer information filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new INFINITI vehicle limited warran- CAUTION ties. Your engine was filled with a high quality The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant engine oil when it was built. You do not will cause severe damage to the air con- have to change the oil before the first ditioning system and will require the repla- recommended change interval. Oil and cement of all air conditioner system filter change intervals depend upon how components. you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your frequent oil and filter changes. INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s . repeated short distance driving at cold ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does outside temperatures, not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain . driving in dusty conditions, governmental regulations require the re- covery and recycling of any refrigerant . extensive idling, during automotive air conditioning system . “ ” stop and go rush hour traffic, service. Your INFINITI retailer has the Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Main- trained technicians and equipment needed tenance Guide” for the maintenance sche- to recover and recycle your air conditioning dule. system refrigerant. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE- Contact an INFINITI retailer when servicing FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE- your air conditioning system. COMMENDATIONS The air conditioning system in your INFINITI vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, NISSAN A/C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

Technical and consumer information 9-7 SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE Model VK56VD VQ37VHR Type Gasoline, 4-cycle Gasoline, 4-cycle Cylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-slanted at 908 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 608 3.858 6 3.622 3.760 6 3.385 6 Bore Stroke in (mm) (98.0 6 92.0) (95.5 6 86.0) Displacement cu in (cm3) 338.78 (5,552) 225.54 (3,696) Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 1-2-3-4-5-6 Idle speed rpm Ignition timing No adjustment is necessary. (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm Spark plug DILKAR7B11 FXE24HR11 Spark plug gap STI0397B in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1) (Normal) VK56VD engine Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

STI0425 VQ37VHR engine 9-8 Technical and consumer information WHEELS AND TIRES Road wheel Type Size Offset in (mm) 18 6 8J 1.69 (43) Conventional 20 6 9J 1.69 (43) 17 6 4T 1.18 (30) Spare 18 6 4T 0 (0) Tire Type Size Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold] P245/50R18 Conventional 33 (230) 245/40R20 T165/80R17 Spare (T-type) T165/80D17 60 (420) T155/80R18

Technical and consumer information 9-9 DIMENSIONS in (mm) Overall length (with front license plate) 194.7 (4,945) Overall length (without front license plate) 194.5 (4,940) Overall width 72.6 (1,845) 59.1 (1,500)*1*2 Overall height 59.6 (1,515)*3 Front tread 62.0 (1,575) 61.8 (1,570)*1*2 Rear tread 61.6 (1,565)*3 Wheelbase 114.2 (2,900)

*1: Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)/18-in tire models *2: Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)/20-in tire models *3: Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

9-10 Technical and consumer information WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

If you plan to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify STI0716 STI0717 the vehicle to meet local laws and regula- tions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The laws and regulations for motor vehicle (VIN) PLATE (chassis number) emission control and safety standards vary The vehicle identification number plate is according to the country, state, province or The number is stamped as shown in the attached as shown. This number is the district; therefore, vehicle specifications engine compartment. identification for your vehicle and is used may differ. in the vehicle registration. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, trans- portation, and registration are the respon- sibility of the user. INFINITI is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

Technical and consumer information 9-11 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

STI0584 STI0718 VK56VD engine F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICA- TION LABEL The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifica- tion label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identifi- cation Number (VIN), etc. Review it care- fully.

STI0509 VQ37VHR engine 9-12 Technical and consumer information STI0719 STI0720 STI0721

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL LABEL LABEL The emission control information label is The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire The air conditioner specification label is attached as shown. and Loading Information label affixed to attached as shown. the pillar as illustrated.

Technical and consumer information 9-13 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Use the following steps to mount the license plate: Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the plastic bag. Only use the recommended mounting position, otherwise the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sensor obstruction (if so equipped) may result. . License plate bracket . J-nut 6 2 . Screw 6 2 . Screw grommet 6 2 1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground. 2. Locate the center position *A as illustrated. Line up the license plate bracket under the top of the front bumper *B with the tabs *C . Hold the license plate bracket in place. 3. Mark the center of the hole *D with a felt-tip pen. 4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be sure that the drill only STI0722 goes through the bumper fascia.) 5. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.

9-14 Technical and consumer information VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the grommet hole to add 908 turn onto the WARNING part *E . . It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside the vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. . Do not allow people to ride in any area of vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat STI0723 belts. . Be sure everyone in your vehicle is Mark the center of the hole *F on both sides with a felt-tip pen. Remove the in a seat and using a seat belt bracket from the bumper, and then properly. open 0.79 in (20 mm) diameter holes on the bumper using the marks *F as a TERMS center. It is important to familiarize yourself 7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket before placing the license plate with the following terms before bracket on the fascia. loading your vehicle: 8. Install the license plate bracket with . Curb Weight (actual weight of your screws. vehicle) - vehicle weight includ- 9. Install the license plate with bolts that ing: standard and optional equip- are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm). ment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This

Technical and consumer information 9-15 weight does not include passen- of the load (passengers and car- gers and cargo. go) for the vehicle. This is the . GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb maximum combined weight of weight plus the combined weight occupants and cargo that can be of passengers and cargo. loaded into the vehicle. If the . GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- vehicle is used to tow a trailer, ing) - maximum total combined the trailer tongue weight must be weight of the unloaded vehicle, included as part of the cargo load. passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer This information is located on the tongue load and any other op- Tire and Loading Information la- tional equipment. This informa- bel. tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./ . Cargo capacity - permissible C.M.V.S.S. label. weight of cargo, the weight of . GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - total occupants weight subtracted maximum weight (load) limit spe- from the load limit. cified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. . GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, pas- sengers, cargo, and trailer. . Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - max- imum total weight limit specified

9-16 Technical and consumer information 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For exam- ple, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehi- cle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 STI0365 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 − VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY the total luggage weight. Examples lbs or 640 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.) Do not exceed the load limit of your are shown in the illustration. 5. Determine the combined weight of vehicle shown as “The combined Steps for determining correct load luggage and cargo being loaded weight of occupants and cargo” on limit on the vehicle. That weight may theTireandLoadingInformation 1. Locate the statement “The com- not safely exceed the available label. Do not exceed the number of bined weight of occupants and “ cargo and luggage load capacity occupants shown as Seating Capa- cargo should never exceed XXX kg ” calculated in Step 4. city on the Tire and Loading In- or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s formation label. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a placard. trailer, load from your trailer will To get “the combined weight of 2. Determine the combined weight of be transferred to your vehicle. occupants and cargo”,addthe the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine weight of all occupants, then add will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available

Technical and consumer information 9-17 cargo and luggage load capacity Do not place cargo higher than the MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS of your vehicle. seatbacks. In a sudden stop or Secure loose items to prevent weight Before driving a loaded vehicle, collision, unsecured cargo could shifts that could affect the balance of confirm that you do not exceed the cause personal injury. your vehicle. When the vehicle is Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . Do not load your vehicle any loaded, drive to a scale and weigh or the Gross Axle Weight Rating heavier than the GVWR or the the front and the rear wheels sepa- (GAWR) for your vehicle. (See “Mea- maximum front and rear GAWRs. rately to determine axle loads. In- surement of weights” later in this If you do, parts of your vehicle can dividual axle loads should not section.) break, tire damage could occur, or exceed either of the gross axle Also check tires for proper inflation it can change the way your vehicle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of pressures. See the Tire and Loading handles. This could result in loss the axle loads should not exceed the Information label. of control and cause personal gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). injury. These ratings are given on the LOADING TIPS . Overloading could not only short- vehicle certification label. If weight . The GVW must not exceed GVWR en the life of your vehicle and the ratings are exceeded, move or re- or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V. tires, but also could lead to move items to bring all weights S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. hazardous vehicle handling and below the ratings. . Do not load the front and rear axle long braking distance. This may to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed cause a premature tire malfunc- the GVWR. tion, which could result in a serious accident and personal in- WARNING jury. Failures caused by overload- ing are not covered by the . Properly secure all cargo to help vehicle’s warranty. prevent it from sliding or shifting.

9-18 Technical and consumer information TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Do not tow a trailer with your Automatic transmission DOT (Department Of Transportation) Qual- vehicle. ity Grades: All passenger car tires must To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto- conform to federal safety requirements in FLAT TOWING matic transmission, an appropriate vehicle addition to these grades. dolly MUST be placed under the towed Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on Quality grades can be found where applic- vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the the ground is sometimes called flat towing. able on the tire sidewall between tread dolly manufacturer’s recommendations This method is sometimes used when shoulder and maximum section width. For when using their product. towing a vehicle behind a recreational example: vehicle, such as a motor home. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A TREADWEAR CAUTION The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire . Failure to follow these guidelines can when tested under controlled conditions result in severe transmission damage. on a specified government test course. For . Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- example, a tire graded 150 would wear one ways tow forward, never backward. and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the . DO NOT tow any automatic transmission government course as a tire graded 100. vehicle with all four wheels on the The relative performance of tires depends ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL upon actual conditions of their use, how- DAMAGE internal transmission parts ever, and may depart significantly from the due to lack of transmission lubrication. norm due to variations in driving habits, . For emergency towing procedures refer service practices and differences in road to “Towing recommended by INFINITI” in characteristics and climate. the “6. In case of emergency” section of this manual.

Technical and consumer information 9-19 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Your INFINITI is covered by the following tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a TRACTION AA, A, B AND C emission warranties. The traction grades, from highest to low- level of performance which all passenger For US: est, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades car tires must meet under the Federal represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. . Emission Defects Warranty pavement as measured under controlled Grades B and A represent higher levels of . Emissions Performance Warranty (See conditions on specified government test performance on the laboratory test wheel Warranty Information Booklet for de- surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire than the minimum required by law. tails.) marked C may have poor traction perfor- For Canada: mance. WARNING Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is with other vehicle warranties in your established for a tire that is properly Warranty Information Booklet (Warranty The traction grade assigned to this tire is inflated and not overloaded. Excessive and Roadside Assistance Information (Ca- based on straight-ahead braking traction speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, nada only)) that comes with your INFINITI. If tests, and does not include acceleration, either separately or in combination, can you did not receive a Warranty Information cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction cause heat build-up and possible tire failure. Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assis- characteristics. tance Information (Canada only)), or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: TEMPERATURE A, B AND C . INFINITI Division The temperature grades A (the highest), B, Nissan North America, Inc. and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to Consumer Affairs Department dissipate heat when tested under con- P.O. Box 685003 trolled conditions on a specified indoor Franklin, TN 37068-5003 laboratory test wheel. Sustained high . Nissan Canada Inc. temperature can cause the material of the 5290 Orbitor Drive tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and Mississauga, Ontario, excessive temperature can lead to sudden

9-20 Technical and consumer information REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

L4W 4Z5 For USA rcar. gov. If you believe that your vehicle has a You may notify INFINITI by contacting defect which could cause a crash or our Consumer Affairs Department, could cause injury or death, you toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200. should immediately inform the Na- tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- For Canada istration (NHTSA) in addition to If you believe that your vehicle has a notifying INFINITI. defect which could cause a crash or If NHTSA receives similar complaints, could cause injury or death, you it may open an investigation, and if it should immediately inform Transport finds that a safety defect exists in a Canada in addition to notifying group of vehicles, it may order a INFINITI. recall and remedy campaign. How- If Transport Canada receives com- ever, NHTSA cannot become involved plaints, it may open an investigation, in individual problems between you, and if it finds that a safety defect your retailer, or INFINITI. exists in a group of vehicles, it may To contact NHTSA, you may call the request that INFINITI conduct a recall Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1- campaign. However, Transport Cana- 888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- da cannot become involved in indivi- 9153); go to http://www.safercar. dual problems between you, your gov; or write to: Administrator, retailer, or INFINITI. NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., You may contact Transport Canada’s Washington DC 20590. You can also Defect Investigations and Recalls obtain other information about motor Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. vehicle safety from http://www.safe- You may also report safety defects

Technical and consumer information 9-21 READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only) A vehicle equipped with Intelligent All- online at: starting the engine. If the Malfunction Wheel Drive (AWD) should never be tested Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec- using a two wheel dynamometer (such as 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx. the dynamometers used by some states for seconds, the I/M test condition is “not emissions testing), or similar equipment. Additional information concerning ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 Make sure you inform test facility person- seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. motor vehicle safety may be obtained nel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD from Transport Canada’s Road Safety before it is placed on a dynamometer. Contact an INFINITI retailer to set the “ ” Information Centre at 1-800- 333- Using the wrong test equipment may result ready condition or to prepare the vehicle for testing. 0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/ in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in roadsafety (English speakers) or serious vehicle damage or personal injury. www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere Due to legal requirements in some states/ (French speakers). areas, your vehicle may be required to be To notify INFINITI of any safety con- in what is called the “ready condition” for cerns please contact our Consumer an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of Information Centre toll free at 1-800- the emission control system. 361-4792. The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/mainte- nance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without

9-22 Technical and consumer information ’ EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION Genuine INFINITI Service Manual for this This vehicle is equipped with an Event (e.g. name, gender, age and crash loca- model and prior models can be purchased. Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of tion) are recorded. However, other parties, A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the an EDR is to record, in certain crash or such as law enforcement, could combine best source of service and repair informa- near crash-like situations, such as an air the EDR data with the type of personally tion for your vehicle. This manual is the bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, identifying data routinely acquired during same one used by the factory trained data that will assist in understanding how a crash investigation. a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is technicians working at an INFINITI retailer. designed to record data related to vehicle To read data recorded by an EDR, special Genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals can also dynamics and safety systems for a short equipment is required and access to the be purchased. vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to period of time, typically 30 seconds or In the USA: less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to the vehicle manufacturer and INFINITI For current pricing and availability of record such data as: retailer, other parties, such as law en- forcement, that have the special equip- genuine INFINITI Service Manuals, contact: . How various systems in your vehicle ment, can read the information if they were operating; 1-800-450-9491 have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR www.infiniti-techinfo.com . Whether or not the driver and passen- data will only be accessed with the For current pricing and availability of ger safety belts were buckled/fas- consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals,con- tened; as otherwise required or permitted by law. . How far (if at all) the driver was tact: depressing the accelerator and/or 1-800-247-5321 brake pedal; and, In Canada: . How fast the vehicle was traveling. . Sounds are not recorded. To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this These data can help provide a better model year and prior, contact an INFINITI understanding of the circumstances in retailer. For the phone number and location which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: of an INFINITI retailer in your area call the EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1-800-361- if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no 4792 and a bilingual INFINITI representa- data are recorded by the EDR under normal tive will assist you. driving conditions and no personal data

Technical and consumer information 9-23 IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION zones to minimize the risk that the hood Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this will penetrate the windshield of your unlikely event, there is some important vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imita- information you should know. Many insur- tion) parts may not provide such built in ance companies routinely authorize the safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often use of non-genuine collision parts in order show premature wear, rust and corrosion. to cut costs, among other reasons. Why should you take a chance? Insist on the use of Genuine In over 40 states, the law says you must be INFINITI Collision Parts! advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states have If you want your vehicle to be restored enacted laws that restrict insurance com- using parts made to INFINITI’s original panies from authorizing the use of non- exacting specifications — if you want to genuine collision parts during the new help it to last and hold its resale value, the vehicle warranty. These laws help protect solution is simple. Tell your insurance you, so you can take action to protect agent and your repair shop to only use yourself. Genuine INFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITI does not warrant non-INFINITI parts, nor It’s your right! ’ does INFINITI s warranty apply to damage If you should need further information visit caused by a non-genuine part. us at: Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help www.InfinitiUSA.com (for U.S. customers) protect your personal safety, preserve your or www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian custo- warranty protection and maintain the mers) resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine INFINITI Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease. INFINITI designs its hoods with crumple

9-24 Technical and consumer information 10 Index

Number Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-96 Before starting the engine ...... 5-13 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system...... 5-100 Appearance care Belts (See drive belts)...... 8-21 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) warning light ...... 2-13 Exterior appearance care...... 7-2 Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) ON Interior appearance care ...... 7-4 indicator light ...... 2-17 ® A Armrest...... 1-10 Bluetooth hands-free phone system Ashtrays (See cigarette lighter and ashtrays) .... 2-47 (models with navigation system)...... 4-89 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)...... 5-96 Audible reminders ...... 2-19 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system Active noise control ...... 5-103 Audio operation precautions ...... 4-48 (models without navigation system) ...... 4-100 Adjustable headrests ...... 1-8 Audio system...... 4-48 Bluetooth® streaming audio ...... 4-73 Air bag system Steering wheel audio controls...... 4-87 Brake Front-seat mounted side-impact supplemental Autolight system...... 2-35 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-96 air bag system...... 1-49 Automatic Brake fluid...... 8-17 Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental Automatic climate control ...... 4-36, 4-40 Brake force distribution ...... 5-99 air bag system...... 1-49 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ...... 8-16 Brake system ...... 5-93 Air bag warning labels ...... 1-52 Climate control ...... 4-33 Parking brake operation...... 5-18 Air bag warning light ...... 1-52, 2-16 Driving with automatic transmission ...... 5-14 Brake warning light...... 2-11 Air cleaner housing filter...... 8-22 Automatic door locks ...... 3-6 Break-in schedule ...... 5-90 Air conditioner Automatic drive positioner ...... 3-28 Brightness control Air conditioner specification label ...... 9-13 Automatic moonroof...... 2-55 Display ON/OFF button ...... 4-10 Air conditioning system refrigerant and Automatic seat positioner ...... 3-28 Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-10 lubricant recommendations...... 9-7 Average fuel consumption and speed...... 2-27 Bulb replacement...... 8-31 Automatic climate control ...... 4-33 Avoiding collision and rollover ...... 5-6 In-cabin microfilter...... 4-47 C Air filter B In-cabin microfilter...... 4-47 Cabin air filter...... 4-47 Alarm Battery...... 8-19 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ...... 9-2 How to stop alarm (see vehicle Battery replacement, Intelligent Key...... 3-2 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-89 security system)...... 2-30 Battery saver system ...... 2-36 Card holder...... 2-51 Alcohol, drugs and driving ...... 5-8 Intelligent Key...... 8-29 Catalytic converter Antenna ...... 4-88 Variable voltage control system ...... 8-20 Three way catalyst ...... 5-3 CD/CF/USB memory care and cleaning ...... 4-86 Coolant Driving Center multi-function control panel ...... 4-4 Capacities and recommended Cold weather driving ...... 5-101 Check tire pressure warning...... 2-23 fuel/lubricants ...... 9-2 Driving with automatic transmission ...... 5-14 Child restraints ...... 1-21 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-12 Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-3 LATCH system ...... 1-22 Checking engine coolant level...... 8-12 DVD player operation ...... 4-65 Precautions on child restraints...... 1-21 Corrosion protection ...... 7-7 Child safety ...... 1-19 Cruise control ...... 5-45 E Child safety rear door lock...... 3-6 Fixed speed cruise control (on ICC system) ... 5-65 ECO drive indicator light ...... 2-17 Chimes Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system ...... 5-47 ECO mode...... 5-20 Audible reminders ...... 2-19 Cruise indicator ...... 2-23 ECO pedal system ...... 5-20 Seat belt warning light and chime ...... 2-15 Cup holders ...... 2-48 Economy Cigarette lighter and ashtrays ...... 2-47 Current fuel consumption...... 2-27 Fuel ...... 5-90 Circuit breaker Elapsed time...... 2-27 Fusible link ...... 8-27 D Elapsed time and trip odometer ...... 2-27 Cleaning exterior and interior...... 7-2, 7-4 Daytime running light system ...... 2-37 Emission control information label ...... 9-13 Climate control Defroster switch Emission control system warranty ...... 9-20 Automatic climate control ...... 4-33 Rear window and outside mirror Engine Clock ...... 2-46 defroster switch ...... 2-34 Before starting the engine ...... 5-13 Coat hooks ...... 2-52 Dimensions...... 9-10 Break-in schedule ...... 5-90 Cockpit ...... 0-6, 2-3 Display cleaning ...... 4-8 Capacities and Cold weather driving ...... 5-101 Display controls (See center multi-function recommended fuel/lubricants ...... 9-2 Compact Disc (CD) player (See audio system) ... 4-64 control panel) ...... 4-4 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-12 Compact spare tire ...... 8-44 Distance Control Assist (DCA) system ...... 5-69 Changing engine oil and filter...... 8-13 Console box...... 2-50 Distance Control Assist (DCA) system Checking engine coolant level...... 8-12 Controller switch indicator ...... 2-24 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-13 Center multi-function control panel ...... 4-6 Distance Control Assist (DCA) system Coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-8 Controls warning light ...... 2-12 Emergency engine shut off...... 5-12 Control panel button ...... 4-4 Distance to empty...... 2-27 Engine block heater ...... 5-102 INFINITI Controller ...... 4-6 Dot matrix liquid crystal display ...... 2-20 Engine compartment check locations ...... 8-7 Drive belts ...... 8-21 Engine cooling system ...... 8-11 Drive positioner ...... 3-28 Engine oil ...... 8-13 10-2 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation...... 9-6 Power steering fluid...... 8-16 Fuel gauge ...... 2-9 Engine oil replacement indicator ...... 2-25 Window washer fluid ...... 8-18 Odometer...... 2-6 Engine oil viscosity ...... 9-6 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc Speedometer ...... 2-6 Engine serial number ...... 9-12 (CD) player...... 4-61 Tachometer ...... 2-7 Engine specifications ...... 9-8 Fog light switch ...... 2-39 Trip computer ...... 2-26 Engine start operation indicator ...... 2-22 Forest AirTM...... 4-42 General maintenance ...... 8-3 If your vehicle overheats...... 6-11 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system ...... 5-82 Glove box ...... 2-50 Starting the engine ...... 5-13 Front passenger air bag and status light...... 1-46 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-8 Front power seat adjustment...... 1-3 H Entry/exit function Front seat Hands-free phone system Automatic drive positioner ...... 3-28 Front seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Bluetooth® (models with Event Data Recorders (EDR)...... 9-23 Front-seat active head restraints ...... 1-7 navigation system)...... 4-89 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...... 5-3 Fuel Bluetooth® (models without Capacities and navigation system)...... 4-100 F recommended fuel/lubricants ...... 9-2 Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 2-40 Fuel economy...... 5-90 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 9-12 Head restraints ...... 1-4 Fuel economy information (display)...... 4-12 Filter Headlights Fuel octane rating ...... 9-4 Air cleaner housing filter...... 8-22 Aiming control (See adaptive front lighting Fuel recommendation...... 9-4 Changing engine oil and filter...... 8-13 system (AFS)) ...... 2-37 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-21 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) .... 2-40 Bulb replacement...... 8-31 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-21 Flat tire...... 6-2 Headlight switch ...... 2-35 Gauge...... 2-9 Flat towing...... 9-19 Xenon headlights...... 2-34 Fuses ...... 8-26 Floor mat cleaning ...... 7-5 Headrest Fusible links ...... 8-27 Floor mat positioning aid ...... 7-6 Adjustable headrests ...... 1-8 Fluid G Heated seats ...... 2-41 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ...... 8-16 Heated steering wheel ...... 2-40 Brake fluid...... 8-17 Garage door opener Heater Capacities and HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ...... 2-61 Automatic climate control ...... 4-33 recommended fuel/lubricants ...... 9-2 Gas cap ...... 3-21 Engine block heater ...... 5-102 Engine coolant ...... 8-11 Gauge...... 0-9, 2-6 Hill start assist system ...... 5-100 Engine oil ...... 8-13 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-8 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ...... 2-61 10-3 Hood release ...... 3-18 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system Engine serial number ...... 9-12 Hook warning light ...... 2-13 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 9-12 Coat hooks ...... 2-52 Intelligent Key...... 3-2 Tire and Loading information label...... 8-36, 9-13 Horn ...... 2-41 Intelligent Key system...... 3-7 Vehicle identification number (VIN) ...... 9-11 Battery replacement...... 8-29 Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON I Key operating range...... 3-8 indicator light ...... 2-18 Key operation ...... 3-10 Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system ...... 5-26 Ignition switch Warning signals ...... 3-12 Lane departure warning (LDW) system ...... 5-23 (Push-button) ...... 5-9 Interior light control switch ...... 2-60 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane Automatic transmission models ...... 5-14 Interior light replacement...... 8-32 Departure Prevention (LDP) system ...... 5-22 Immobilizer system...... 2-30 Interior lights ...... 2-59 Lane departure warning light ...... 2-13 In-cabin microfilter...... 4-47 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-20 LATCH system ...... 1-22 Indicator iPod® player operation ...... 4-78 License plate Dot matrix display ...... 2-20 ISOFIX child restraint ...... 1-22 Installing front license plate...... 9-14 Lights ...... 2-16 Light Indicator lights ...... 2-16 J Air bag warning light ...... 1-52 INFINITI Drive mode selector...... 5-19 Bulb replacement...... 8-31 INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 2-30 Jump starting ...... 6-8 Fog light switch ...... 2-39 Engine start ...... 2-30 Headlight switch ...... 2-35 INFINITI voice recognition system ...... 4-114 K Headlights bulb replacement ...... 8-31 INFO button ...... 4-10 Keyless entry (See remote keyless Indicator lights ...... 2-16 Inside mirror...... 3-25 entry system)...... 3-14 Interior light control switch ...... 2-60 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ...... 9-22 Keys ...... 3-2 Interior lights ...... 2-59 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-39 For Intelligent Key system ...... 3-7 Map lights ...... 2-59 Instrument panel ...... 0-8, 2-5 Personal lights...... 2-59 Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD)...... 5-90 L Replacement ...... 8-31 Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off indicator light ... 2-17 Trunk light ...... 2-61 Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system ...... 5-86 Labels Vanity mirror lights ...... 2-61 Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system ...... 5-47 Air bag warning labels ...... 1-52 Warning/indicator lights and Preview function ...... 5-69 Air conditioner specification label ...... 9-13 audible reminders...... 2-11 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system MAIN Emission control information label ...... 9-13 Xenon headlights...... 2-34 switch indicator ...... 2-24 10-4 Lights Master warning light...... 2-15 Engine oil viscosity ...... 9-6 Exterior and interior light replacement ...... 8-32 Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) ...... 3-3 Oil filter replacement indicator...... 2-25 Linking intelligent key...... 4-47 Memory function...... 3-30 Operation Loading information (See vehicle Memory storage Indicators for operation ...... 2-22 loading information) ...... 9-15 Automatic drive positioner ...... 3-29 Outside mirrors...... 3-26 Lock Meter Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ...... 6-11 Automatic door locks ...... 3-6 Trip computer ...... 2-26 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Door locks ...... 3-4 Meters and gauges ...... 0-9, 2-6 order information...... 9-23 Power door lock...... 3-4 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-39 Trunk lid ...... 3-18 Mirror P Locking with mechanical key...... 3-4 Inside mirror...... 3-25 Panic alarm ...... 3-15 Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-23, 3-23 Outside mirrors...... 3-26 Parking Low outside temperature warning ...... 2-23 Vanity mirror...... 3-27 Parking brake operation...... 5-18 Low tire pressure warning light...... 2-14 Monitor Parking on hills ...... 5-92 Low tire pressure warning system (See tire Rearview monitor ...... 4-26 Parking brake break-in...... 5-93 pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) ... 5-4, 6-2, 8-34 Moonroof ...... 2-55 Personal lights...... 2-59 Music box ...... 4-79 M Phone ® N Bluetooth hands-free phone system Maintenance (models with navigation system)...... 4-89 Battery...... 8-19 New vehicle break-in...... 5-90 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system General maintenance ...... 8-3 (models without navigation system) ...... 4-100 Indicators for maintenance (dot matrix)...... 2-25 O Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-89 Inside the vehicle ...... 8-3 Power Odometer...... 2-6 Maintenance information (display) ...... 4-14 Power door lock...... 3-4 Off-road recovery ...... 5-7 Maintenance precautions ...... 8-5 Power outlet ...... 2-46 Oil Maintenance requirements...... 8-2 Power steering fluid...... 8-16 Capacities and Outside the vehicle ...... 8-3 Power steering system ...... 5-93 recommended fuel/lubricants ...... 9-2 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-18 Power windows...... 2-53 Changing engine oil and filter...... 8-13 Under the hood and vehicle...... 8-4 Precautions Checking engine oil level ...... 8-13 Malfunction indicator light (MIL) ...... 2-18 Audio operation ...... 4-48 Engine oil ...... 8-13 Map lights ...... 2-59 Braking precautions ...... 5-93 10-5 Child restraints ...... 1-21 Rear window and outside mirror Seat belt extenders...... 1-18 Cruise control ...... 5-45 defroster switch ...... 2-34 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-18 Lane departure warning (LDW) system ...... 5-23 Rearview monitor ...... 4-26 Seat belt warning light and chime ...... 2-15 Maintenance ...... 8-5 Recorders Seat belts ...... 1-12 Seat belt usage ...... 1-12 Event data ...... 9-23 Seat belts with pretensioners ...... 1-51 Supplemental restraint system...... 1-39 Registering your vehicle in another country ...... 9-11 Shoulder belt height adjustment...... 1-18 When starting and driving...... 5-3 Remote keyless entry system ...... 3-14 Small children ...... 1-20 Pre-crash seat belts with comfort function ...... 1-14 Reporting safety defects ...... 9-21 Three-point type ...... 1-15 Predictive course line settings ...... 4-32 Rise-up and build-up ...... 5-99 Seat(s) Preview function ...... 5-94 Roadside assistance program ...... 6-2 Climate controlled seats ...... 2-43 Preview function (for Intelligent cruise Rollover ...... 5-6 Driver-side memory...... 3-28 control system) ...... 5-69 Roof Heated seats ...... 2-41 Preview Function warning light...... 2-15 Moonroof ...... 2-56 Seats ...... 1-2 Push starting ...... 6-10 Security system Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-9, 5-10 S Vehicle security system...... 2-29 Security system (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Safety R System) Child seat belts ...... 1-19 Engine start ...... 2-30 Radio Reporting safety defects ...... 9-21 Selector lever Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-89 Satellite radio operation ...... 4-62 Shift lock release ...... 5-18 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc Seat adjustment Servicing air conditioner (See automatic (CD) player...... 4-61 Front power seat adjustment...... 1-3 climate control)...... 4-33 Rain-sensing auto wiper system...... 2-33 Front seats...... 1-3 Servicing climate control...... 4-47 Rapid air pressure loss ...... 5-7 Seat belt(s) SETTING button...... 4-16 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test Child safety ...... 1-19 Shift lock release, Transmission...... 5-18 (US only) ...... 9-22 Infants ...... 1-20 Shifting Rear door lock Injured persons ...... 1-14 Automatic transmission ...... 5-14 Child safety rear door lock...... 3-6 Larger children...... 1-20 Shoulder belt height adjustment...... 1-18 Rear pocket ...... 2-51 Precautions on seat belt usage ...... 1-12 SNOW mode ...... 5-20 Rear sunshade...... 2-57 Pre-crash seat belts with comfort function ... 1-14 Spare tire ...... 9-9 Pregnant women...... 1-14 Spark plugs ...... 8-21 Seat belt cleaning...... 7-6 10-6 Speedometer ...... 2-6 Switch Spare tire ...... 8-44 SPORT mode ...... 5-19 Autolight switch ...... 2-35 Tire and Loading information label...... 8-36, 9-13 STANDARD mode...... 5-19 Fog light switch ...... 2-39 Tire chains ...... 8-41 Starting Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 2-40 Tire dressing...... 7-4 Before starting the engine ...... 5-13 Headlight switch ...... 2-35 Tire pressure...... 8-34 Jump starting ...... 8-20 Ignition switch ...... 5-14 Tire pressure information (display)...... 4-12 Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-3 Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF switch ...... 2-44 Tire pressure monitoring system Push starting ...... 6-10 Power door lock switch ...... 3-5 (TPMS) ...... 5-4, 6-2, 8-34 Starting the engine ...... 5-13 Rear window and outside mirror Types of tires ...... 8-40 STATUS button ...... 4-10 defroster switch ...... 2-34 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 9-19 Status light, Front passenger air bag ...... 1-46 Turn signal switch...... 2-39 Wheel/tire size ...... 9-9 Steering Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch...... 2-45 Wheels and tires...... 8-34 Heated steering wheel ...... 2-40 Warning systems switch...... 2-44 Touch screen system...... 4-6 Power steering fluid...... 8-16 Towing Power steering system ...... 5-93 T Flat towing...... 9-19 Steering lock release malfunction indicator Tow truck towing...... 6-12 Tachometer ...... 2-7 (if so equipped) ...... 2-22 Towing a trailer...... 9-19 Temperature gauge Steering-wheel-mounted controls TPMS Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-8 for audio...... 4-87 Tire pressure monitoring system ... 5-4, 6-2, 8-34 Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System) Tilt/telescopic steering...... 3-23 Tire pressure warning system ...... 5-4, 6-2, 8-34 Engine start ...... 2-30 Steering lock (if so equipped) ...... 5-11 Trailer towing...... 9-19 Three-way catalyst ...... 5-3 Storage...... 2-48 Transceiver Tilt/telescopic steering...... 3-23 Sun visors ...... 3-24 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ...... 2-61 “TIMER” indicator...... 2-23 Sunglasses holder ...... 2-49 Transmission Tire Sunshade (rear) ...... 2-57 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ...... 8-16 Tire replacement indicator...... 2-25 Supplemental air bag warning labels ...... 1-52 Driving with automatic transmission ...... 5-14 Tire rotation ...... 8-41 Supplemental air bag warning light ...... 1-52, 2-16 Transmission selector lever lock release ...... 5-18 Tire pressure Supplemental restraint system...... 1-39 Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system) ... 3-14 Low tire pressure warning light...... 2-14 Precautions on supplemental Traveling or registering your vehicle in Tires restraint system...... 1-39 another country ...... 9-11 Flat tire...... 6-2 Trip computer ...... 2-26 Low tire pressure warning system ... 5-4, 6-2, 8-34 10-7 Trip odometer ...... 2-27 Vehicle loading information ...... 9-15 Seat belt warning light and chime ...... 2-15 Trunk Vehicle security system...... 2-29 Warranty Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-20 Ventilators ...... 4-33 Emission control system warranty ...... 9-20 Light ...... 2-61 Voice command (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Washer switch Pass-through ...... 1-11 Phone System)...... 4-106 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...... 2-31 Trunk hooks...... 2-52 Voice command (INFINITI voice Washing ...... 7-2 Trunk lid ...... 3-18 recognition system) ...... 4-121, 4-130 Waxing ...... 7-2 Trunk lid release switch ...... 3-19 Voice recognition Welcome light ...... 2-58 Trunk open request switch ...... 3-19 Alternate command mode ...... 4-127 Wheel/tire size ...... 9-9 Trunk release power cancel switch ...... 3-20 Voice recognition system ...... 4-114 Wheels and tires...... 8-34 Turn signal switch...... 2-39 Voice recognition, Standard mode...... 4-114 Care of wheels...... 7-3 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ...... 7-3 U W Window washer fluid ...... 8-18 Window(s) Underbody cleaning ...... 7-3 Warning Cleaning ...... 7-3 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 9-19 Dot matrix display ...... 2-20 Power windows...... 2-53 USB memory operation ...... 4-68 Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 2-40 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...... 2-31 Lane departure warning (LDW) system ...... 5-23 Wiper V Lights ...... 2-11 Rain-sensing auto wiper system...... 2-33 Tire pressure monitoring system Vanity mirror...... 3-27 Windshield wiper and washer switch ...... 2-31 (TPMS) ...... 5-4, 6-2, 8-34 Vanity mirror lights ...... 2-61 Wiper blades ...... 8-24 Warning/indicator lights and Variable voltage control system ...... 8-20 audible reminders...... 2-10 Vehicle X Warning labels Dimensions...... 9-10 Air bag warning labels ...... 1-52 Xenon headlights...... 2-34 Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ...... 6-15 Warning light Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch...... 2-45 Air bag warning light ...... 1-52, 2-16 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system...... 5-98 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) warning light ...... 2-11 warning light ...... 2-16 Brake warning light...... 2-11 Vehicle information and settings (display).... 4-10 Lane departure warning light ...... 2-13 Vehicle identification number (VIN) ...... 9-11 Low tire pressure warning light...... 2-14 10-8 MEMO

10-9 GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION: gasoline be used, since this will damage NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE- Use unleaded premium gasoline with an the three way catalyst. DURES RECOMMENDATION: octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock . Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of Index) number (Research octane number vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 vehicle use, follow the recommendations 96). fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel outlined in the “Break-in schedule” in the If premium gasoline is not available, system components and is not covered “5. Starting and driving” section of this unleaded regular gasoline with an octane by the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty. Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommen- rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane dations for the future reliability and number 91) may be temporarily used, but For additional information, see “Capacities economy of your new vehicle. only under the following precautions: and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “ ” . Have the fuel tank filled only partially 9. Technical and consumer information with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill section. up with unleaded premium gasoline as ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: soon as possible. . Engine oil with API Certification Mark . Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt . Viscosity SAE 5W-30 acceleration. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/ However, for maximum vehicle perfor- lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con- mance, the use of unleaded premium sumer information” section for engine oil gasoline is recommended. and oil filter recommendation. CAUTION COLD TIRE PRESSURES: The label is typically located on the driver ’ . Using a fuel other than that specified side center pillar or on the driver s door. “ could adversely affect the emission For additional information, see Wheels ” “ control systems, and may also affect and tires in the 8. Maintenance and do- ” warranty coverage. it-yourself section. . Under no circumstances should a leaded